Owners Manual

2021 KICKS

OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. OWNER’S MANUAL SUPPLEMENT

The information contained within this supplement revises or adds to the “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)” section of the “Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of the 2021 NISSAN Kicks Owner’s manual.

Read carefully and keep in the vehicle.

Printing: November 2020 Publication No. SU21EA 0P15U0 install the child restraint. Be sure to follow – Inspect the lower anchors by insert- the child restraint manufacturer's instruc- ing your fingers into the lower an- tions for installation. chor area. Feel to make sure there The LATCH anchor points can be used to are no obstructions over the an- install child restraints in either of the rear chors such as seat belt webbing or outboard seating positions or in the center seat cushion material. The child re- rear seating position. Please refer to the straint will not be secured properly if following section of this Owner’s Manual for the lower anchors are obstructed. specific information about installing a child Child restraint anchorages are de- restraint in the center rear seating position signed to withstand only those loads using LATCH anchors. imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are LATCH lower anchor they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to LRS3073 WARNING the vehicle. Doing so could damage the LATCH system lower anchor locations child restraint anchorages. The child LATCH (Lower Anchors and Failure to follow the warnings and in- restraint will not be properly installed Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM structions for proper use and installa- using the damaged anchorage, and a tion of child restraints could result in child could be seriously injured or killed Your vehicle is equipped with special an- serious injury or death of a child or in a collision. chor points that are used with LATCH sys- other passengers in a sudden stop or tem compatible child restraints. This sys- collision: tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX – Only attach LATCH system compat- or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- ible child restraints to the Lower An- tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat chors shown in the illustration. For belt to secure the child restraint unless the additional information, refer to the combined weight of the child and child re- following sections of this Owner’s straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- Manual for installation guidance. bined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to (These are sometimes referred to as “shared anchors” or “borrowed anchors.”) CRS with rigid lower attachments cannot be installed in the center seat. This type of CRS should only be installed in the outboard seating positions.

WARNING Never attach two CRS attachments to the same LATCH anchor. This may overload the anchor in a collision, which could increase the risk of the occupant’s serious injury or death. LRS3036 LRS3318 When installing the CRS in the center LATCH lower anchor location LATCH in the center rear seating rear seating position with the inboard LATCH anchors, be careful to ensure any The LATCH lower anchors are located as position occupant or CRS in the outboard seat- shown. A label is attached to the seatback There are no LATCH anchors dedicated to ing positions is properly restrained us- to help you locate the LATCH lower the center rear seating position. However, ing the vehicle seat belt and there is no anchors. the inboard LATCH anchors belonging to interference with the center CRS instal- the two outboard seating positions (indi- lation. If the outboard occupants can- cated by the arrows) can be used together not be properly restrained, consider us- to secure a CRS in the center rear seating ing the vehicle seat belt to restrain the position. These anchors are separated by a CRS in the center seating position, or distance OA of 13 in (335 mm). Before at- moving the CRS to another position in- tempting to secure a CRS in this seating stead. position, ensure that the CRS manufacturer’s instructions permit the use of LATCH anchors with the spacing indicated above. Top tether anchor WARNING • Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged. LRS0661 LRS0662 • The child restraint top tether strap LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment may be damaged by contact with the Installing child restraint LATCH When installing a child restraint, carefully tonneau cover or items in the cargo lower anchor attachments read and follow the instructions in this area. Remove the tonneau cover (if so manual and those supplied with the child equipped) from the vehicle or secure LATCH compatible child restraints include restraint. it in the cargo area. Also secure any two rigid or webbing-mounted attach- items in the cargo area. Your child ments that can be connected to two an- could be seriously injured or killed in chors located at certain seating positions a collision if the top tether strap is in your vehicle. With this system, you do not damaged. have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

LRS3329 Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points are located on the back of the rear seats. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you un- cerning proper use of such accessories Before driving your vehicle, please read this derstand the operation and maintenance prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac- Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many cessory. It is recommended that you visit a familiarity with controls and maintenance miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. NISSAN dealer for details concerning the requirements assisting you in the safe op- Please read through this manual before particular accessories with which your ve- eration of your vehicle. operating your vehicle. hicle is equipped. A separate Warranty Information Book- A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle WARNING let explains details about the warranties best. When you require any service or have IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance any questions, they will be glad to assist REMINDERS! and schedules” section of this manual you with the extensive resources available explains details about maintaining and to them. Follow these important driving rules to servicing your vehicle. You will also re- help ensure a safe and comfortable trip ceive a separate Customer Care/Lemon for you and your passengers! Law Booklet (U.S. only) that will explain • NEVER drive under the influence of how to resolve any concerns you may alcohol or drugs. have with your vehicle, and clarify your • ALWAYS observe posted speed limits rights under your state's lemon law. Ad- and never drive too fast for conditions. ditionally, you may receive a separate ® • ALWAYS give your full attention to NissanConnect Owner’s Manual that driving and avoid using vehicle fea- will explain the various features and tures or taking other actions that functions your system may have. could distract you. In addition to factory-installed options, • ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap- your vehicle may also be equipped with propriate child restraint systems. additional accessories installed prior to de- Preteen children should be seated in livery. It is recommended that you visit a the rear seat. NISSAN dealer for details concerning the • ALWAYS provide information about particular accessories with which your ve- the proper use of vehicle safety fea- hicle is equipped. It is important that you tures to all occupants of the vehicle. familiarize yourself with all disclosures, • ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual warnings, cautions and instructions con- for important safety information. WHEN READING THE MANUAL

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This manual includes information for all fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO- features and equipment available on this GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual. This vehicle should not be modified. model. Features and equipment in your ve- Modification could affect its perfor- hicle may vary depending on model, trim IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT mance, safety, emissions or durability level, options selected, order, date of pro- THIS MANUAL and may even violate governmental duction, region or availability. Therefore, You will see various symbols in this manual. regulations. In addition, damage or per- you may find information about features or They are used in the following ways: formance problems resulting from equipment that are not included or in- modifications may not be covered un- stalled on your vehicle. WARNING der NISSAN warranties. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at This is used to indicate the presence of WARNING the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the a hazard that could cause death or se- right to change specifications, perfor- rious personal injury. To avoid or re- Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di- mance, design or component suppliers duce the risk, the procedures must be agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses without notice and without obligation. followed precisely. the port during normal driving, for ex- From time to time, NISSAN may update or ample remote insurance company revise this manual to provide Owners with CAUTION monitoring, remote vehicle diagnos- the most accurate information currently tics, telematics or engine reprogram- available. Please carefully read and retain This is used to indicate the presence of ming, may cause interference or dam- with this manual all revision updates sent a hazard that could cause minor or age to vehicle systems. We do not to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac- moderate personal injury or damage to recommend or endorse the use of any cess to accurate and up-to-date informa- your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un- tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver- the procedures must be followed less specifically approved by NISSAN. sions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any carefully. The vehicle warranty may not cover updates can also be found in the Owner damage caused by any aftermarket section of the NISSAN website at https:// plug-in device. owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Con- sumer Affairs. For contact information, re- CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Per- chlorate Material – special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/”. BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and APD1005 licensed to If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do Panasonic. this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. © Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's these indicate movement or action. Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me- Arrows in an illustration that are similar to chanical, photocopying, recording or oth- these call attention to an item in the erwise, without the prior written permis- illustration. sion of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V. NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa- NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information: tion at: you would like to provide NISSAN directly – Your name, address, and telephone For U.S. customers with comments or questions, please con- number Nissan North America, Inc. tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- – Vehicle identification number (attached Consumer Affairs Department ment using our toll-free number: to the top of the instrument panel on the P.O. Box 685003 For U.S. customers driver's side) Franklin, TN 37068-5003 1-800-NISSAN-1 – Date of purchase or via e-mail at: (1-800-647-7261) – Current odometer reading [email protected] For Canadian customers – Your NISSAN dealer's name For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122 – Your comments or questions Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive OR Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: [email protected] If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers) We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. Table of Illustrated table of contents 0 contents Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Do-it-yourself 8

Maintenance and schedules 9

Technical and consumer information 10

Index 11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ...... 0-2 Instrument panel...... 0-6 Exterior front ...... 0-3 Engine compartment check locations...... 0-8 Exterior rear ...... 0-4 Warning and indicator lights ...... 0-9 Passenger compartment ...... 0-5 AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 6. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-10, 1-42) 7. Rear outboard seat mounted side- impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 8. Top tether anchor (located on seatback) (P. 1-21) 9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) (P. 1-21) 10. Rear seats (P. 1-4) 11. Front seat side-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags (P. 1-42) 12. Front seats (P. 1-3) 13. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-42) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2660 1. Front passenger supplemental knee air 3. Occupant classification sensor (weight bag (P. 1-42) sensor) (P. 1-42) 2. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-42) 4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT

6. Front view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-16) 7. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-43) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24) 8. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-43) Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) (P. 2-43) 9. Tire pressure (P. 8-27) Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-34) 10. Mirrors (P. 3-28) Side camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-16) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2673 1. Door locks (P. 3-4) 3. Windshield (P. 8-16) NISSAN Intelligent Key® system (P. 3-7) 4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-40) Keys (P. 3-2) 5. Engine hood (P. 3-21) 2. Power windows (P. 2-70) Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR REAR

7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24) 8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25) Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-25) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-4) 9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2672 1. Antenna (P. 4-63) 5. Liftgate release (P. 3-22) 2. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-42) Rearview camera (P. 4-8, 4-16) 3. High mount stop light (P. 8-24) 6. Parking sensor(s) (if so equipped) 4. Rear wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41) (P. 5-140) 0-4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2455 1. Glove box (P. 2-60) 5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-60) 2. Rearview mirror (P. 3-28) 6. Center console storage (P. 2-60) 3. Map lights (P. 2-74) 4. Sun visors (P. 3-27) Illustrated table of contents 0-5 INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-10) Trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9) Vehicle information display (if so equipped) (P. 2-23) 5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-40) 6. Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-42) 7. Center display controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-43) Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-43) 8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-43) 10. Passenger's supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 11. Glove box (P. 2-60) 12. Front passenger supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-42) 13. Climate controls (P. 4-32, 4-40) Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-51) 14. Shift lever (P. 5-17) 15. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-11) 16. Electronic parking brake (if so equipped) (P. 5-23) Automatic brake hold switch (if so LII2662 equipped) (P. 5-25) 1. Vents (P. 4-31) 3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 17. Power outlet (P. 2-58) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/ Horn (P. 2-50) USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-43) turn signal switch (P. 2-43) AUX jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-43)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents 18. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System Refer to the page number indicated in (P. 4-2, 4-67) parentheses for operating details. Cruise control switches (P. 5-56) 19. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-42) 20. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock lever (P. 3-26) 21. Hood release (P. 3-21) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-25) 22. Steering wheel switches for audio control (P. 4-2, 2-23) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (if so equipped) (P. 4-2) 23. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-53) Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-53) Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-54) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-55) Instrument panel pocket (if so equipped) (P. 2-60) Enter/select switch for trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9) * Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual (if so equipped).

Illustrated table of contents 0-7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-9) 6. Fuse box (P. 8-18) 7. Battery (P. 8-11) 8. Fuse box (P. 8-18) 9. Air cleaner (P. 8-15) 10. Engine drive belt location (P. 8-13)

LDI3471 1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model) 2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4) (P. 8-10) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-5) 4. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-5) 0-8 Illustrated table of contents WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Indicator Indicator Indicator light (red) light (red) light (red)

Brake warning 2-12 Engine oil pres- 2-14 Seat belt warning 2-15 light (if so sure warning light light and chime or equipped)

High temperature 2-14 Security indicator 2-15 warning light (if so light equipped) Charge warning 2-13 light LED Headlight 2-14 Supplemental air 2-15 system warning bag warning light light (if so Door open warn- 2-13 equipped) ing light (if so Warning/ Name Page Master warning 2-14 equipped) Indicator light (if so light equipped) Electronic parking 2-13 (yellow) brake indicator Rear seat belt 2-14 Anti-lock Braking 2-15 or light (if so System (ABS) equipped) warning light and chime (if so or warning light equipped)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9 Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Indicator Indicator Indicator light light light (yellow) (yellow) (yellow)

Automatic Emer- 2-16 Electronic parking 2-16 Low fuel warning 2-17 gency Braking brake warning light (if so (AEB) system or light (if so equipped) warning light (if so equipped) equipped) Low tire pressure 2-17 warning light Automatic Emer- 2-16 gency Braking Engine start op- 2-16 (AEB) with Pedes- eration indicator Low windshield- 2-19 trian Detection light (if so washer fluid system warning equipped) warning light (if so light (if so equipped) equipped) Front passenger 2-17 air bag status Malfunction Indi- 2-19 Blind Spot Warn- 2-16 light cator Light (MIL) ing (BSW) indicator light (if so Lane Departure 2-17 equipped) Warning (LDW) Master warning 2-19 indicator light (if light (if so so equipped) equipped)

0-10 Illustrated table of contents Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Indicator Indicator Indicator light light light (yellow) (yellow) (other)

NISSAN Intelligent 2-19 Vehicle Dynamic 2-20 High Beam Assist 2-21 Key® warning light Control (VDC) OFF indicator light (if so equipped) indicator light (green) (if so equipped) Power steering 2-19 Warning/ Name Page warning light High beam indi- 2-21 Indicator cator light (blue) light (other) Rear Automatic 2-20 Braking (RAB) Automatic brake 2-21 Lane Departure 2-21 warning light (if so hold indicator Warning (LDW) equipped) light (white/ indicator light green) (if so (green) (if so Shift P (Park) 2-20 equipped) equipped) warning light (if so equipped) CRUISE indicator 2-21 NISSAN Intelligent 2-22 light (green) (if so Key® warning light Slip indicator light 2-20 equipped) (green) (if so equipped) Front fog light in- 2-21 SET indicator light 2-22 dicator light (green) (if so (green) (if so equipped) equipped)

Illustrated table of contents 0-11 Warning/ Name Page Indicator light (other)

Side light and 2-22 headlight indicator light (green)

SPORT mode indi- 2-22 cator light (green) (if so equipped)

Turn signal/ 2-22 hazard indicator lights (green)

0-12 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats...... 1-2 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-17 Front manual seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Child safety ...... 1-18 Folding rear seat ...... 1-4 Infants ...... 1-19 Armrest (if so equipped for driver’s side Small children ...... 1-19 only)...... 1-5 Larger children ...... 1-19 Head restraints/headrests ...... 1-5 Child restraints ...... 1-21 Adjustable head restraint/headrest Precautions on child restraints ...... 1-21 components ...... 1-6 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Non-adjustable head restraint/ CHildren) system ...... 1-23 headrest components ...... 1-6 Rear-facing child restraint installation Remove...... 1-7 using LATCH ...... 1-25 Removable (without Bose head Rear-facing child restraint installation restraint/headrest speaker system using the seat belts ...... 1-27 only)...... 1-7 Forward-facing child restraint Install ...... 1-8 installation using LATCH ...... 1-30 Adjust ...... 1-8 Forward-facing child restraint Seatbelts...... 1-10 installation using the seat belts ...... 1-33 Precautions on seat belt usage...... 1-10 Booster seats ...... 1-38 Seat belt warning light and chime ...... 1-13 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...... 1-42 Pregnant women ...... 1-13 Precautions on SRS ...... 1-42 Injured persons ...... 1-14 Supplemental air bag warning labels ...... 1-63 Three-point type seat belt with Supplemental air bag warning light ...... 1-64 retractor...... 1-14 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-17 SEATS

• Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. • To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly be- ARS1152 come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people WARNING • For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the and pets. • Do not ride in a moving vehicle when seat should be upright. Always sit • Do not adjust the driver’s seat while the seatback is reclined. This can be well back and upright in the seat with driving so full attention may be given dangerous. The shoulder belt will not both feet on the floor and adjust the to vehicle operation. The seat may be against your body. In an accident, seat properly. For additional infor- move suddenly and could cause loss you could be thrown into it and re- mation, see “Precautions on seat belt of control of the vehicle. ceive neck or other serious injuries. usage” (P. 1-10). • The seatback should not be reclined You could also slide under the lap belt • After adjustment, gently rock in the any more than needed for comfort. and receive serious internal injuries. seat to make sure it is securely Seat belts are most effective when locked. the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased. 1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage. FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.

LRS2795 LRS2814 Forward and backward Reclining Pull the center of the bar up and hold it To recline the seatback, pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or back- and lean back. To bring the seatback forward to the desired position. Release the ward, pull the lever up and lean your body bar to lock the seat in position. forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see “Precautions on seat belt usage” (P. 1-10). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 • Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. • When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

LRS2202 LRS3072 Seat lifter (driver's seat) FOLDING REAR SEAT Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to Pull the knob OA to fold each seatback adjust the seat height until the desired po- down. sition is achieved. WARNING • Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.

1-4 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

WARNING Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/ headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/ LRS2339 headrest has been removed. If the head LRS2695 ᭺A Stowed position restraint/headrest was removed, rein- The illustration shows the seating posi- stall and properly adjust the head tions equipped with head ᭺B Resting position restraint/headrest before an occupant restraints/headrests. ARMREST (if so equipped for uses the seating position. Failure to fol- ᭡ Indicates the seating position is driver’s side only) low these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/ equipped with a head restraint. To use the armrest, pull it down to the rest- headrests. This may increase the risk of ࡯ Indicates the seating position is ing position. serious injury or death in a collision. equipped with a headrest. + Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable). • Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 • Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position. • The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame. • Proper Adjustment: – For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest. – If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the LRS2300 LRS2299 highest position. ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD • If the head restraint/headrest has been HEADREST COMPONENTS RESTRAINT/HEADREST removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and COMPONENTS locked in place before riding in that des- 1. Removable head restraint/headrest ignated seating position. 2. Multiple notches 1. Removable head restraint/headrest 3. Lock knob 2. Single notch 4. Stalks 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks

1-6 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

LRS2302 LRS2302 REMOVE REMOVABLE (without Bose head Use the following procedure to remove the restraint/headrest speaker head restraint/headrest: system only) 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position. CAUTION 2. Push and hold the lock knob. Do not remove head restraint/headrest from vehicles equipped with Bose head 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest restraint/headrest speaker system. from the seat. Removal may damage the system 4. Store the head restraint/headrest prop- wiring. erly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351 INSTALL ADJUST For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest 1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks For adjustable head restraint/headrest Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in with the holes in the seat. Make sure that Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the the notch before riding in that designated the head restraint/headrest is facing the center is level with the center of your ears. If seating position. correct direction. The stalk with the your ear position is still higher than the notch (notches) O1 must be installed in recommended alignment, place the head the hole with the lock knob O2 . restraint/headrest at the highest position. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

1-8 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2305 LRS2306 Raise Lower To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it To lower, push and hold the lock knob and up. push the head restraint/headrest down. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated the notch before riding in that designated seating position. seating position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 SEAT BELTS

SSS0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces USAGE or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being If you are wearing your seat belt properly driven. adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

1-10 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING WARNING • Every person who drives or rides in • The seat belt should be properly ad- this vehicle should use a seat belt at justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so all times. Children should be in the may reduce the effectiveness of the rear seats and in an appropriate entire restraint system and increase restraint. the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 • Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- • Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have curely fastened to the proper buckle. activated, they cannot be reused and • Do not wear the seat belt inside out must be replaced together with the or twisted. Doing so may reduce its retractor. It is recommended that you effectiveness. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. • Do not allow more than one person • All seat belt assemblies, including re- to use the same seat belt. tractors and attaching hardware, • Never carry more people in the ve- should be inspected after any colli- hicle than there are seat belts. sion. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. • If the seat belt warning light glows NISSAN recommends that all seat continuously while the ignition is belt assemblies in use during a colli- turned ON with all doors closed and sion be replaced unless the collision all seat belts fastened, it may indi- was minor and the belts show no SSS0014 cate a malfunction in the system. damage and continue to operate Have the system checked. It is rec- properly. Seat belt assemblies not in WARNING ommended that you visit a NISSAN use during a collision should also be dealer for this service. • Always route the shoulder belt over inspected and replaced if either your shoulder and across your chest. • No changes should be made to the damage or improper operation is Never put the belt behind your back, seat belt system. For example, do not noted. under your arm or across your neck. modify the seat belt, add material, or • All child restraints and attaching The belt should be away from your install devices that may change the hardware should be inspected after face and neck, but not falling off your seat belt routing or tension. Doing so any collision. Always follow the re- shoulder. may affect the operation of the seat straint manufacturer's inspection in- belt system. Modifying or tampering • Position the lap belt as low and snug structions and replacement recom- with the seat belt system may result as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT mendations. The child restraints in serious personal injury. THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high should be replaced if they are could increase the risk of internal in- damaged. juries in an accident.

1-12 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system • The front passenger’s seat belt is not fas- • An object placed under the front passen- tened and the seat is occupied by a pas- ger seat. senger for 7 seconds after the ignition • An object placed between the seat cush- switch is placed in the ON position. ion and center console or between the • The front passenger’s seat belt is not fas- seat cushion and the door. tened and objects or external force on • An object hanging on the seat or placed the passenger seat change the seat belt in the seatback pocket. reminder classification to Occupied. • A child restraint or other object pressing The seat belt warning light will flash under against the rear of the seatback. the conditions shown above until the necessary seat belt is securely fastened. NOTE: A warning chime will sound for approxi- The rear seats are equipped with a seat mately 95 seconds or until one of the fol- belt warning message in the vehicle in- LRS0786 lowing conditions is met: formation display (if so equipped). SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND • The unbuckled front occupant’s seat belt For additional information, see “Vehicle In- is securely fastened. formation Display” (P. 2-23). CHIME • The seat belt reminder function in the The driver and front passenger seat is front passenger seat no longer detects PREGNANT WOMEN equipped with an enhanced seat belt re- that the front passenger seat is occupied. NISSAN recommends that pregnant minder function. If your vehicle is equipped • The ignition is turned off. women use seat belts. The seat belt should with an enhanced seat belt reminder func- be worn snug and always position the lap tion, a visual and audible alert will operate if The below situations could result in the belt as low as possible around the hips, not a driver or front passenger seat belt is un- seat belt reminder light being illuminated the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your buckled at speeds of approximately 9 mph and the chime sounding, even with no oc- shoulder and across your chest. Never run (15 km/h) or more under the following con- cupant present in the passenger seat: the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal ditions: • Heavy objects placed on the seat. area. Contact your doctor for specific • If the driver seat belt is not fastened. • Someone pushing or pulling on the front recommendations. passenger seat.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 INJURED PERSONS • Do not allow children to play with the NISSAN recommends that injured persons seat belts. Most seating positions are use seat belts. Check with your doctor for equipped with Automatic Locking specific recommendations. Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT around a child’s neck with the ALR WITH RETRACTOR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt WARNING retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. • Every person who drives or rides in Unbuckle the seat belt to release the this vehicle should use a seat belt at child. If the seat belt cannot be un- all times. buckled or is already unbuckled, re- • Do not ride in a moving vehicle when lease the child by cutting the seat the seatback is reclined. This can be belt with a suitable tool (such as a LRS2795 dangerous. The shoulder belt will not knife or scissors) to release the seat be against your body. In an accident, belt. Fastening the seat belts you could be thrown into it and re- 1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa- ceive neck or other serious injuries. tion, see “Seats” (P. 1-2). You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle • For the most effective protection OA until you hear and feel the latch when the vehicle is in motion, the engage. seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with • The retractor is designed to lock both feet on the floor and adjust the during a sudden stop or on impact. A seat belt properly. slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

1-14 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-21). The ALR mode should be used only for LRS3087 LRS2675 child restraint installation. During nor- • If the seat belt cannot be pulled 3. Position the lap belt portion low and mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is ac- from its fully retracted position, snug on the hips OB as shown. firmly pull the belt and release it. tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the Then smoothly pull the belt out of belt tension. It can also change the op- retractor to take up extra slack C .Be the retractor. O eration of the front passenger air bag. sure the shoulder belt is routed over For additional information, see “Supple- your shoulder and across your chest. mental air bag warning light” (P. 1-64). The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions’ three-point seat belts WARNING have two modes of operation: When fastening the seat belts, be cer- • Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) tain that the seatbacks are completely • Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) secured in the latched position. If they The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex- are not completely secured, passen- tend and retract to allow the driver and gers may be injured in an accident or passengers some freedom of movement sudden stop. Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows: • Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to learn more about seat belt operation.

WRS0139 LRS0242 Unfastening the seat belts Shoulder belt height adjustment To unfasten the seat belt, press the button (front seats) on the buckle O1 . The seat belt automati- The shoulder belt anchor height should be cally retracts. adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, see “Precautions on Checking seat belt operation seat belt usage” (P. 1-10). To adjust, pull out Seat belt retractors are designed to lock the adjustment button O1 and move the seat belt movement by two separate shoulder belt anchor to the desired posi- methods: tion O2 , so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away • When the seat belt is pulled quickly from from your face and neck, but not falling off the retractor your shoulder. Release the adjustment but- • When the vehicle slows down rapidly ton to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

1-16 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required. • After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the WARNING shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in • Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, position. made by the same company which made the original equipment seat • The shoulder belt anchor height belts, should be used with NISSAN should be adjusted to the position seat belts. best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire • Adults and children who can use the restraint system and increase the standard seat belt should not use an chance or severity of injury in an extender. Such unnecessary use accident. could result in serious personal injury LRS3082 in the event of an accident. • Never use seat belt extenders to in- Seat belt hook stall child restraints. If the child re- When the seat belt is not in use and when straint is not secured properly, the folding down the rear seats, hook the rear child could be seriously injured or seat belts on the seat belt hooks. killed in a collision or a sudden stop. SEAT BELT EXTENDERS SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE If, because of body size or driving position, it • To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a is not possible to properly fit the lap/ mild soap solution or any solution rec- shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender ommended for cleaning upholstery or that is compatible with the installed seat carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow belts is available for purchase. The ex- the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) allow the seat belts to retract until they of length and may be used for either the are completely dry. driver or front passenger seating position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 CHILD SAFETY

• If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt WARNING There are three basic types of child re- guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat straint systems: belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoul- Do not allow children to play with the • Rear-facing child restraints der belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. seat belts. Most seating positions are • Forward-facing child restraints equipped with Automatic Locking Re- • Periodically check to see that the seat • Booster seats belt and the metal components, such tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible belt becomes wrapped around a child’s The proper restraint depends on the child's wires and anchors, work properly. If loose neck with the ALR mode activated, the size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year parts, deterioration, cuts or other dam- child can be seriously injured or killed if and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed age on the webbing is found, the entire the seat belt retracts and becomes in rear-facing child restraints. Forward- seat belt assembly should be replaced. tight. This can occur even if the vehicle facing child restraints are available for chil- is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re- dren who outgrow rear-facing child release the child. If the seat belt cannot straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, seats are used to help position a vehicle release the child by cutting the seat lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife longer use a forward-facing child restraint. or scissors) to release the seat belt. WARNING Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly Infants and children need special pro- restrained. tection. The vehicle's seat belts may In addition to the general information in not fit them properly. The shoulder belt this manual, child safety information is may come too close to the face or neck. available from many other sources, includ- The lap belt may not fit over their small ing doctors, teachers, government traffic hip bones. In an accident, an improp- safety offices, and community organiza- erly fitting seat belt could cause serious tions. Every child is different, so be sure to or fatal injury. Always use appropriate learn the best way to transport your child. child restraints. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For 1-18 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system additional information, see “Child re- SMALL CHILDREN available booster seat to obtain proper straints” (P. 1-21). seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the Children that are over 1 year old and weigh booster seat should raise the child so that A child restraint may be secured in the ve- at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a the shoulder belt is properly positioned hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An- rear-facing child restraint as long as pos- across the chest and the top, middle por- chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or sible up to the height or weight limit of the tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt with the vehicle seat belt. For additional child restraint. Children who outgrow the should not cross the neck or face and information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-21). height or weight limit of the rear-facing should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt child restraint and are at least 1 year old NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens should lie snugly across the lower hips or should be secured in a forward-facing child and children be restrained in the rear upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu- seat. Studies show that children are seat can only be used in seating positions facturer’s instructions for minimum and safer when properly restrained in the that have a three-point type seat belt. The maximum weight and height recommen- rear seat than in the front seat. booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and dations. NISSAN recommends that small have a label certifying that it complies with This is especially important because children be placed in child restraints that Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or your vehicle has a supplemental re- comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. straint system (air bag system) for the Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle front passenger. For additional informa- Safety Standards. You should choose a A booster seat should be used until the tion, see “Supplemental air bag warning child restraint that fits your vehicle and al- child can pass the seat belt fit test below: light” (P. 1-64). ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- • Are the child’s back and hips against the INFANTS tions for installation and use. vehicle seatback? • Is the child able to sit without slouching? Infants up to at least 1 year old should be LARGER CHILDREN • Do the child’s knees bend easily over the placed in a rear-facing child restraint. Children should remain in a forward-facing NISSAN recommends that infants be front edge of the seat with feet flat on the child restraint with a harness until they floor? placed in child restraints that comply with reach the maximum height or weight limit Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or allowed by the child restraint manufacturer. • Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. belt low and snug across the hips and You should choose a child restraint that fits Once a child outgrows the height or weight shoulder belt across mid-chest and your vehicle and always follow the manu- limit of the harness-equipped forward- shoulder)? facturer's instructions for installation and facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends use. that the child be placed in a commercially Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 • Is the child able to use the properly ad- WARNING justed head restraint/headrest? • Will the child be able to stay in position for Never let a child stand or kneel on any the entire ride? seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS2690 If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt. NOTE: Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.

1-20 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CHILD RESTRAINTS

facing child restraint installation using the seat belts” (P. 1-33). – Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. – Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256 – Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only loads PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD – Infants and children should never imposed by correctly fitted child RESTRAINTS be held on anyone's lap. Even the restraints. Under no circum- strongest adult cannot resist the stances are they to be used to at- WARNING forces of a collision. tach adult seat belts, or other – Do not put a seat belt around both items or equipment to the vehicle. • Failure to follow the warnings and in- a child and another passenger. Doing so could damage the child structions for proper use and installation restraint anchorages. The child re- – NISSAN recommends that all child of child restraints could result in serious straint will not be properly in- restraints be installed in the rear injury or death of a child or other passen- stalled using the damaged an- seat. Studies show that children gers in a sudden stop or collision: chorage, and a child could be are safer when properly re- – The child restraint must be used seriously injured or killed in a strained in the rear seat than in and installed properly. Always fol- collision. the front seat. If you must install a low all of the child restraint manu- forward-facing child restraint in – Never use the anchor points for facturer's instructions for instal- the front seat, see “Forward- adult seat belts or other items. lation and use.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 – A child restraint with a top tether If you do not have a LATCH compatible • If the combined weight of the child and strap should not be used in the child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 front passenger seat. used. kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child – Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- Several manufacturers offer child re- restraint. sible after fitting the child restraint. straints for infants and children of various • Be sure to follow the child restraint – Infants and children should al- sizes. When selecting any child restraint, manufacturer's instructions for ways be placed in an appropriate keep the following points in mind: installation. child restraint while in the vehicle. • Choose only a restraint with a label certi- • When the child restraint is not in use, fying that it complies with Federal Motor All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or keep it secured with the LATCH sys- Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian territories require that infants and small tem or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. children be restrained in an approved collision, loose objects can injure oc- • Check the child restraint in your vehicle to child restraint at all times while the ve- cupants or damage the vehicle. be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's hicle is being operated. Canadian law re- seat and seat belt system. quires the top tether strap on forward- • If the child restraint is compatible with facing child restraints be secured to the CAUTION your vehicle, place your child in the child designated anchor point on the vehicle. A child restraint in a closed vehicle can restraint and check the various adjust- become very hot. Check the seating ments to be sure the child restraint is surface and buckles before placing a compatible with your child. Choose a child in the child restraint. child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow This vehicle is equipped with a universal all recommended procedures. child restraint anchor system, referred to • If the combined weight of the child and as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), for CHildren) system. Some child restraints you may use the LATCH anchors to install include rigid or webbing-mounted attach- the child restraint (not both at the same ments that can be connected to these an- time). chors. For additional information, see “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system” (P. 1-23).

1-22 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system install the child restraint. Be sure to follow – Inspect the lower anchors by insert- the child restraint manufacturer's instruc- ing your fingers into the lower an- tions for installation. chor area. Feel to make sure there The LATCH anchor points are provided to are no obstructions over the an- install child restraints in the rear outboard chors such as seat belt webbing or seating positions only. Do not attempt to seat cushion material. The child reinstall a child restraint in the center position straint will not be secured properly if using the LATCH anchors. the lower anchors are obstructed. Child restraint anchorages are de- LATCH lower anchor signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- WARNING straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, har- Failure to follow the warnings and in- nesses or for attaching other items or LRS3073 structions for proper use and installa- equipment to the vehicle. Doing so LATCH system lower anchor locations tion of child restraints could result in could damage the child restraint an- LATCH (Lower Anchors and serious injury or death of a child or chorages. The child restraint will not be Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM other passengers in a sudden stop or properly installed using the damaged collision: anchorage, and a child could be seri- Your vehicle is equipped with special an- – Attach LATCH system compatible ously injured or killed in a collision. chor points that are used with LATCH sys- child restraints only at the locations tem compatible child restraints. This sys- shown in the illustration. tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX – Do not secure a child restraint in the or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- center rear seating position using tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat the LATCH system anchors. The child belt to secure the child restraint unless the restraint will not be secured properly. combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 LRS3036 LRS0661 LRS0662 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment When installing a child restraint, carefully The LATCH lower anchors are located as Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments read and follow the instructions in this shown. A label is attached to the seatback manual and those supplied with the child to help you locate the LATCH lower LATCH compatible child restraints include restraint. anchors. two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

1-24 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Top tether anchor • Child restraint anchorages are de- WARNING signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- • Do not allow cargo to contact the top straints. Under no circumstances are tether strap when it is attached to they to be used for adult seat belts, the top tether anchor. Properly se- harnesses or for attaching other cure the cargo so it does not contact items or equipment to the vehicle. the top tether strap. Cargo that is not Doing so could damage the child re- properly secured or cargo that con- straint anchorages. The child re- tacts the top tether strap may dam- straint will not be properly installed age it during a collision. Your child using the damaged anchorage, and a could be seriously injured or killed in child could be seriously injured or a collision if the top tether strap is killed in a collision. damaged. • The child restraint top tether strap LRS3329 may be damaged by contact with the Top tether anchor point locations tonneau cover or items in the cargo area. Remove the tonneau cover (if so Anchor points are located on the back of equipped) from the vehicle or secure the rear seats. it in the cargo area. Also secure any REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in INSTALLATION USING LATCH a collision if the top tether strap is For additional information, see all Warnings damaged. and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-18) and “Child restraints” (P. 1-21) before installing a child restraint.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. LRS2997 LRS2996 Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

1-26 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4. REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING The three-point seat belt with Auto- LRS0673 LRS0674 matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 used when installing a child restraint. 3. For child restraints that are equipped 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it Failure to use the ALR mode will result with webbing-mounted attachments, before you place the child in it. Push it in the child restraint not being properly remove any additional slack from the from side to side while holding the child secured. The restraint could tip over or anchor attachments. Press downward restraint near the LATCH attachment be loose and cause injury to a child in a and rearward firmly in the center of the path. The child restraint should not sudden stop or collision. Also, it can child restraint with your hand to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from change the operation of the front pas- press the vehicle seat cushion and seat- side to side. Try to tug it forward and senger air bag. For additional informa- back while tightening the webbing of check to see if the LATCH attachment tion, see “Front passenger air bag and the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the re- status light” (P. 1-53). straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH For additional information, see all Warnings attachment as necessary, or put the re- and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-18) straint in another seat and test it again. and “Child restraints” (P. 1-21) before install- You may need to try a different child ing a child restraint. restraint or try installing by using the

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

WRS0256 WRS0761 Rear-facing – step 1 Rear-facing – step 2 1. Child restraints for infants must be 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the used in the rear-facing direction and child restraint and insert it into the therefore must not be used in the front buckle until you hear and feel the latch seat. Position the child restraint on the engage. Be sure to follow the child re- seat. Always follow the child restraint straint manufacturer’s instructions for manufacturer’s instructions. belt routing.

1-28 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0669 LRS0670 WRS0762 Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 5 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 5. Remove any additional slack from the extended. At this time, the seat belt re- the shoulder belt to remove any slack in seat belt; press downward and rearward tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint the belt. firmly in the center of the child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when to compress the vehicle seat cushion the seat belt is fully retracted. and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 7. Check to make sure that the child re- Follow these steps to install a forward- straint is properly secured prior to each facing child restraint using the LATCH use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat system: steps 2 through 6. 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. After the child restraint is removed and the Always follow the child restraint manu- seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode facturer's instructions. (child restraint mode) is canceled. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-18) WRS0763 and “Child restraints” (P. 1-21) before install- Rear-facing – step 6 ing a child restraint. 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it Do not use the lower anchors if the com- before you place the child in it. Push it bined weight of the child and the child re- from side to side while holding the child straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- restraint near the seat belt path. The bined weight of the child and the child child restraint should not move more restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an- to tug it forward and check to see if the chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure belt holds the restraint in place. If the to follow the child restraint manufacturer's restraint is not secure, tighten the seat instructions for installation. belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-30 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

LRS2995 LRS2994 Forward-facing webbing-mounted – Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 step 2 seating positions that do not have a top 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- tether anchor. tachments to the LATCH lower anchors. 3. The back of the child restraint should be Check to make sure the LATCH attach- secured against the vehicle seatback. ment is properly attached to the lower anchors. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct If the child restraint is equipped with a child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ top tether strap, route the top tether headrest is removed, store it in a secure strap and secure the tether strap to the place. Be sure to reinstall the head tether anchor point. For additional infor- restraint/headrest when the child re- mation, see “Installing top tether strap” straint is removed. For additional infor- (P.1-33). Do not install child restraints that mation, see “Head restraints/headrests” require the use of a top tether strap in (P. 1-5) for head restraint/headrest adjustment information. Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

LRS0671 WRS0697 Forward-facing – step 4 Forward-facing – step 6 4. For child restraints that are equipped 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it with webbing-mounted attachments, before you place the child in it. Push it remove any additional slack from the from side to side while holding the child anchor attachments. Press downward restraint near the LATCH attachment and rearward firmly in the center of the path. The child restraint should not child restraint with your knee to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from press the vehicle seat cushion and seat- side to side. Try to tug it forward and back while tightening the webbing of check to see if the LATCH attachment the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH 5. Tighten the tether strap according to attachment as necessary, or put the re- the manufacturer's instructions to restraint in another seat and test it again. move any slack. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 1-32 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Rear bench seat child restraint anchorages. The child OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest child could be seriously injured or killed and store it in a secure place. Be sure to in a collision. reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For FORWARD-FACING CHILD additional information, see “Head RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING restraints/headrests” (P. 1-5). THE SEAT BELTS 2. Position the top tether strap as shown. 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an- WARNING chor point as shown. The three-point seat belt with Auto- 4. Tighten the tether strap according to matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be LRS3351 the manufacturer’s instructions to reused when installing a child restraint. Rear seats move any slack. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly If you have any questions when install- secured. The restraint could tip over or ing a top tether strap, it is recommended ᭺1 Top tether strap be loose and cause injury to a child in a that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this sudden stop or collision. Also, it can ᭺2 Anchor point service. change the operation of the front pas- Installing top tether strap senger air bag. For additional informa- The child restraint top tether strap must be WARNING tion, see “Front passenger air bag and used when installing the child restraint with Child restraint anchorages are de- status light” (P. 1-53). the LATCH lower anchor attachments. signed to withstand only those loads First, secure the child restraint with the imposed by correctly fitted child re- LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard posi- straints. Under no circumstances are tions only). they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 Follow these steps to install a forward- If the seating position does not have an facing child restraint using the vehicle seat adjustable head restraint/headrest and belt in the rear seats or in the front passen- it is interfering with the proper child re- ger seat: straint fit, try another seating position or 1. If you must install a child restraint in a different child restraint. the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat. 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. WRS0699 Always follow the child restraint manu- Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – facturer’s instructions. step 1 The back of the child restraint should be For additional information, see all Warnings secured against the vehicle seatback. and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-18) If necessary, adjust or remove the head and “Child restraints” (P. 1-21) before install- restraint/headrest to obtain the correct ing a child restraint. child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ Do not use the lower anchors if the com- headrest is removed, store it in a secure bined weight of the child and the child replace. Be sure to reinstall the head straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- restraint/headrest when the child re- bined weight of the child and the child straint is removed. For additional infor- restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use mation, see “Head restraints/headrests” the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an- (P. 1-5) for head restraint/headrest ad- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure justment, removal and installation to follow the child restraint manufacturer's information. instructions for installation.

1-34 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

WRS0680 LRS0667 Forward-facing – step 3 Forward-facing – step 4 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully child restraint and insert it into the extended. At this time, the seat belt re- buckle until you hear and feel the latch tractor is in the Automatic Locking Re- engage. Be sure to follow the child retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint straint manufacturer’s instructions for mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking belt routing. Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt If the child restraint is equipped with a is fully retracted. top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, see “Installing top tether strap” (P. 1-37).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 LRS0668 WRS0681 WRS0698 Forward-facing – step 5 Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 8 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it the shoulder belt to remove any slack in seat belt; press downward and rear- before you place the child in it. Push it the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child re- from side to side while holding the child straint with your knee to compress the restraint near the seat belt path. The vehicle seat cushion and seatback while child restraint should not move more pulling up on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the 7. Tighten the tether strap according to the belt holds the restraint in place. If the manufacturer's instructions to remove restraint is not secure, tighten the seat any slack. belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-36 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

LRS0865 LRS3331 Forward-facing – step 10 Rear seats 10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition ᭺1 Top tether strap switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light ᭺2 Anchor point should illuminate. If this light is not illu- Installing top tether strap minated, see “Front passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-53). Move the child The child restraint top tether strap must be restraint to another seating position. used when installing the child restraint with Have the system checked. It is recom- seat belts. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer First, secure the child restraint with the seat for this service. belt. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 Rear bench seat WARNING Precautions on booster seats OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS WARNING Child restraint anchorages are de- 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest signed to withstand only those loads If a booster seat and seat belt are not and store it in a secure place. Be sure to imposed by correctly fitted child reused properly, the risk of a child being reinstall the head restraint/headrest straints. Under no circumstances are injured or killed in a sudden stop or col- when the child restraint is removed. For they to be used to attach adult seat lision greatly increases: additional information, see “Head belts, or other items or equipment to restraints/headrests” (P. 1-5). – Make sure the shoulder portion of the vehicle. Doing so could damage the the belt is away from the child's face 2. Position the top tether strap as shown. child restraint anchorages. The child and neck and the lap portion of the restraint will not be properly installed belt does not cross the stomach. 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an- using the damaged anchorage, and a – Make sure the shoulder belt is not chor point as shown. child could be seriously injured or killed behind the child or under the child's in a collision. 4. Tighten the tether strap according to arm. the manufacturer’s instructions to re- – A booster seat must only be installed move any slack. BOOSTER SEATS For additional information on installing a in a seating position that has a lap/ CENTER SEATING POSITION booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in- shoulder belt. 1. Position the top tether strap as shown. structions outlined in this section. 2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown. 3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

1-38 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464 A. Low back booster seat • Make sure the child’s head will be properly All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or supported by the booster seat or vehicle territories require that infants and small B. High back booster seat seat. The seatback must be at or above children be restrained in an approved Booster seats of various sizes are offered the center of the child’s ears. For example, child restraint at all times while the ve- by several manufacturers. When selecting if a low back booster seat is chosen, the hicle is being operated. any booster seat, keep the following points vehicle seatback must be at or above the in mind: The instructions in this section apply to center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is booster seat installation in the rear seats • Choose only a booster seat with a label lower than the center of the child’s ears, a or the front passenger seat. certifying that it complies with Federal high back booster seat should be used. Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Ca- • If the booster seat is compatible with nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. your vehicle, place the child in the booster • Check the booster seat in your vehicle to seat and check the various adjustments be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s to be sure the booster seat is compatible seat and seat belt system. with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 Booster seat installation WARNING To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-18) and “Child restraints” (P. 1-21) and “Booster seats” (P. 1-38) before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger WRS0699 LRS0454 seat: 1. If you must install a booster seat in the Front passenger position front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position. 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

1-40 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is LRS0451 LRS0452 positioned across the top, middle por- Rear center position Rear outboard position tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to 3. The booster seat should be positioned follow the booster seat manufacturer’s on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- booster seat fit. If the head restraint/ structions for properly fastening a seat headrest is removed, store it in a secure belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt place. Be sure to reinstall the head with retractor” (P. 1-14). restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information, see “Head restraints/headrests” (P. 1-5).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS lisions. The side air bags are designed to This SRS section contains important infor- inflate on the side where the vehicle is mation concerning the following systems: impacted. • Driver and front passenger supplemental Rear outboard seat-mounted side- front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced impact supplemental air bag system Air Bag System) This system can help cushion the impact • Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- force to the chest area of the rear outboard mental air bag seat passengers in certain side-impact • Rear outboard seat-mounted side- collisions. The side air bags are designed to impact supplemental air bag inflate on the side where the vehicle is • Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and impacted. rollover supplemental air bag Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and • Driver and passenger supplemental knee rollover supplemental air bag system LRS0865 air bag This system can help cushion the impact 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front • Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front force to the head of occupants in front and passenger seat, place the ignition switch seats) rear outboard seating positions in certain in the ON position. The front passenger Supplemental front-impact air bag side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags air bag status light may or may not system are designed to inflate on the side where illuminate, depending on the size of the the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the child and the type of booster seat being The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can curtain air bags are designed to inflate and used. For additional information, see help cushion the impact force to the head remain inflated for a short time. “Front passenger air bag and status and chest of the driver and front passenger Driver and passenger supplemental light” (P. 1-53). in certain frontal collisions. knee air bags Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the driver’s and front passenger’s This system can help cushion the impact knees in certain collisions. force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact col-

1-42 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger and rear seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, see “Seat belts” (P. 1-10). The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag WRS0031 warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off WARNING • The front passenger air bag and front after about 7 seconds if the system is passenger supplemental knee air operational. • The front air bags ordinarily will not bag will not inflate if the passenger inflate in the event of a side impact, air bag status light is lit. For addi- rear impact, rollover, or lower sever- tional information, see “Front pas- ity frontal collision. Always wear your senger air bag and status light” seat belts to help reduce the risk or (P. 1-53). severity of injury in various kinds of accidents

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 • The seat belts and the front air bags • The front passenger seat is equipped are most effective when you are sit- with an occupant classification sen- ting well back and upright in the seat. sor (weight sensor) that turns the The front air bags inflate with great front passenger air bag and front force. Even with the NISSAN Ad- passenger supplemental knee air vanced Air Bag System, if you are un- bag OFF under some conditions. This restrained, leaning forward, sitting sensor is only used in this seat. Fail- sideways or out of position in any ure to be properly seated and wear- way, you are at greater risk of injury ing the seat belt can increase the risk or death in a crash. You may also re- or severity of injury in an accident. ceive serious or fatal injuries from For additional information, see the front air bag if you are up against “Front passenger air bag and status it when it inflates. Always sit back light” (P. 1-53). against the seatback and as far away • Keep hands on the outside of the as practical from the steering wheel steering wheel. Placing them inside or instrument panel. Always properly the steering wheel rim could increase use the seat belts. the risk that they are injured when • The driver and front passenger seat the front air bag inflates. belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Fail- ure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

1-44 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1133 ARS1041

WARNING • Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

WARNING • Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre- teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

1-46 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431

WARNING WARNING • Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Front and rear outboard seat-mounted Bag System, never install a rear- side-impact supplemental air bags and facing child restraint in the front seat. roof-mounted curtain side-impact and An inflating front air bag could seri- rollover supplemental air bags: ously injure or kill your child. For ad- • The side air bags and curtain air bags ditional information, see “Child re- ordinarily will not inflate in the event straints” (P. 1-21). of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 WARNING • The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front and rear seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to LRS3119 extend their hand out of the window WRS0032 or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding posi- WARNING tions are shown in the previous illustrations. • When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. • Do not use seat covers on the front or rear seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

1-48 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0162 SSS0159

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags 4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags 5. Rear outboard seat-mounted side- impact supplemental air bags (driver’s side shown; front passenger side similar) 6. Side satellite sensors (driver’s side shown; front passenger side similar) 7. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) (driver’s side shown; front passenger side similar) 8. Front door satellite sensor (driver’s side shown; front passenger side similar) 9. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor — located in front passenger cushion frame) 10. Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag 11. Crash zone sensor

LRS3234 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System 1. Supplemental front-impact air bag (front seats) modules 2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

1-50 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING • If a forward-facing child restraint is • Do not position the front passenger installed in the front passenger seat, seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the To ensure proper operation of the pas- do not position the front passenger front seat does contact the rear seat, senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- seat so the child restraint contacts the air bag system may determine a tem, please observe the following the instrument panel. If the child re- sensor malfunction has occurred items. straint does contact the instrument and the front passenger air bag sta- • Do not allow a passenger in the rear panel, the system may determine the tus light may illuminate and the seat to push or pull on the seatback seat is occupied and the passenger supplemental air bag warning light pocket. air bag may deploy in a collision. Also may flash. the front passenger air bag status • Do not place heavy loads heavier This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN light may not illuminate. For addi- than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and tional information, see “Child re- head restraint/headrest or in the front passenger seats. This system is de- straints” (P. 1-21). seatback pocket. signed to meet certification requirements • Make sure that there is nothing • Confirm the operating condition with under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in pressing against the rear of the seat- the front passenger air bag status Canada. All of the information, cautions back, such as a child restraint in- light. and warnings in this manual still apply stalled in the rear seat or an object • If you notice that the front passenger and must be followed. stored on the floor. air bag status light is not operating The driver supplemental front-impact air as described later in this section, get • Make sure that there is no object bag is located in the center of the steering the occupant classification system placed under the front passenger wheel. The front passenger supplemental checked. It is recommended that you seat. front-impact air bag is mounted in the visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. • Make sure that there is no object dashboard above the glove box. The front placed between the seat cushion and • Until you have confirmed with a air bags are designed to inflate in higher center console or between the seat dealer that your front passenger seat severity frontal collisions, although they cushion and the door. occupant classification system is may inflate if the forces in another type of working properly, position the occu- collision are similar to those of a higher pants in the rear seating positions. severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi- If you have any questions about your air the front occupants. Because of this, the cation of proper front air bag system bag system, it is recommended that you force of the front air bag inflating can in- operation. visit a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering crease the risk of injury if the occupant is The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System modification of your vehicle due to a dis- too close to, or is against, the front air bag monitors information from the crash zone ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con- module during inflation. sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat tact information is contained in the front of The front air bags deflate quickly after a belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi- this Owner's Manual. collision. cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op- When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud The front air bags operate only when the eration is based on the severity of a colli- noise may be heard, followed by the re- ignition switch is placed in the ON sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful position. the front passenger, the occupant classifi- and does not indicate a fire. Care should be cation sensors are also monitored. Based taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita- After placing the ignition switch in the on information from the sensors, only one tion and choking. Those with a history of a ON position, the supplemental air bag front air bag may inflate in a crash, depend- breathing condition should get fresh air warning light illuminates. The supple- ing on the crash severity and whether the promptly. mental air bag warning light will turn off front occupants are belted or unbelted. Ad- after about 7 seconds if the system is Front air bags, along with the use of seat operational. ditionally, the front passenger air bag and belts, help to cushion the impact force on front passenger supplemental knee air the face and chest of the front occupants. bag may be automatically turned OFF un- They can help save lives and reduce seri- der some conditions, depending on the ous injuries. However, an inflating front air weight detected on the front passenger bag may cause facial abrasions or other seat and how the seat belt is used. If the injuries. Front air bags, other than the driv- front passenger air bag and front passen- er’s and passenger’s knee air bag, do not ger supplemental knee air bag are OFF, the provide restraint to the lower body. front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, see Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat “Front passenger air bag and status light” belts should be correctly worn and the (P.1-53). One front air bag inflating does not driver and front passenger seated upright indicate improper performance of the as far as practical away from the steering system. wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect 1-52 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING Status light The front passenger seat is equipped with The front passenger air bag and front an occupant classification sensor (weight passenger supplemental knee air bag sensor) that turns the front passenger air are designed to automatically turn OFF bag and front passenger supplemental under some conditions. Read this sec- knee air bag on or off depending on the tion carefully to learn how it operates. weight applied to the front passenger seat. Proper use of the seat, seat belt, and The status of the front passenger air bag child restraints is necessary for most and front passenger supplemental knee effective protection. Failure to follow all air bag (ON or OFF) are indicated by the instructions in this manual concerning front passenger air bag status light the use of seats, seat belts, and child which is located on the instrument panel. restraints can increase the risk or se- After the ignition switch is placed in the verity of injury in an accident. "ON" position, the front passenger air bag LRS0865 status light on the instrument panel illumi- Front passenger air bag and status nates for about 7 seconds and then turns light off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows: PASSENGER AIR BAG FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND FRONT PASSENGER CONDITION DESCRIPTION STATUS LIGHT ( ) SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG STATUS Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Nobody/Somebody ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Small Adult in front passenger seat Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED In addition to the above, certain objects For additional information related to the please see “Normal operation” (P. 1-55) and placed on the front passenger seat may normal operation and troubleshooting of “Troubleshooting” (P. 1-56). also cause the light to operate as de- this occupant classification sensor system, scribed above depending on their weight.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53 Front passenger air bag the child’s weight can be detected and ing to properly secure child restraints and The front passenger air bag and front pas- cause the air bags to turn OFF. to use the ALR mode may allow the re- senger supplemental knee air bag are de- Front passenger seat adult occupants who straint to tip or move in a collision or sud- signed to automatically turn OFF when the are properly seated and using the seat belt den stop. This can also result in the front vehicle is operated under some conditions as outlined in this manual should not passenger air bag and front passenger as described below in accordance with U.S. cause the front passenger air bag and supplemental knee air bag inflating in a regulations. If the front passenger air bag front passenger supplemental knee air crash instead of being OFF. For additional and front passenger supplemental knee bag to be automatically turned OFF. For information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-21). air bag are OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. small adults it may be turned OFF, however If the front passenger seat is not occupied, The driver air bag and other air bags in your if the occupant takes his/her weight off the the front passenger air bag and front pas- vehicle are not part of this system. seat cushion (for example, by not sitting senger supplemental knee air bag are de- The purpose of the regulation is to help upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or signed not to inflate in a crash. However, reduce the risk of injury or death from an by otherwise being out of position), this heavy objects placed on the seat could re- inflating air bag to certain front passenger could cause the sensor to turn the front sult in air bag inflation, because of the ob- seat occupants, such as children, by requir- passenger air bag and front passenger ject’s weight detected by the occupant ing the air bag to be automatically turned supplemental knee air bag OFF. Always be classification sensor. Other conditions OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt could also result in air bag inflation, such as requirements. properly for the most effective protection if a child is standing on the seat, or if two by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. children are on the seat, contrary to the The occupant classification sensor in this instructions in this manual. Always be sure vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear that you and all vehicle occupants are detect an occupant and objects on the seated and restrained properly. seat by weight. For example, if a child is in seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- propriate child restraints and booster Using the front passenger air bag status vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If light, you can monitor when the front pas- the front passenger air bag and front pas- this is not possible, the occupant classifica- senger air bag and front passenger senger supplemental knee air bag OFF in tion sensor is designed to operate as de- supplemental knee air bag are automati- accordance with the regulations. Also, if a scribed above to turn the front passenger cally turned OFF. child restraint of the type specified in the air bag and front passenger supplemental regulations is on the seat, its weight and knee air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Fail-

1-54 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If an adult occupant is in the seat but the check system status by using a special • Make sure that a child restraint or other front passenger air bag status light is illu- tool. However, until you have confirmed object is not pressing against the rear of minated (indicating that the front passen- with a dealer that your air bag is working the seatback. ger air bag and front passenger supple- properly, reposition the occupant or child • Make sure that a rear passenger is not mental knee air bag are OFF), it could be restraint in a rear seat. pushing or pulling on the back of the front that the person is a small adult, or is not The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and passenger seat. sitting on the seat properly or not using the front passenger air bag status light will • Make sure that the front passenger seat seat belt properly. take a few seconds to register a change in or seatback is not forced back against an If a child restraint must be used in the front the front passenger seat status. This is nor- object on the seat or floor behind it. seat, the front passenger air bag status mal system operation and does not indi- • Make sure that there is no object placed light may or may not be illuminated, de- cate a malfunction. under the front passenger seat. pending on the size of the child and the If a malfunction occurs in the front passen- Steps type of child restraint being used. If the air ger air bag system, the supplemental air bag status light is not illuminated (indicat- bag warning light , located in the me- 1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats” ing that the front passenger air bag and ter and gauges area of the instrument (P. 1-2) section of this manual. Sit upright, front passenger supplemental knee air panel, will be illuminated (blinking or leaning against the seatback, and cen- bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is tered on the seat cushion with your feet the child restraint or seat belt is not being recommended that you visit a NISSAN comfortably extended to the floor. used properly. Make sure that the child re- dealer for this service. straint is installed properly, the seat belt is 2. Make sure there are no objects on your used properly and the occupant is posi- Normal operation lap. tioned properly. If the air bag status light is In order for the occupant classification 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the still not illuminated, reposition the occu- sensor system to classify the front passen- “Seat belts” (P. 1-10) section of this pant or child restraint in a rear seat. ger based on weight, please follow the pre- manual. Front passenger seat belt If the front passenger air bag status light cautions and steps outlined below: buckle status is monitored by the occu- will not illuminate even though you believe Precautions pant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy that the child restraint, the seat belts and • Make sure that there are no objects the occupant are properly positioned, it is status. So, it is highly recommended that weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the front passenger fasten their seat recommended that you take your vehicle the seat or placed in the seatback pocket. to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can belt.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55 4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds However, if the occupant is not a small NOTE: allowing the system to classify the front adult, then this may be due to the following passenger before the vehicle is put into conditions that may be interfering with the A system check will be performed during motion. weight sensors: which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds 5. Ensure proper classification by checking • Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning initially. the front passenger air bag status light. against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet com- If the light is still ON after this, the person NOTE: fortably extended to the floor. should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be This vehicle’s occupant classification • A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback. checked as soon as possible. It is recom- sensor system generally keeps the clas- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for sification locked during driving, so it is • A rear passenger pushing or pulling on this service. important that you confirm that the the back of the front passenger seat. front passenger is properly classified • Forcing the front seat or seatback 2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child prior to driving. However, the occupant against an object on the seat or floor be- or child restraint occupying the front classification sensor may recalculate the hind it. passenger seat. weight of the occupant under some con- • An object placed under the front passen- This may be due to the following condi- ditions (both while driving and when ger seat. tions that may be interfering with the stopped), so front passenger seat occu- • An object placed between the seat cush- weight sensors: pants should continue to remain seated ion and center console or between the • Small adult or child is not sitting upright, as outlined above. seat cushion and the door. leaning against the seatback, and cen- Troubleshooting tered on the seat cushion with his/her If the vehicle is moving, please come to a feet comfortably extended to the floor. If you think the front passenger air bag stop when it is safe to do so. Check and status light is incorrect: correct any of the above conditions. Re- • The child restraint is not properly in- start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. stalled, as outlined in “Child restraints” 1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying (P. 1-21). the front passenger seat: • An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) • Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light hanging on the seat or placed in the seat- is functioning as intended. The front pas- back pocket. senger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are suppressed. 1-56 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system • A child restraint or other object pressing 3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger • Do not use water or acidic cleaners against the rear of the seatback. and no objects on the front passenger (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This • A rear passenger pushing or pulling on seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is can damage the seat or occupant the back of the front passenger seat. recommended that you visit a NISSAN classification sensor. This can also • Forcing the front seat or seatback dealer as soon as possible. affect the operation of the air bag against an object on the seat or floor be- Other supplemental front-impact air system and result in serious personal hind it. bag precautions injury. • An object placed under the front passen- • Immediately after inflation, several ger seat. WARNING front air bag system components will • An object placed between the seat cush- be hot. Do not touch them; you may • Do not place any objects on the severely burn yourself. ion and center console. steering wheel pad or on the instru- • No unauthorized changes should be If the vehicle is moving, please come to a ment panel. Also, do not place any made to any components or wiring stop when it is safe to do so. Check and objects between any occupant and of the supplemental air bag system. correct any of the above conditions. Re- the steering wheel or instrument This is to prevent accidental inflation start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause in- of the supplemental air bag or dam- NOTE: jury if the front air bags inflate. age to the supplemental air bag system. A system check will be performed during • Do not place objects with sharp • Do not make unauthorized changes which the front passenger air bag status edges on the seat. Also, do not place to your vehicle's electrical system, light will remain lit for about 7 seconds heavy objects on the seat that will suspension system or front end initially. leave permanent impressions in the seat. Such objects can damage the structure. This could affect proper If the light is still OFF after this, the small seat or occupant classification sen- operation of the front air bag system. adult, child or child restraint should be re- sor (weight sensor). This can affect positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle the operation of the air bag system should be checked as soon as possible. It is and result in serious personal injury. recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57 • Tampering with the front air bag sys- • No unauthorized changes should be When selling your vehicle, we request that tem may result in serious personal made to any components or wiring you inform the buyer about the front air injury. Tampering includes changes of the seat belt system. This may af- bag system and guide the buyer to the to the steering wheel and the instru- fect the front air bag system. Tam- appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual. ment panel assembly by placing ma- pering with the seat belt system may terial over the steering wheel pad result in serious personal injury. and above the instrument panel or • It is recommended that you visit a by installing additional trim material NISSAN dealer for work on and around the air bag system. around the front air bag. It is also rec- • Removing or modifying the front ommended that you visit a NISSAN passenger seat may affect the func- dealer for installation of electrical tion of the air bag system and result equipment. The Supplemental Re- in serious personal injury. straint System (SRS) wiring har- • Modifying or tampering with the nesses* should not be modified or front passenger seat may result in disconnected. Unauthorized electri- serious personal injury. For example, cal test equipment and probing de- do not change the front seats by vices should not be used on the air placing material on the seat cushion bag system. or by installing additional trim mate- • A cracked windshield should be re- rial, such as seat covers, on the seat placed immediately by a qualified re- that are not specifically designed to pair facility. A cracked windshield assure proper air bag operation. Ad- could affect the function of the ditionally, do not stow any objects supplemental air bag system. under the front passenger seat or the *The SRS wiring harness connectors are seat cushion and seatback. Such ob- yellow and orange for easy identification. jects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).

1-58 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system though they may inflate if the forces in an- outboard seating positions. They can help other type of collision are similar to those of save lives and reduce serious injuries. How- a higher severity impact. They are de- ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain air signed to inflate on the side where the ve- bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. hicle is impacted. They may not inflate in Side air bags and curtain air bags do not certain side collisions. provide restraint to the lower body. Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate The seat belts should be correctly worn in certain types of rollover collisions or near and the driver, front passenger and rear rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move- outboard occupants seated upright as far ments (for example, during severe off- as practical away from the side air bag. roading) may cause the curtain air bags to Rear seat passengers should be seated as inflate. far away as practical from the door finish- Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always ers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to LRS3142 an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation. help protect the occupants. Because of Front and rear outboard this, the force of the side air bag and curtain When the side air bags and curtain air bags seat-mounted side-impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, injury if the occupant is too close to, or is supplemental air bag and followed by the release of smoke. This against, these air bag modules during in- roof-mounted curtain smoke is not harmful and does not indi- flation. The side air bag will deflate quickly side-impact and rollover cate a fire. Care should be taken not to after the collision is over. supplemental air bag systems inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breath- The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a The side air bags are located in the outside ing condition should get fresh air promptly. short time. of the seatback of the front and rear out- Side air bags, along with the use of seat The side air bags and curtain air bags board seats. The curtain air bags are lo- belts, help to cushion the impact force on operate only when the ignition switch is cated in the side roof rails. All of the infor- the chest and pelvic area of the front and placed in the ON position. mation, cautions and warnings in this rear outboard occupants. Curtain air bags manual must be followed. The side air help to cushion the impact force to the bags and curtain air bags are designed to head of occupants in the front and rear inflate in higher severity side collisions, al- Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59 After placing the ignition switch in the • Do not make unauthorized changes When selling your vehicle, we request that ON position, the supplemental air bag to your vehicle's electrical system, you inform the buyer about the side air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- suspension system or side panel. and curtain air bag systems and guide the mental air bag warning light will turn off This could affect proper operation of buyer to the appropriate sections in this after about 7 seconds if the system is the side air bag and curtain air bag Owner's Manual. operational. systems. • Tampering with the side air bag sys- WARNING tem may result in serious personal • Do not place any objects near the injury. For example, do not change seatback of the front and rear seats. the front and rear seats by placing Also, do not place any objects (an material near the seatbacks or by in- umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front stalling additional trim material, and rear door finisher and the front such as seat covers, around the side and rear seat. Such objects may be- air bag. come dangerous projectiles and • It is recommended that you visit a cause injury if a side air bag inflate. NISSAN dealer for work on and • Right after inflation, several side air around the side air bag and curtain bag and curtain air bag system com- air bag. It is also recommended that ponents will be hot. Do not touch you visit a NISSAN dealer for installa- them; you may severely burn tion of electrical equipment. The SRS yourself. wiring harnesses* should not be • No unauthorized changes should be modified or disconnected. Unauthor- made to any components or wiring ized electrical test equipment and of the side air bag and curtain air bag probing devices should not be used systems. This is to prevent damage on the side air bag or curtain air bag to or accidental inflation of the side system. air bag and curtain air bag or dam- * The SRS wiring harness connectors are age to the side air bag and curtain air yellow and orange for easy identification. bag systems.

1-60 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system The knee air bag helps to cushion the impact force on the knees of the driver and passenger. It can help reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body. The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for LRS3326 LRS3325 a short time. Driver’s side Passenger’s side The knee air bag operates only when the Driver and passenger Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always ignition switch is placed in the ON supplemental knee air bag an indication of proper knee air bag position. operation. The knee air bag is located in the knee After placing the ignition switch in the bolster, on the driver’s and passenger’s When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud ON position, the supplemental air bag side. All of the information, cautions and noise may be heard, followed by release of warning light illuminates. The supple- warnings in this manual apply and must smoke. This smoke is not harmful and mental air bag warning light will turn off be followed. The knee air bag is designed does not indicate a fire. Care should be after about 7 seconds if the system is to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita- operational. although it may inflate if the forces in an- tion and choking. Those with a history of a other type of collision are similar to those of breathing condition should get fresh air a higher severity frontal impact. It may not promptly. inflate in certain collisions.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61 WARNING • It is recommended that you visit a • If the vehicle becomes involved in a NISSAN dealer for work on and collision but pretensioner(s) are not • Do not place any objects between the around the knee air bag. It is also rec- activated, be sure to have the preten- knee bolster and the driver’s or pas- ommended that you visit a NISSAN sioner system checked and, if neces- senger’s seat. Such objects may be- dealer for installation of electrical sary, replaced. It is recommended come dangerous projectiles and equipment. The SRS wiring har- that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this cause injury if a knee air bag inflates. nesses* should not be modified or service. • Right after inflation, the knee air bag disconnected. Unauthorized electri- • No unauthorized changes should be system components will be hot. Do cal test equipment and probing de- made to any components or wiring not touch them; you may severely vices should not be used on the knee of the pretensioner system. This is to burn yourself. air bag system. prevent damage to or accidental ac- • No unauthorized changes should be *The SRS wiring harness or connectors are tivation of the pretensioner(s). Tam- made to any components or wiring yellow or orange for easy identification. pering with the pretensioner system of the knee air bag system. This is to may result in serious personal injury. When selling your vehicle, we request that prevent damage to or accidental in- • It is recommended that you visit a you inform the buyer about the knee air flation of the knee air bag system. NISSAN dealer for work around and bag system and guide the buyer to the • Do not make unauthorized changes on the pretensioner system. It is also appropriate sections in this manual. to your vehicle's electrical system or recommended that you visit a suspension system. This could affect NISSAN dealer for installation of elec- proper operation of the knee air bag Seat belt with pretensioner(s) trical equipment. Unauthorized elec- system. (front seats) trical test equipment and probing • Tampering with the knee air bag sys- devices should not be used on the tem may result in serious personal WARNING pretensioner system. injury. For example, do not change • The pretensioner(s) cannot be re- • If you need to dispose of the preten- the driver or passenger knee bolster used after activation. They must be sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec- or install additional trim material replaced together with the retractor ommended that you visit a NISSAN around the knee air bag. and buckle as a unit. dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

1-62 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system The pretensioner system may activate The supplemental air bag warning light with the supplemental air bag system in is used to indicate malfunctions in the certain types of collisions. Working with the pretensioner(s) system. For additional in- seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help formation, see “Supplemental air bag tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- warning light” (P.1-64). If the operation of the comes involved in certain types of colli- supplemental air bag warning light indi- sions, helping to restrain front seat cates there is a malfunction, have the sys- occupants. tem checked. It is recommended that you The pretensioner(s) are encased with the visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. seat belt retractor. These seat belts are When selling your vehicle, we request that used the same way as conventional seat you inform the buyer about the preten- belts. sioner system and guide the buyer to the When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re- appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual. leased and a loud noise may be heard. This LRS3235 smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to 1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located on inhale it, as it may cause irritation and the sun visors) choking. Those with a history of a breath- SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING ing condition should get fresh air promptly. LABELS After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load Warning labels about the supplemental limiters allow the seat belt to release web- front-impact air bag system are placed in bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the vehicle as shown in the illustration. the chest. WARNING Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63 When the ignition switch is placed in the ON WARNING position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and If the supplemental air bag warning then turns off. This means the system is light is on, it could mean that the front operational. air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, If any of the following conditions occur, the knee air bag and/or pretensioner sys- front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, tems will not operate in an accident. To knee air bag and pretensioner systems help avoid injury to yourself or others, need servicing: have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you • The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. • The supplemental air bag warning light Repair and replacement flashes intermittently. procedure LRS0100 • The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING bags, knee air bag and pretensioner(s) are Under these conditions, the front air bag, LIGHT designed to inflate on a one-time-only ba- side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag or sis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the The supplemental air bag warning light, pretensioner systems may not operate supplemental air bag warning light re- displaying in the instrument panel, properly. They must be checked and remains illuminated after inflation has oc- monitors the circuits for the Air bag Control paired. It is recommended that you visit a curred. These systems should be repaired Unit (ACU), satellite sensors, crash zone NISSAN dealer for this service. sensor, occupant classification sensor, the and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is supplemental front-impact air bag, seat- recommended that you visit a NISSAN mounted side-impact supplemental air dealer for this service. bag, knee air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits include air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

1-64 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system When maintenance work is required on the • If you need to dispose of a supple- vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, mental air bag or pretensioner sys- curtain air bags, knee air bag, pretension- tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom- er(s) and related parts should be pointed mended that you visit a NISSAN out to the person performing the mainte- dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures nance. The ignition switch should always could cause personal injury. be in the LOCK position when working un- • If there is an impact to your vehicle der the hood or inside the vehicle. from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be WARNING checked to verify it is still functioning • Once a front air bag, side air bag, cur- correctly. It is recommended that you tain air bag, or knee air bag has in- visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. flated, the air bag module will not The OCS should be checked even if no function again and must be replaced. air bags deploy as a result of the im- Additionally, the activated preten- pact. Failure to verify proper OCS sioner(s) must also be replaced. The function may result in an improper air bag module and pretensioner(s) air bag deployment resulting in in- should be replaced. It is recom- jury or death. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired. • The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65 2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...... 2-2 Wiper and washer switch ...... 2-40 Meters and gauges ...... 2-4 Switch operation ...... 2-40 Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-5 Rear switch operation ...... 2-41 Tachometer ...... 2-7 Rear window and outside mirror Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 (if so equipped) defroster switch ...... 2-42 Distance To Empty (DTE) ...... 2-8 Headlight and turn signal switch ...... 2-43 Trip computer (if so equipped) ...... 2-9 Headlight control switch ...... 2-43 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system reminders ...... 2-10 (Type A) (if so equipped) ...... 2-48 Checking lights ...... 2-12 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Warning/Indicator lights (red) ...... 2-12 system (Type B) (if so equipped) ...... 2-48 Warning/Indicator lights (yellow) ...... 2-15 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-49 Warning/Indicator lights (other) ...... 2-21 Turn signal switch ...... 2-49 Audible reminders ...... 2-22 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-50 Vehicle information display (if so equipped) .....2-23 Horn ...... 2-50 How to use the vehicle information Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ...... 2-51 display ...... 2-23 Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-52 Startup display ...... 2-24 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch Settings ...... 2-24 (if so equipped) ...... 2-52 Vehicle information display warnings Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-53 and indicators...... 2-31 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch Security systems (if so equipped) ...... 2-37 (if so equipped) ...... 2-53 Vehicle security system (if so equipped) .....2-37 Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) (if so equipped) ...... 2-54 (if so equipped) ...... 2-38 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-39 (if so equipped) ...... 2-55 Emergency call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . 2-56 Cup holders ...... 2-63 Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) ...... 2-56 Luggage hooks ...... 2-65 Power outlets ...... 2-58 Grocery hooks ...... 2-65 12v outlet ...... 2-58 Cargo cover (if so equipped) ...... 2-66 Extended storage switch ...... 2-59 Roof rack (if so equipped) ...... 2-67 Storage...... 2-60 Windows ...... 2-70 Front-door pockets ...... 2-60 Power windows ...... 2-70 Rear-door pockets ...... 2-60 Interior lights ...... 2-73 Seatback pockets (if so equipped) ...... 2-60 Map lights ...... 2-74 Storagetrays...... 2-61 Personal Light ...... 2-75 Glovebox...... 2-62 Luggage compartment light ...... 2-75 Console box (if so equipped) ...... 2-62 INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls 18. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System Refer to the page number indicated in (P. 4-2, 4-67) parentheses for operating details. Cruise control switches (P. 5-56) 19. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-42) 20. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock lever (P. 3-26) 21. Hood release (P. 3-21) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-25) 22. Steering wheel switches for audio control (P. 4-2, 2-23) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (if so equipped) (P. 4-2) 23. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-53) Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-53) Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-54) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-55) Instrument panel pocket (if so equipped) (P. 2-60) Enter/select switch for trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9) * Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual (if so equipped).

Instruments and controls 2-3 METERS AND GAUGES

LIC4649 Type A (if so equipped) 1. Tachometer 2. Warning and indicator lights Vehicle information display 3. Speedometer Odometer 4. Trip reset switch Twin trip odometer Instrument brightness control knob Fuel gauge

2-4 Instruments and controls SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display (TypeA—ifso equipped) or the trip computer (Type B — if so equipped) to the left of the speedometer.

LIC4284 Type B (if so equipped) 1. Tachometer 4. Trip reset switch 2. Trip computer Instrument brightness control knob Odometer 5. Warning and indicator lights Twin trip odometer 3. Speedometer

Instruments and controls 2-5 LIC2255 LIC4671 LIC3595 Speedometer Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Changing the display The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. Odometer/Twin trip odometer The odometer and the twin trip odometer Push the TRIP RESET switch O2 on the right O1 are displayed in the vehicle information side of the instrument panel to change the display (Type A) (if so equipped) or the trip display as follows: computer (Type B) (if so equipped) when Trip → Trip → Odometer Mile- the ignition switch is placed in the ON age → Trip position. Resetting the trip odometer The odometer records the total distance Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 2 for more the vehicle has been driven. O than 1 second resets the currently dis- The twin trip odometer records the displayed trip odometer to zero. tance of individual trips. Average fuel economy information is also available. For additional information, see “Trip computer” (P. 2-9). 2-6 Instruments and controls LIC3562 LIC3536 LIC3564 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Type A (if so equipped) TACHOMETER Type B (if so equipped): The tachometer is FUEL GAUGE located on the left side of the meter cluster. The tachometer indicates engine speed in The gauge indicates the approximate fuel revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev level in the tank. CAUTION engine into the red zone O1 . The gauge may move slightly during brak- Type A (if so equipped): To access the ta- When engine speed approaches the ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or chometer, use the and on the red zone, shift to a higher gear or re- down hills. duce engine speed. Operating the en- steering wheel to navigate to the “Gauges” Type A (if so equipped): The low fuel warn- gine in the red zone may cause serious display. For additional information, see ing message shows in the vehicle informa- engine damage. “How to use the vehicle information dis- tion display when the amount of fuel in the play” (P. 2-23). tank is getting low. Type B (if so equipped): The low fuel warning light illuminates when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Instruments and controls 2-7 CAUTION NOTE: • The DTE value after refill is estimated • If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the based on recent fuel economy and Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may amount of fuel added. come on. Refuel as soon as possible. • If a small amount of fuel is added, or After a few driving trips, the light the ignition is on during refueling, the should turn off. If the light remains on display may not be updated. after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended • Conditions that affect the fuel that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this economy will also affect the estimated service DTE value (city/highway driving, idle time, remote start time, terrain, sea- • For additional information, see “Mal- sonal weather, added vehicle weight, function Indicator Light (MIL)” added deflectors, roof racks, etc.). (P. 2-19). LIC3593 Type B (if so equipped) DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE) Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg- Displays the estimated distance the ve- isters 0 (Empty). hicle can be driven before refueling. The value is calculated based on recent fuel The indicates that the fuel-filler door economy, the amount of fuel remaining in is located on the driver's side of the vehicle. the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consumption. Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, the value displayed may differ from the actual distance that can be driven. DTE display will change to “---” when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).

2-8 Instruments and controls Average fuel economy → Average speed → Trip distance Trip time → Trip Distance The trip distance mode shows the distance traveled since the last reset. The trip dis- Average fuel economy (mpg or tance can be reset by pressing the km/l) change/trip switch for more than approxi- The average fuel economy mode shows mately 1 second. the average fuel economy since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the Shipping mode change/reset switch for more than ap- This message may appear if the extended proximately 1 second. The display is up- storage switch is not pushed in. When this dated every 30 seconds. At about the first message appears, push in the extended 1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the display storage switch to turn off the warning. For shows (----). additional information, see “Extended storage switch” (P. 2-59). LIC3594 Average speed (mph or km/h) TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped) The average speed mode shows the aver- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON age vehicle speed since last reset. Reset- position, modes of the trip computer can ting is done by pressing the change/reset be selected by pushing the TRIP RESET switch for more than approximately 1 sec- switch OA . ond. The display is updated every 30 sec- Each time the TRIP RESET switch is pushed, onds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the the display changes as follows: display shows (----). Trip A → Trip B → Odometer Trip time The switch for the trip computer is The trip time mode shows the time since located on the lower left side of the instru- the last reset. The displayed time can be ment panel. reset by pressing the change/trip switch Each time the switch is pushed, the for more than approximately 1 second. display will change as follows:

Instruments and controls 2-9 WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Warning/Indicator light (red) Warning/Indicator light (yellow) Warning/Indicator light (other)

or Brake warning light or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Automatic brake hold indicator light (if so equipped) warning light (white/green) (if so equipped)

Charge warning light Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) CRUISE indicator light (green) system warning light (if so equipped) (if so equipped)

Door open warning light (if so equipped) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Front fog light indicator light (green) Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped) (if so equipped)

or Electronic parking brake Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator light High Beam Assist indicator light (green) indicator light (if so equipped) (if so equipped) (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light or Electronic parking brake High beam indicator light (blue) warning light (if so equipped)

High temperature warning light Engine start operation indicator light Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator (if so equipped) (if so equipped) light (green) (if so equipped)

LED Headlight system warning light Front passenger air bag status light NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so equipped) (green) (if so equipped)

Master warning light (if so equipped) Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator SET indicator light (green) (if so equipped) light (if so equipped)

2-10 Instruments and controls Warning/Indicator light (red) Warning/Indicator light (yellow) Warning/Indicator light (other)

Rear seat belt warning light and chime Low fuel warning light (if so equipped) Side light and headlight indicator light (if so equipped) (green)

Seat belt warning light and chime Low tire pressure warning light SPORT mode indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

Security indicator light (if so equipped) Low windshield-washer fluid warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green) (if so equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Master warning light (if so equipped)

NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so equipped)

Power steering warning light

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light (if so equipped)

Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-11 Warning/Indicator light (red) Warning/Indicator light (yellow) Warning/Indicator light (other)

Slip indicator light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

CHECKING LIGHTS WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red) Low brake fluid warning light With all doors closed, apply the parking For additional information on warnings When the ignition switch is placed in the ON brake, fasten the seat belts and place the and indicators, see “Vehicle information position, the light warns of a low brake fluid ignition switch in the ON position without display” (P. 2-23). level. If the light comes on while the engine starting the engine. The following lights (if is running with the parking brake not ap- so equipped) will come on: or Brake warning plied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: , or , , , , , light (if so , , equipped) 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake This light functions for both the parking fluid as necessary. For additional infor- The following lights (if so equipped) will mation, see “Brake fluid” (P. 8-9). come on briefly and then go off: brake and the foot brake systems. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the or , , , , , Parking brake indicator warning system checked. It is recom- If any light does not come on or operate in When the ignition switch is placed in the ON mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer a way other than described, it may indicate position, this light comes on when the for this service. a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal- parking brake is applied. function. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-12 Instruments and controls WARNING Charge warning light or Electronic parking brake indicator • Your brake system may not be work- If this light comes on while the engine is light (if so ing properly if the warning light is on. running, it may indicate the charging sys- equipped) Driving could be dangerous. If you tem is not functioning properly. Turn the judge it to be safe, drive carefully to engine off and check the generator belt. If This light illuminates when the electronic the nearest service station for re- the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the parking brake system is operating. pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle light remains on, have the system checked. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON towed because driving it could be It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN position, the electronic parking brake indi- dangerous. dealer for this service. cator light illuminates. When the engine is • Pressing the brake pedal with the en- started and the parking brake is released, gine stopped and/or a low brake CAUTION the indicator light turns off. fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will re- • Do not ground electrical accessories If the parking brake is not released, the quire greater pedal effort as well as directly to the battery terminal. Do- electronic parking brake indicator light re- pedal travel. ing so will bypass the variable volt- mains illuminated. Ensure the electronic age control system and the vehicle parking brake indicator light has turned off • If the brake fluid level is below the before driving. MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake battery may not charge completely. fluid reservoir, do not drive until the For additional information, see “Vari- If the electronic parking brake indicator brake system has been checked. It is able voltage control system” (P.8-13). light illuminates or flashes while the elec- recommended that you visit a • Do not continue driving if the genera- tronic parking brake system warning light NISSAN dealer for this service. tor belt is loose, broken or missing. or (yellow) illuminates, it may indicate that the electronic parking brake Door open warning light (if system is not functioning properly. Have so equipped) the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this This light comes on when any of the doors service. are not closed securely while the ignition switch is in the ON position. For additional information, see “Parking brake” (P. 5-22).

Instruments and controls 2-13 Engine oil pressure dicates that the high temperature sensor Master warning light (if so warning light in the engine coolant system is equipped) operational. This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If This light illuminates red when various ve- the light flickers or comes on during nor- When driving, the high temperature warn- hicle information display warnings appear. mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, ing light may turn off. This indicates that the engine coolant temperature is within the For additional information, see “Vehicle in- stop the engine immediately and call a formation display” (P. 2-23). NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair normal range. shop. CAUTION Rear seat belt warning light The engine oil pressure warning light is and chime (if so equipped) not designed to indicate a low oil level. If the high temperature warning light This warning light appears for 65 seconds Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For illuminates while the engine is running, additional information, see “Engine oil” after the ignition is placed in the ON posi- it may indicate the engine temperature tion and the engine is started. (P. 8-5). is extremely high. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. If the vehicle This warning light shows the status of the CAUTION is overheated, continuing vehicle op- three rear seat belts. When one of the rear eration may seriously damage the en- seat belts are buckled, the corresponding Running the engine with the engine oil gine. For additional information, see “If rear seat belt indicator will appear white or pressure warning light on could cause your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-12). not illuminate for models with a trip com- serious damage to the engine almost puter. When one of the rear seat belts are immediately. Such damage is not cov- LED Headlight system unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited belt indicator will appear red. Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon warning light (if so as it is safe to do so. equipped) After a change in buckle status, a chime will sound and the warning will appear for an- This light illuminates when there is an error other 65 seconds. High temperature warning with the system. light (if so equipped) For additional information, see “Headlight When the ignition switch is placed in the ON and turn signal switch” (P. 2-43). position, the high temperature warning light illuminates and then turns off. This in-

2-14 Instruments and controls Seat belt warning light and • The supplemental air bag warning light WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS chime remains on after approximately 7 (yellow) seconds. The light and chime remind you to fasten For additional information on warnings • The supplemental air bag warning light the driver and front passenger seat belts. and indicators, see “Vehicle information flashes intermittently. display” (P. 2-23). For additional information, see “Seat belts” • The supplemental air bag warning light (P. 1-10). does not come on at all. or Anti-lock Braking Security indicator light It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN System (ABS) dealer for these services. warning light This light blinks when the ignition switch is Unless checked and repaired, the supple- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON placed in the OFF or LOCK position. mental restraint system (air bag system) position, the ABS warning light illuminates and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func- The blinking security indicator light indi- and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is tion properly. For additional information, operational. cates that the security systems equipped see “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” on the vehicle are operational. (P. 1-42). If the ABS warning light illuminates while For additional information, see “Security the engine is running or while driving, it systems” (P. 2-37). WARNING may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is Supplemental air bag If the supplemental air bag warning recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. warning light light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock When the ignition switch is placed in the ON and/or pretensioner systems will not function is turned off. The brake system position, the supplemental air bag warning operate in an accident. To help avoid then operates normally but without anti- light illuminates for about 7 seconds and injury to yourself or others, have your lock assistance. For additional information, then turns off. This means the system is vehicle checked as soon as possible. It see “Brake system” (P. 5-132). operational. is recommended that you visit a If any of the following conditions occur, the NISSAN dealer for this service. front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing: Instruments and controls 2-15 Automatic Emergency This light illuminates when the AEB with or Electronic Braking (AEB) system Pedestrian Detection system is set to off in parking brake the vehicle information display (if so warning light (if so equipped), set to off using the Drive Sys- warning light (if equipped) tems OFF switch (if so equipped), or the so equipped) This light comes on when the ignition Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is The electronic parking brake system warn- switch is placed in the ON position. It turns turned off. ing light functions for the electronic park- off after the engine is started. If the light illuminates when the AEB with ing brake system. If the warning light illumi- This light illuminates when the AEB system Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may nates, it may indicate the electronic is set to off in the vehicle information dis- indicate that the system is unavailable. For parking brake system is not functioning play (if so equipped), set to off using the additional information, see “Automatic properly. Have the system checked. It is Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped), Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian recommended that you visit a NISSAN or the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- Detection” (P. 5-98) and “Intelligent Forward dealer for this service. tem is turned off. Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-109). For additional information, see “Parking If the light illuminates when the AEB sys- brake” (P. 5-22). tem is on, it may indicate that the system is Blind Spot Warning (BSW) unavailable. For additional information, see indicator light (if so Engine start operation “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” equipped) indicator light (if so (P. 5-88) and “Intelligent Forward Collision This indicator light will illuminate when the equipped) Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-109). BSW system is operating. If the light illumi- For vehicles equipped with push-button ig- nates yellow while the system is on, it may nition this indicator illuminates when the Automatic Emergency indicate a malfunction. Have the system ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ON Braking (AEB) with checked. It is recommended that you visit a position with the shift lever in the P (Park) Pedestrian Detection NISSAN dealer for this service. position. system warning light (if so For additional information, see “Blind Spot This indicator means that the engine will equipped) Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-35) and “Rear Cross start by pushing the push-button ignition Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-46). This light comes on when the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started. 2-16 Instruments and controls Front passenger air bag Low tire pressure warning not automatically turn off when the tire status light light pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, The front passenger air bag status light will Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres- the vehicle must be driven at speeds be lit and the passenger front air bag will be sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni- above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the off depending on how the front passenger tors the tire pressure of all tires except the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure seat is being used. spare. warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge For additional information, see “Front pas- The low tire pressure warning light warns to check the tire pressure. senger air bag and status light” (P. 1-53). of low tire pressure or indicates that the For vehicles without a vehicle information TPMS is not functioning properly. display, the low tire pressure warning light Lane Departure Warning After the ignition switch is placed in the ON remains illuminated until the tires are in- (LDW) indicator light (if so position, this light illuminates for about 1 flated to the recommended COLD tire equipped) second and turns off. pressure. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning message is displayed each time the igni- If this indicator light illuminates yellow Low tire pressure warning tion switch is placed in the ON position as while the system is on, it may indicate a If the vehicle is being driven with low tire malfunction. Have the system checked. It is long as the low tire pressure warning light pressure, the warning light will illumi- remains illuminated. recommended that you visit a NISSAN nate. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (vehicles dealer for this service. without a vehicle information display) For vehicles with a vehicle information dis- For additional information, see “Lane De- also appears in the trip computer or the play, the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn- parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28). “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” (vehicles ing appears each time the ignition switch is with a vehicle information display) ap- placed in the ON position as long as the low Low fuel warning light (if so pears in the vehicle information display. tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. equipped) When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust For additional information, see “Vehicle in- This light comes on when the fuel level in formation display” (P. 2-23), “Tire Pressure the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5) and as it is convenient, preferably before the (P. 6-3). fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be on the Tire and Loading Information la- a small reserve of fuel in the tank when bel located in the driver’s door opening. the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). The low tire pressure warning light does

Instruments and controls 2-17 TPMS malfunction • If the light does not illuminate with flat and all tires are properly inflated, If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the the ignition switch placed in the ON have the vehicle checked. It is recom- low tire pressure warning light will flash for position, have the vehicle checked as mended that you visit a NISSAN approximately 1 minute when the ignition soon as possible. It is recommended dealer for this service. switch is placed in the ON position. The that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this • When using a wheel without the light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the service. TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS system checked. It is recommended that • If the light illuminates while driving, will not function and the low tire you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. avoid sudden steering maneuvers or pressure warning light will flash for The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning message abrupt braking, reduce vehicle approximately 1 minute. The light will /”Tire Pressure Low— Add Air” warning does speed, pull off the road to a safe loca- remain on after 1 minute. Have your not appear if the low tire pressure warning tion and stop the vehicle as soon as tires replaced and/or TPMS system light illuminates to indicate a TPMS possible. Driving with under-inflated reset as soon as possible. It is recom- malfunction. tires may permanently damage the mended that you visit a NISSAN For additional information, see “Tire Pres- tires and increase the likelihood of dealer for these services. sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5) and tire failure. Serious vehicle damage • Replacing tires with those not origi- “Tire pressure” (P. 8-27). could occur and may lead to an acci- nally specified by NISSAN could af- dent and could result in serious per- fect the proper operation of the WARNING sonal injury or death. Check the tire TPMS. pressure for all four tires. Adjust the • Radio waves could adversely affect tire pressure to the recommended electric medical equipment. Those COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire CAUTION who use a pacemaker should contact and Loading Information label lo- • The TPMS is not a substitute for the the electric medical equipment cated in the driver’s door opening to regular tire pressure check. Be sure manufacturer for the possible influ- turn the low tire pressure warning to check the tire pressure regularly. ences before use. light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire • If the vehicle is being driven at pressure, a tire may be flat or the speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you the TPMS may not operate correctly. have a flat tire, replace it with a spare • Be sure to install the specified size of tire as soon as possible. If no tire is tires to the four wheels correctly.

2-18 Instruments and controls Low windshield-washer control system inspection/maintenance If the warning light illuminates in yellow fluid warning light (if so test. For additional information, see “Readi- while the engine is stopped, it may be im- ness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test” possible to free the steering lock or to start equipped) (P. 10-22). the engine. If the light comes on while the This light comes on when the windshield- engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. washer fluid is at a low level. Add Master warning light (if so However, in these cases, have the vehicle windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For equipped) checked and repaired as soon as possible. additional information, see “Windshield- It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN washer fluid” (P. 8-10). This light illuminates yellow when various dealer for this service. vehicle information display warnings Malfunction Indicator Light appear. For additional information, see “NISSAN In- telligent Key® System” (P. 3-7). (MIL) For additional information, see “Vehicle in- If this indicator light comes on steady or formation display” (P. 2-23). Power steering warning blinks while the engine is running, it may light indicate a potential emission control NISSAN Intelligent Key® malfunction. warning light (if so WARNING The MIL may also come on steady if the equipped) • If the engine is not running or is fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the After the ignition switch is placed in the ON turned off while driving, the power vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure position, this light comes on for about 2 assist for the steering will not work. the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed seconds and then turns off. This light illumi- Steering will be harder to operate. tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 nates or blinks as follows: gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. • The light blinks in yellow when the door is • When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine run- After a few driving trips, the light closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the ning, there will be no power assist for should turn off if no other potential emis- the steering.You will still have control sion control system malfunction exists. ON position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. of the vehicle, but the steering will be If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 harder to operate. Have the power • The light illuminates in yellow when it seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds steering system checked. It is recom- warns of a malfunction with the electrical when the engine is not running, it indicates mended that you visit a NISSAN steering lock system or the Intelligent Key that the vehicle is not ready for an emission dealer for this service. system. Instruments and controls 2-19 When the ignition switch is placed in the ON This light illuminates when the RAB system You may feel or hear the system working; position, the power steering warning light is turned off in the vehicle information dis- this is normal. illuminates. After starting the engine, the play or set to off using the Drive Systems The light will blink for a few seconds after power steering warning light turns off. This OFF switch. the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin. indicates the power steering is operational. If the light illuminates when the RAB sys- The indicator light also comes on If the power steering warning light illumi- tem is on, it may indicate that the system is when you place the ignition switch in the nates while the engine is running, it may unavailable. For additional information, see ON position. The light will turn off after ap- indicate the power steering is not function- “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-81). proximately 2 seconds if the system is op- ing properly and may need servicing. Have erational. If the light does not come on the power steering checked. It is recom- Shift P (Park) warning light have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for (if so equipped) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. This light blinks red and the key reminder this service. When the power steering warning light illu- chime sounds if the shift lever is in any minates with the engine running, there will position other than P (Park) and the ignition Vehicle Dynamic Control be no power assist for the steering, but you switch is in the OFF position. Return the (VDC) OFF indicator light will still have control of the vehicle. At this shift lever to P (Park) with the ignition time, greater steering effort is required to This indicator light comes on when the switch in the OFF position and the light will VDC is turned off in the vehicle information operate the steering wheel, especially in turn off. Place the ignition switch in the sharp turns and at low speeds. display (if so equipped) or by pushing the LOCK position and the chime will turn off. VDC OFF switch (if so equipped). This indi- For additional information, see “Power For additional information, see “NISSAN In- cates the VDC has been turned off. steering” (P. 5-131). telligent Key® System” (P. 3-7). Turn the VDC on using the vehicle informa- Rear Automatic Braking Slip indicator light tion display (if so equipped) or by restarting the engine. For additional information, see (RAB) warning light (if so “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” equipped) This indicator light will blink when the Ve- (P. 5-134). hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is op- This light comes on when the ignition erating, thus alerting the driver to the fact switch is placed in the ON position. It turns that the road surface is slippery and the off after the engine is started. vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

2-20 Instruments and controls The VDC light also comes on when the ig- The automatic brake hold indicator light High Beam Assist indicator nition switch is placed in the ON position. (green) illuminates when the automatic light (green) (if so equipped) The light will turn off after a period of time if brake hold system is operating. the system is operational. If the light stays This indicator light illuminates when the For additional information, see “Automatic headlights come on while the headlight on or comes on along with the indica- brake hold” (P. 5-25). tor light while you are driving, have the VDC switch is in the AUTO position with the high beams selected. This indicates that the system checked. It is recommended that CRUISE indicator light you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. high beam assist is operational. (green) (if so equipped) For additional information, see “Headlight WARNING The light comes on when the cruise control and turn signal switch” (P. 2-43). switch is pushed. The light goes out when VDC should remain on unless freeing a the switch is pushed again. When the High beam indicator light vehicle from mud or snow. cruise indicator light comes on, the cruise (blue) control system is operational. For addi- While the VDC system is operating, you This blue light comes on when the head- might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys- tional information, see “Cruise control” (P. 5-56). light high beams are on and goes out when tem working when starting the vehicle or the low beams are selected. accelerating, but this is normal. Front fog light indicator The high beam indicator light also comes WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS light (green) (if so on when the passing signal is activated. (other) equipped) Lane Departure Warning For additional information on warnings The front fog light indicator light illumi- and indicators, see “Vehicle information nates when the front fog lights are on. For (LDW) indicator light (green) display” (P. 2-23). additional information, see “Fog light (if so equipped) switch” (P. 2-50). This indicator light will blink when the LDW Automatic brake hold system is operating. indicator light (white/green) For additional information, see “Lane De- (if so equipped) parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28). The automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illuminates when the automatic brake hold system is on standby. Instruments and controls 2-21 NISSAN Intelligent Key® checked. It is recommended that you visit a Turn signal/hazard warning light (green) (if so NISSAN dealer for this service. indicator lights (green) equipped) For additional information, see “Cruise con- The appropriate light flashes when the turn After the ignition switch is placed in the ON trol” (P. 5-56). signal switch is activated. position, this light comes on for about 2 NOTE: seconds and then turns off. This light illumi- Side light and headlight nates or blinks as follows: indicator light (green) In case of a turn signal light bulb mal- • The light blinks in green when the Intelli- The side light and headlight indicator light function, the turn signal will flash at a gent Key battery is running out of power. illuminates when the side light or head- higher frequency when the turn signal Replace the battery with a new one. For lights are on. If the headlight switch is in the switch is activated. additional information, see “Battery re- AUTO position, the side light and headlight Both lights flash when the hazard switch is placement” (P. 8-22). indicator light will illuminate when the turned on. headlights turn on. For additional informa- If the light comes on while the engine is tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” For additional information, see “Lights” running, you can drive the vehicle. However, (P. 2-43). (P. 8-24). in these cases, have the vehicle checked and repaired as soon as possible. It is rec- AUDIBLE REMINDERS ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer SPORT mode indicator for this service. light (green) (if so Brake pad wear warning equipped) For additional information, see “NISSAN In- The disc brake pads have audible wear telligent Key® System” (P. 3-7). This light illuminates and then turns off warnings. When a disc brake pad requires when the ignition switch is placed in the ON replacement, it makes a high pitched SET indicator light (green) position, and when the SPORT mode is scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo- (if so equipped) selected. tion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon This light comes on while the vehicle speed For additional information, see “Drive Sport as possible if the warning sound is heard. It is controlled by the cruise control system. If mode switch” (P. 5-21). is recommended that you visit a NISSAN the light blinks while the engine is running, dealer for this service. it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system

2-22 Instruments and controls VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if so equipped)

Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. Turn the headlight control switch off or to AUTO before leaving the vehicle. NISSAN Intelligent Key® door chime The Intelligent Key door chime sounds if any one of the following improper operations is found. LIC4650 LIC3566 • The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors. The vehicle information display is located HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE to the left of the speedometer. It displays • The Intelligent Key is taken outside the INFORMATION DISPLAY such items as: vehicle when operating the vehicle. The vehicle information display can be • Audio Information When the chime sounds, be sure to check changed using the , • Drive Computer Information both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key Sys- , and OK buttons located on the steer- tem. For additional information, see • Fuel Economy Information ing wheel. “NISSAN Intelligent Key® System” (P. 3-7). • Indicators and Warnings ᭺1 - Use these buttons • Vehicle and Meter Display Settings to navigate the vehicle information Parking brake reminder chime • Odometer/twin trip odometer display. A chime sounds if the parking brake is set • Gear Position Indicator (P, R, N, D, L) ᭺2 OK - Change or select an item in the and the vehicle is driven. The chime will • Distance To Empty and Fuel Indicator vehicle information display. stop if the parking brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to zero. ᭺3 (if so equipped) — Returns to the previous menu.

Instruments and controls 2-23 The OK, and buttons also STARTUP DISPLAY SETTINGS control audio and control panel functions When the vehicle in placed in the ON posi- The setting mode allows you to change the in some conditions. Most screens and tion the screens that display in the vehicle information displayed in the vehicle infor- menus offer instruction prompts of the information display include: mation display as well as the model for steering switch buttons to indicate how to several vehicle functions: control the vehicle information display. • Gauges Dots on the left side of the vehicle informa- • Audio • VDC Setting tion display will appear if there is more than • Fuel Economy • Driver Assistance one page of menu items. The OK button • Drive Computer • Customize Display changes the audio source and the • Warning Review • Vehicle Settings buttons also control voice recognition manual mode. For additional information, • Settings • TPMS Settings refer to the separate NissanConnect® For additional information on warnings • Maintenance Owner’s Manual. and indicators, see “Vehicle information • Clock display warnings and indicators” (P. 2-31). • Unit/Language To control what items display in the vehicle • Factory Reset information display, see to “Customize display” (P. 2-26). VDC Setting The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation System Allows the user turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P. 5-134).

2-24 Instruments and controls Driver Assistance The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving aids and assistance options. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Lane Displays the available lane options. Lane Depar- Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Lane Departure Warning ture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28). Blind Spot Displays the available blind spot options. Blind Spot Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” Warning (P. 5-35). Side Indicator Allows user to change the brightness of the side indicator. Brightness Emergency Brake Displays the available emergency brake options. Front Allows user to turn the emergency brake on or off. For additional information, see “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P. 5-88) or “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” (P. 5-98). Rear Allows user to turn the emergency brake on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-81). Parking Aids Displays the available parking aids options. Sonar Displays the available sonar options For additional information, see “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P. 5-140). Rear Sensor Allows user to turn the rear sensor on or off. Display Allows user to turn the display on or off. Volume Allows user to adjust the volume to High/Med/Low. Range Allows user to adjust the range to Far/Mid/Near. Moving Object Allows user to turn moving object detection on or off. For additional information, see “Moving Object Detection (MOD)” (P. 4-27). Cross Traffic Allows user to turn Rear Cross Traffic Alert on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-46). Driver Attention Alert Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system on or off. For additional information, see Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) (P. 5-124). Timer Alert Allows user to set or reset an alert at a specific time interval. Low Temperature Alert Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off. Chassis Control Displays the available chassis control options. Active Trace Control Allows the user to turn the Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) feature on or off. For additional information, see “Chassis Control” (P. 5-137). Active Engine Brake Allows the user to turn the Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) feature on or off. For additional information, see “Chassis Control” (P. 5-137).

Instruments and controls 2-25 Customize Display The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Main Menu Selection Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Status Allows user to turn the status screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Drive Computer Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Driving Aids Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Coolant Temp. Allows user to turn the coolant temp. screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Chassis Control Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. ECO Info Settings Displays the available ECO info settings. ECO Drive Report Select to display this report when the ignition in switch is placed in the ON position. View History Select to view the vehicle’s history. Welcome Effect Displays the available welcome effect settings. Gauges Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Animation Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off.

2-26 Instruments and controls Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Rear Door Alert Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. For additional information, see “Rear Door Alert” (P. 2-56). Horn & Alert When selected, the alert is displayed and the horn sounds. Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed. OFF When selected, no alert or horn will be active. Lighting Displays the available lighting settings. Welcome Headlight Displays the available welcome headlight options. Welcome & Farewell Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach and leave the vehicle. Welcome Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach the vehicle. Farewell Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they leave the vehicle. OFF Allows user to set the headlights to turn off when not driving. Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle. Auto Light Allows user to turn the auto light feature on or off. Light Off Delay Allows user to change the duration of time, from 0 to 180 seconds, that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off. Turn Indicator Displays the available turn indicator settings. 3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” (P. 2-43). Locking Displays the available locking settings. Ext. Door Switch Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.

Instruments and controls 2-27 Menu item Explanation Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Auto Door Unlock Displays the available auto door unlock options. Shift to P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). IGN OFF Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. OFF Doors will have to be manually unlocked. Answer Back Horn Allows user to turn the answer back horn feature on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash twice when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Wipers Displays the available wipers settings. Speed Dependent Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. Reverse Link Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off. Wiper with Speed Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off. Remote Engine Start Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start feature on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started remotely. TPMS Settings The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation TPMS Settings Displays available TPMS Settings. Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.

2-28 Instruments and controls Maintenance The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

WARNING The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, see “Changing wheels and tires” (P.8-35). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Menu item Explanation Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Clock Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Clock Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include manually setting the time and 12H/24H format. If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).

Instruments and controls 2-29 Unit/Language The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Mileage/Fuel Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display. Tire Pressures Allows user to select the tire pressure display units. Temperature Allows user to select the temperature display units. Language Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display. Factory Reset The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, Factory Reset the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

2-30 Instruments and controls VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY If the warning appears while the engine is Chassis Control System Error See WARNINGS AND INDICATORS running, you can drive the vehicle. However, Owner’s Manual in these cases, have the system checked. It This warning appears if the chassis control The following messages may appear in is recommended that you visit a NISSAN your vehicle information display. is not functioning properly. Have the sys- dealer for this service. tem checked by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Chassis Control” Engine start operation for Key Battery Low Intelligent Key system (if (P. 5-137). I-Key battery level is low) This indicator appears when the Intelligent Caution Steep slope This indicator appears when the battery of Key battery is running out of power. the Intelligent Key is low and when the In- If this indicator appears, replace the bat- This warning appears when the automatic telligent Key system and the vehicle are not tery with a new one. For additional infor- brake hold function is activated while the communicating normally. mation, see “Battery replacement” (P. 8-22). vehicle is on a steep hill.. For additional in- If this appears, touch the ignition switch formation, see “Automatic brake hold” with the Intelligent Key while depressing No Key Detected (P. 5-25). the brake pedal. For additional information, This warning appears when the Intelligent Rear Door Alert is activated see “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis- Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni- When the system is enabled, this message charge” (P. 5-13). tion switch in the ON position. Make sure appears when the Rear Door Alert system I-Key System Error: See the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. is active and can remind the driver to check Owner’s Manual For additional information, see “NISSAN In- the back seat. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON telligent Key® System” (P. 3-7). • Using the steering wheel switch, a driver position, this warning appears for a period can select “Dismiss Message” to clear the of time and then turns off. Alarm - Time for a break? display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically The I-Key System Error message warns of This indicator appears when the driver en- turns off after a period of time. a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys- ables the Timer Alert function within the • Using the steering wheel switch, a driver tem. If the warning appears while the en- Driving Assistance settings and the se- can select “Disable Alert” to disable the gine is stopped, it may be impossible to lected set time is expired. The time is based horn alert for the remainder of the cur- start the engine. on ignition on time and can be set up to six hours. rent trip.

Instruments and controls 2-31 WARNING NOTE: If the warning appears again soon after it turns off, have the vehicle checked. It is rec- This system is disabled until a driver en- Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ables it using the vehicle information for this service. stop within a trip temporarily dis- display. For additional information, see misses the message for that stop with- “How to use the vehicle information dis- Illumination indicator out turning the system off. Alerts can play” (P. 2-23). be provided for other stops during the This indicator shows the illumination ad- trip. Selecting “Disable Alert” turns off For additional information, see “Rear Door justment of the instrument panel. For addi- the Rear Door Alert system for the re- Alert” (P. 2-56). tional information, see “Instrument bright- mainder of a trip and no audible alert ness control” (P. 2-49). will be provided. Door/liftgate Open NOTE: This warning appears when a door or the Low Fuel liftgate has been opened. This system is disabled until a driver en- This warning appears when the fuel level in ables it using the vehicle information Headlight System Error: See Owner’s the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon display. For additional information, see Manual as it is convenient, preferably before the “How to use the vehicle information dis- This warning appears when there is an er- fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be play” (P. 2-23). ror with the system. For additional informa- a small reserve of fuel in the tank when tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty). For additional information, see “Rear Door (P. 2-43). Alert” (P. 2-56). Low Outside Temperature Check Back Seat For All Articles High Coolant Temp: See Owner’s Manual This warning appears if the outside tem- When the system is enabled, this message perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera- This warning appears when the tempera- appears when the vehicle comes to a com- ture can be changed to display in Celsius or ture of the engine coolant is too high. Stop plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from Fahrenheit. For additional information, see the vehicle in a safe location as soon as the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, “Settings” (P. 2-24). and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes- possible. Avoid quick starting or abrupt ac- sage alerts the driver, after a period of time, celeration. When the warning turns off, the to check for items in the rear seat after the vehicle can be driven. audible alert has been provided.

2-32 Instruments and controls Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s • The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill and Oil and Filter Manual there is a possibility of moving backward, This indicator appears when the customer This warning appears when there is an er- even if the electronic parking brake is set distance comes for changing the en- ror with the system. For additional informa- applied. gine oil and filter. You can set or reset the tion, see “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P.5-140). • This warning appears if the vehicle distance for checking or replacing these moves while the automatic brake hold is items. For scheduled maintenance items Parking Sensor activated. and intervals, see “Maintenance and This indicator appears when the sensor is schedules” (P. 9-7). activated. For additional information, see Press brake to operate “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P. 5-140). switch Other Power will turn off to save the battery This warning appears if the automatic This indicator appears when the customer This message appears in the vehicle infor- brake hold switch is pushed without de- set distance is reached for checking or re- mation display after a period of time if the pressing the brake pedal while the auto- placing maintenance items other than the ignition switch is in the ON position and if matic brake hold function is activated. De- engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other mainte- the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional infor- press the brake pedal and push the switch nance items can include such things as air mation, see “Push-button ignition switch to deactivate the automatic brake hold filter or tire rotation. The distance for positions” (P. 5-12). function. checking or replacing the items can be set Power turned off to save the battery For additional information, see “Automatic or reset. brake hold” (P. 5-25). This message appears after the ignition Outside Temperature switch is automatically turned off. For addi- Push brake and start Display tional information, see “Push-button igni- switch to drive The outside temperature display appears tion switch positions” (P. 5-12). This indicator appears when the shift lever in the center region of the vehicle informa- Press Brake Pedal is in the P (Park) position. tion display. This warning appears in the following situ- This indicator also appears when the ve- ations: hicle has been started using the Remote • The driver tires to release the electronic Engine Start (if so equipped) function. parking brake manually without depressing the brake pedal.

Instruments and controls 2-33 This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with Reminder: Turn OFF Steep slope Apply foot the brake pedal depressed. You can start Headlights brake the engine from any position of the ignition This warning appears when the headlights This warning appears if the “Caution Steep switch. are left in the ON position when exiting the slope” warning has appeared over about 3 vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the minutes. Then the parking brake will auto- Rear seat belt reminder OFF (if so equipped) or AUTO position. For matically be applied and the brake force of This warning appears for 65 seconds after additional information, see “Headlight and the automatic brake hold will be released, the ignition is placed in the ON position and turn signal switch” (P. 2-43). and the vehicle may move or roll away un- the engine is started. expectedly. Apply the foot brake to stop the Shift to Park vehicle from moving. This warning message shows the status of the three rear seat belts. When one of the This warning appears when the ignition For additional information, see “Automatic rear seat belts are buckled, the corre- switch is in the OFF position and the shift brake hold” (P. 5-25). sponding rear seat belt indicator will ap- lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a Steering lock release pear white. When one of the rear seat belts chime sounds when the ignition switch is malfunction indicator are unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat in the OFF position. This indicator appears when the steering belt indicator will appear red. If this warning appears, move the shift lever lock cannot be released. After a change in buckle status, a chime will to the P (Park) position and start the engine. If this indicator appears, push the ignition sound and the warning will appear for an- Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse switch while lightly turning the steering other 65 seconds. This warning may appear if the extended wheel right and left. Release Parking Brake storage switch is not pushed in. When this This warning appears in the message area warning appears, push in the extended Tire storage switch to turn off the warning. For of the vehicle information display when the This indicator appears when the customer additional information, see “Extended stor- parking brake is set and the vehicle is set distance is reached for replacing tires. age switch” (P. 2-59). driven. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires.

2-34 Instruments and controls WARNING stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres- Automatic Emergency sures of all four tires to the recommended Braking (AEB) emergency The tire replacement indicator is not a COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and warning indicator Loading Information label. For additional substitute for regular tire checks, in- This indicator appears along, with an au- information, see “Low tire pressure warning cluding tire pressure checks. For addi- dible warning, when the system detects light” (P. 2-17) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring tional information, see “Changing the possibility of a forward collision. wheels and tires” (P.8-35). Many factors System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5). For additional information, see “Automatic including tire inflation, alignment, driv- TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual ing habits and road conditions affect Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P. 5-88), “Auto- tire wear and when tires should be re- This warning appears when there is an er- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- placed. Setting the tire replacement in- ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes destrian Detection” (P. 5-98) and “Intelligent dicator for a certain driving distance on, have the system checked. It is recom- Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P.5-109). does not mean your tires will last that mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) long. Use the tire replacement indicator indicator as a guide only and always perform Transmission Shift Position This indicator appears when the BSW sys- regular tire checks. Failure to perform indicator tem is engaged. regular tire checks, including tire pres- This indicator shows the transmission shift For additional information, see “Blind Spot sure checks could result in tire failure. position. Serious vehicle damage could occur Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-35). and may lead to a collision, which could CVT Error: See Owner's result in serious personal injury or Manual Cruise control indicator death. This warning appears when there is a This indicator shows the cruise control sys- Tire Pressure Low - Add Air problem with the CVT system. If this warn- tem status. ing appears, have the system checked. It is This warning appears when the low tire recommended that you visit a NISSAN For additional information, see “Cruise con- pressure warning light in the meter illumi- dealer for this service. trol” (P. 5-56). nates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears,

Instruments and controls 2-35 Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Lane Departure Warning Drive Sport mode indicator Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See (LDW) indicator A small “S” appears to the right of the Trans- Owner’s Manual This indicator appears when the LDW sys- mission Shift Position indicator in the ve- This message appears when the front ra- tem is engaged. hicle information display when the Drive dar sensor may be obstructed due to: For additional information, see “Lane De- Sport mode is engaged. • mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc. parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28). Activate the Drive Sport mode by pressing • inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) the switch on the shift lever while the shift Malfunction lever is in the D (Drive) position. All forward driving aids are temporarily dis- This warning appears when one or more of abled until the system detects that the the following systems (if so equipped) is For additional information, see “Drive sport front radar sensor is no longer obstructed. not functioning properly: mode switch” (P. 5-21). For additional information, see the follow- • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Driver Attention Alert — ing (if so equipped): • Blind Spot Warning (BSW) System Fault • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) • Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) This warning appears when the Intelligent (P. 5-88) If one or more of these warning appears, Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not func- • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with have the system checked. It is recom- tioning properly. For additional information, Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-98) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for see Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) • Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (P. 5-58) (P. 5-124). this service. • Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I- Driver Attention Alert - FCW) (P. 5-109) Rear Automatic Braking TakeaBreak? (RAB) indicator Intelligent Cruise Control This indicator appears to indicate the sta- This alert appears when the system has (ICC) indicators detected that the driver may be displaying tus of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) fatigue or a lack of attention. These indicators show the Intelligent system. For additional information, see Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The sta- “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-81). tus is shown by color. For additional information, see “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” (P. 5-58).

2-36 Instruments and controls SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)

Side Radar Obstruction tion detection type system that activates This message appears when the Blind when a vehicle is moved or when a vibra- Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic tion occurs. Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable The system helps deter vehicle theft but because a radar blockage is detected. For cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the additional information, see “Blind Spot theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo- Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-35) or “Rear Cross Traf- nents in all situations. Always secure your fic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-46). vehicle even if parking for a brief period. System Fault Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. This warning appears if there is a malfunc- Be aware of your surroundings, and park in tion in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. system. For additional information, see “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-81). Many devices offering additional protec- LIC3633 tion, such as component locks, identifica- Vehicle ahead detection tion markers, and tracking systems, are indicator Your vehicle may have three types of secu- available at auto supply stores and spe- This indicator appears when the Auto- rity systems: cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer matic Emergency Braking (AEB) system is • Vehicle security system such equipment. Check with your insur- engaged and has detected a vehicle. • NISSAN Anti-Theft System ance company to see if you may be eligible • NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System for discounts for various theft protection For additional information, see “Automatic features. Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P.5-88) or “Auto- VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- How to arm the vehicle security destrian Detection” (P. 5-98). equipped) system Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone 1. Close all windows. (The system can be This message appears when the camera opens the doors, hood or liftgate when the armed even if the windows are open.) detects an interior temperature of more system is armed. It is not, however, a mo- than approximately 104°F (40°C). For addi- 2. Remove the keys from the vehicle. tional information, see “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28). Instruments and controls 2-37 3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock Vehicle security system activation If the engine does not start using the reg- all doors. The doors can be locked with istered NATS key, it may be due to interfer- The vehicle security system will give the the Intelligent Key, mechanical key, or ence caused by: following alarm: door handle request switch (if so • Another NATS key equipped). • The headlights or turn lamps blink and the horn sounds intermittently but • Automated toll road device 4. Confirm that the security indicator synchronously. • Automated payment device light stays on for about 30 seconds. The • The alarm automatically turns off after a • Other devices that transmit similar vehicle security system is now pre- period of time. However, the alarm reacti- signals armed. The vehicle security system will vates if the vehicle is tampered with Start the engine using the following automatically shift into the armed again. phase. The security light begins to procedure: flash once every three seconds. If during The alarm is activated by: 1. Remove any items that may be causing the pre-armed phase one of the follow- • opening any door, hood or the liftgate the interference away from the NATS key. ing occurs, the system will not arm: without using the key or Intelligent Key 2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- • Any door is unlocked with the Intelligent (even if the door is unlocked by releasing tion for approximately 5 seconds. Key, mechanical key, or door request the door inside lock knob). switch (if so equipped). 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or • Ignition switch is placed in the ON How to stop an activated alarm LOCK position and wait approximately position. The alarm stops only by unlocking a door 10 seconds. • Even when the driver and/or passen- or the liftgate with the key fob, pressing the 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 again. gers are in the vehicle, the system will button on the Intelligent Key, or push- activate with all the doors, hood and ing the request switch (if so equipped) on 5. Start the engine. liftgate locked with the ignition switch the driver's or passenger's door with the 6. Repeat the steps above until all possible placed in the LOCK position. When plac- Intelligent Key in range of the door handle. interferences are eliminated. ing the ignition switch in the ON position, the system will be released. NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM If this procedure allows the engine to start, (NATS) (if so equipped) NISSAN recommends placing the registered NATS key separate from other de- The NISSAN Anti-Theft System will not al- vices to avoid interference. low the engine to start without the use of a registered NATS key. 2-38 Instruments and controls NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER FCC Notice: SYSTEM (if so equipped) For USA: The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System This device complies with Part 15 of the will not allow the engine to start without FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- the use of a registered key. lowing two conditions; (1) This device If the engine fails to start using a registered may not cause harmful interference, and key (for example, when interference is (2) this device must accept any interfer- caused by another registered key, an auto- ence received, including interference mated toll road device or automatic pay- that may cause undesired operation of ment device on the key ring), restart the the device. engine using the following procedures: NOTE: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- Changes or modifications not expressly tion for approximately 5 seconds. approved by the party responsible for LIC0474 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or compliance could void the user's author- LOCK position, and wait approximately ity to operate the equipment. Security indicator light (if so equipped) 10 seconds. For Canada: 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. The security indicator light blinks whenever This device contains licence-exempt the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or 4. Restart the engine while holding the de- transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply LOCK position. vice (which may have caused the inter- with Innovation, Science and Economic ference) separate from the registered Development Canada’s licence-exempt This function indicates the NISSAN Anti- key. RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol- Theft System (NATS) is operational. lowing two conditions: (1) This device If the NATS is malfunctioning, the light will If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN may not cause interference. (2) This de- recommends placing the registered key on remain on while the ignition switch is vice must accept any interference, in- placed in the ON position. a separate key ring to avoid interference cluding interference that may cause un- from other devices. desired operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-39 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

If the light still remains on and/or the • Do not operate the washer if the engine will not start, seek service for the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is NATS as soon as possible. Please bring all empty. registered keys that you have. It is rec- • Do not fill the windshield-washer ommended that you visit a NISSAN fluid reservoir with windshield- dealer for this service. washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. • Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels LIC2661 before pouring the fluid into the SWITCH OPERATION windshield-washer fluid reservoir. WARNING Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield- In freezing temperatures the washer washer fluid concentrate and water. solution may freeze on the windshield NOTE: and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the wind- If the windshield wiper operation is in- shield with the defroster before you terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may wash the windshield. stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that CAUTION is on and around the wiper arms. In ap- • Do not operate the washer continu- proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on ously for more than 30 seconds. again to operate the wiper.

2-40 Instruments and controls The windshield wiper and washer operates • Do not operate the washer if the when the ignition switch is in the ON windshield-washer fluid reservoir is position. empty. Push the lever down to operate the wiper • Do not fill the windshield-washer at the following speed: fluid reservoir with windshield- ᭺1 Intermittent — intermittent operation washer fluid concentrates at full can be adjusted by turning the knob strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid con- toward OA (faster) or OB (slower). Also, the intermittent operation speed varies centrates may permanently stain the in accordance with the vehicle speed (if grille if spilled while filling the so equipped). (For example, when the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. vehicle speed is high, the intermittent • Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid operation speed will be faster.) concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels ᭺2 Low — continuous low speed operation LIC2662 before pouring the fluid into the ᭺3 High — continuous high speed operation REAR SWITCH OPERATION windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep WARNING O fluid reservoir to mix the windshield- operation (MIST) of the wiper. In freezing temperatures the washer washer fluid concentrate and water. Pull the lever toward you 5 to operate the O solution may freeze on the rear window NOTE: washer. The wiper will also operate several and obscure your vision which may times. lead to an accident. Warm the rear win- If the rear window wiper operation is in- NOTE: dow with the defroster before you terrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may wash the rear window. stop moving to protect its motor. If this The Wiper with Speed feature may be occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and disabled. For additional information, see remove the snow, etc. on and around the “Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23). CAUTION wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn • Do not operate the washer continu- the switch on again to operate the wiper. ously for more than 30 seconds.

Instruments and controls 2-41 REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper. ᭺1 Intermittent — intermittent operation (not adjustable)

᭺2 Low — continuous low speed operation Push the switch forward O3 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times. If the windshield wipers are on and the vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) the rear wiper will automatically turn on while the vehicle LIC3600 LIC3570 remains in R (Reverse). Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) NOTE: To defrost the rear window glass, start the NOTE: engine and push the rear window defroster The Reverse Link feature may be dis- switch on. The rear window defroster indi- Use defroster and/or outside mirror de- abled. For additional information, see cator light on the switch comes on. Push froster when engine is running to avoid “Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23). the switch again to turn the defroster off. discharging the battery. To defrost the outside mirrors (if so CAUTION equipped), start the engine and push the outside mirror defroster switch on. The When cleaning the inner side of the rear outside mirror defroster indicator light on window, be careful not to scratch or the switch comes on. Push the switch damage the rear window defroster. again to turn the defroster off. The rear window/outside mirror defroster (if so equipped) automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes. 2-42 Instruments and controls HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

LIC2634 LIC4008 LIC4237 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Type C (if so equipped) HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CAUTION Lighting Use the headlights with the engine run- ᭺1 Rotate the switch to the position, ning to avoid discharging the vehicle and the side, tail, license plate, and in- battery. strument panel lights will come on.

᭺2 Rotate the switch to the position, and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

Instruments and controls 2-43 LIC4498 LIC2636 LIC4237 Type D (if so equipped) Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Autolight system NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity and The autolight system allows the headlights the time delay for autolight shutoff to turn on and off automatically. The auto- can be adjusted. For additional infor- light system can: mation, see “Vehicle information dis- • Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, play” (P. 2-23). license plate and instrument panel lights To turn on the autolight system: automatically when it is dark. • Turn off all the lights when it is light. 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position 1 . • Keep all the lights on for a period of time O after you place the ignition switch in the 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON OFF position and all doors are closed. position.

2-44 Instruments and controls 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain on for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset. To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF (if so equipped), ,or position. The headlights will turn on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is operated continuously). LIC4006 LIC2637 If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and one of the doors is opened Be sure you do not put anything on top Headlight beam select and this condition is continued, the head- of the autolight sensor located in the top ᭺1 To select the high beam function, push side 1 of the instrument panel. The au- lights remain on for 5 minutes. O the lever forward while the low beams tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it are on. The high beam lights come on is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as and the indicator light illuminates. if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked ᭺2 Pull the lever back to return to the low with the engine off and the ignition beam. switch placed in the ON position, your ᭺3 vehicle's battery could become Pulling and releasing the lever flashes discharged. the headlight high beams on and off. The low beams do not need to be on for this to function.

Instruments and controls 2-45 High Beam Assist (if so equipped) – When the headlights of the on- • The timing of switching the low The High Beam Assist system will operate coming vehicle or the leading ve- beam and high beam may change when the vehicle is driven at speeds of ap- hicle are turned off, when the color under the following situations. proximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If of the light is affected due to for- – The brightness of the headlights an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle ap- eign materials on the lights, or of the oncoming vehicle or leading pears in front of your vehicle when the when the light beam is out of vehicle. headlight high beam is on, the headlight position. – The movement and direction of will be switched to the low beam – When there is a sudden, continu- the oncoming vehicle and the automatically. ous change in brightness. leading vehicle. – When driving on a road that – When only one light on the on- WARNING passes over rolling hills, or a road coming vehicle or the leading ve- that has level differences. • The High Beam Assist system is a hicle is illuminated. convenience but it is not a substitute – When driving on a road with many – When the oncoming vehicle or the for safe driving operation. The driver curves. leading vehicle is a two-wheeled should remain alert at all times, en- – When a sign or mirror-like surface vehicle. sure safe driving practices and is reflecting intense light towards – Road conditions (incline, curve, switch the high beams and low beam the front of the vehicle. the road surface, etc.). manually when necessary. – When the container, etc. being – The number of passengers and • The high beam or low beam may not towed by a leading vehicle is re- the amount of luggage. switch automatically under the fol- flecting intense light. lowing conditions. Switch the high – When a headlight on your vehicle beam and low beam manually. is damaged or dirty. – During bad weather (rain, fog, – When the vehicle is leaning at an snow, wind, etc.). angle due to a punctured tire, be- – When a light source similar to a ing towed, etc. headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle.

2-46 Instruments and controls When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the headlight uses the low beam. To turn off the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the position or select the low beam position by placing the lever in the neutral position.

LIC3696 LSD3502 High Beam Assist operation Ambient image sensor maintenance The ambient image sensor A for the High To activate the High Beam Assist system, O Beam Assist system is located in front of turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po- the inside mirror. To maintain the proper sition 1 and push the lever forward 2 O O operation of the high beam assist system (high beam position). The High Beam and prevent a system malfunction, be sure Assist indicator light in the meter will illumi- to observe the following: nate while the headlights are turned on. • Always keep the windshield clean. If the High Beam Assist indicator light does • Do not attach a sticker (including trans- not illuminate in the above condition, it may parent material) or install an accessory indicate that the system is not functioning near the ambient image sensor. properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN • Do not strike or damage the areas dealer for this service. around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor. Instruments and controls 2-47 If the ambient image sensor is damaged DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS due to an accident, it is recommended that SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped) (DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if so you visit a NISSAN dealer. The DRL portion of the fog light assembly equipped) Battery saver system automatically illuminates when the engine The LED DRL portion of the fog light assem- is started with the parking brake released. bly automatically illuminates when the en- The battery saver system automatically The DRL operate with the headlight switch gine is started with the parking brake returns off the ignition after a period of time in the OFF or AUTO position. Turn the head- leased. The LED DRL operate with the when the ignition switch is left in the ON light switch to the position for full headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO posi- position. illumination when driving at night. (The DRL tion. Turn the headlight switch to the The battery saver system automatically will turn off.) position for full illumination when driving at turns off the following lights after a period If the parking brake is applied before the night. (The LED DRL will turn off.) of time when the ignition switch is placed in engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate. If the parking brake is applied before the the OFF position: The DRL illuminate once the parking brake engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi- • Headlights, when the headlight switch is is released. The DRL will remain on until the nate. The LED DRL illuminate once the in the or position ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. parking brake is released. The LED DRL will • Interior lights, when left in the ON position It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight remain on until the ignition switch is placed switch on for interior controls and switches in the OFF position. CAUTION to illuminate, as those remain off while the It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch is in the OFF or AUTO position. Even though the battery saver feature switch on for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain off while the automatically turns off the headlights WARNING after a period of time, you should turn switch is in the OFF or AUTO position. the headlight switch to the OFF posi- When the DRL system is active, tail WARNING tion (if so equipped) when the engine is lights on your vehicle are not on. It is not running to avoid discharging the necessary at dusk to turn on your When the LED DRL system is active, tail vehicle battery. headlights. Failure to do so could cause lights on your vehicle are not on. It is an accident injuring yourself and necessary at dusk to turn on your head- others. lights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

2-48 Instruments and controls LIC4150 LIC4151 LIC2638 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) TURN SIGNAL SWITCH INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS Turn signal CONTROL ᭺1 Move the lever up or down to signal the Turn the control knob A to adjust the O turning direction. When the turn is com- brightness of instrument panel lights. pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically. Lane change signal ᭺2 Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

Instruments and controls 2-49 HORN

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times. Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions. NOTE: The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled. For additional information, see “Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23).

LIC2639 LIC3568 FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so To sound the horn, push near the horn icon equipped) on the steering wheel. To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight WARNING switch to the or position, then turn the fog light switch to the Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so position. could affect proper operation of the To turn the fog lights on with the headlight supplemental front air bag system. switch in the AUTO position, the headlights Tampering with the supplemental must be on, then turn the fog light switch to front air bag system may result in seri- the position. ous personal injury. To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

2-50 Instruments and controls HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

CAUTION The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. • The battery could run down if the 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON seat heater is operated while the en- position. gine is not running. • Do not use the seat heater for ex- 2. Push the switch once for the high (2 intended periods or when no one is us- dicators illuminated) setting. Push the ing the seat. switch again for the low (1 indicator illuminated) setting. • Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blan- The heater is controlled by a thermostat, ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other- automatically turning the heater on and wise, the seat may become off. The indicator light(s) will remain on overheated. as long as the switch is on. • Do not place anything hard or heavy LIC3973 3. Push the switch again to turn it off (no on the seat or pierce it with a pin or indicators illuminated). WARNING similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. 4. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to push the Do not use or allow occupants to use • Any liquid spilled on the heated seat switch to turn it off. the seat heater if you or the occupants should be removed immediately with cannot monitor elevated seat tem- a dry cloth. peratures or have an inability to feel • When cleaning the seat, never use pain in body parts that contact the gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any seat. Use of the seat heater by such similar materials. people could result in serious injury. • If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-51 HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) SWITCH (if so equipped) (if so equipped)

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off.

LIC4645 LIC4304 The heated steering wheel system is de- The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch is signed to operate only when the surface used to turn on and off the BSW system. temperature of the steering wheel is below When the BSW switch is pushed, the BSW 68°F (20°C). system will turn on and the BSW indicator Push the heated steering wheel switch to light in the meter will illuminate. When the warm the steering wheel after the engine BSW switch is pushed again, the BSW sys- starts. The indicator light will come on. tem will turn off and the BSW indicator light will turn off. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system heat the steering wheel and cycle off and may be linked with the BSW system. For on to maintain a temperature above 68°F additional information, see “Blind Spot (20°C). The indicator light will remain on as Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-35) and “Rear Cross long as the system is on. Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-46).

2-52 Instruments and controls DRIVE SYSTEMS OFF SWITCH LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if so equipped) SWITCH (if so equipped)

For additional information, see “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P. 5-88), “Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- destrian Detection” (P.5-98) and “Rear Auto- matic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-81).

LIC4314 LIC4224 The following systems (if so equipped) are The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch automatically enabled when the vehicle is is used to turn on and off the LDW system. started: When the LDW switch is pushed, the LDW • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system will turn on and the LDW indicator • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with light will illuminate. When the LDW switch is Pedestrian Detection pushed again, the LDW system will turn off and the LDW indicator light will turn off. • Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) The LDW system warns the driver with a To turn the systems off, push the Drive Sys- warning light and chime that the vehicle is tems OFF switch. The Automatic Emer- beginning to leave the driving lane. For ad- gency Braking (AEB)/ Automatic Emer- ditional information, see “Lane Departure gency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28). Detection system warning light and the RAB system warning light will illuminate in the meter.

Instruments and controls 2-53 REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

The Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) The RSS can be disabled by pushing the system, Automatic Emergency Braking OFF switch. When the system is disabled, (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system, or the indicator light on the switch will turn off. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I- The system will automatically reset the FCW) system may be linked with the LDW next time the ignition switch is placed in system. For additional information, see “Au- the ON position. tomatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P. 5-88), “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with For additional information, see “Rear Sonar Pedestrian Detection” (P. 5-98) and “Intelli- System (RSS)” (P. 5-140). gent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-109).

LIC4227

WARNING The Rear Sonar System is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly. The RSS (if so equipped) is active when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse). The indicator light on the switch will turn on. When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.

2-54 Instruments and controls VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P. 5-134).

LIC4315 The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions. If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator light will come on. The Automatic Emergency Brak- ing (AEB) system warning light also may come on.

Instruments and controls 2-55 EMERGENCY CALL (SOS) BUTTON REAR DOOR ALERT (if so equipped) (if so equipped)

The Rear Door Alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle. The Rear Door Alert system is initially disabled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” (P. 2-31). When the system is enabled: • The system is activated when a rear door LIC4646 is opened and closed within 10 minutes of the vehicle being driven. When the driver The Emergency call (SOS) button is used in Pressing the button 2 will (with a paid O door is closed and the system is acti- combination with a NissanConnect® Ser- subscription) reach a response specialist vated, a visual message appears in the vices subscription to call for assistance in that will provide assistance based on the vehicle information display. For additional case of an emergency. situation described by the vehicle’s occu- information, see “Rear Door Alert is acti- pant. For additional information, or to enroll The Emergency call button is under a vated” (P. 2-31). your vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/ cover. Press the cover once 1 . The cover O connect or call 855–426–6628. • If a rear door is opened and closed but will drop down, exposing the Emergency the vehicle is not driven within approxi- call button. mately 10 minutes, the system will not be activated. A rear door must be opened and closed and the car driven within 10 minutes for the system to activate.

2-56 Instruments and controls When the Rear Door Alert system is acti- NOTE: NOTE: vated: If “Alert Only” setting is selected, the There may be times when the horn • When the driver puts the vehicle in the P message alert will still be shown in the sounds but there are no objects or pas- (Park) position, a notification message vehicle information display but the horn sengers in the rear seat(s). appears in the vehicle information dis- will not sound. play with the options to “Dismiss Mes- For additional information, see “Rear Door Alert is activated” (P. 2-31). sage” or “Disable Alert” if desired. WARNING – Select “Disable Alert” to temporarily disable for that stop. • If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no – No selection or ‘Dismiss Message” will audible alert will be provided regard- keep the alert enabled for that stop. less of rear door open/close status. • If the alert is enabled when a driver exits • There may be times when there is an the vehicle, a message will appear in the object or passenger in the rear vehicle information display that states seat(s) but the audible alert does not “Check Back Seat For All Articles.” sound. For example, if rear seat pas- If “Horn & Alert” setting is selected: sengers enter or exit the vehicle dur- –– An audible horn sound will occur after ing a trip. a short time unless a rear door is • The system does not directly detect opened and closed within a short time objects or passengers in the rear to deactivate the alert. seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a ––If the doors are locked before the alert rear door is opened and closed, indi- is deactivated by opening a rear door, cating that there may be something the horn will sound. in the rear seat(s). ––If the trunk is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be delayed until after the trunk is closed.

Instruments and controls 2-57 POWER OUTLETS

NOTE: • Avoid using power outlets when the • When the ignition is in the OFF position, air conditioner, headlights or rear the front console power outlet stops window defroster is on. delivering power one minute after the • Before inserting or disconnecting a door is opened and stays open. plug, be sure the electrical accessory • If the door remains closed after the ig- being used is turned off. nition is placed in the OFF position, the • Push the plug in as far as it will go. If front console power outlet continues good contact is not made, the plug to deliver power until the accessory may overheat or the internal tem- power timer has elapsed. perature fuse may open. • When not in use, be sure to close the CAUTION cap. Do not allow water or any other • The outlet and plug may be hot dur- liquid to contact the outlet. LIC4003 ing or immediately after use. Instrument Panel • Only certain power outlets are de- 12V OUTLET signed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power out- The power outlet is for powering electrical let for an accessory lighter. It is rec- accessories such as cellular telephones. It ommended that you visit a NISSAN is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. dealer for additional information. The front console power outlet is powered • Do not use with accessories that ex- only when the ignition switch is in the ON ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. position, or while the accessory power is • Do not use double adapters or more active. than one electrical accessory. • Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

2-58 Instruments and controls EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

LIC3581 LIC3266 LIC3268 The extended storage switch is used when Pulled position Pushed position the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is located in the fuse panel OA which is on the driver’s side left kick panel, near the floor, on the inside of the panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

Instruments and controls 2-59 STORAGE

LIC4303 LIC3213 LIC0016 FRONT-DOOR POCKETS REAR-DOOR POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS (if so equipped) The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver's and passenger's seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.

2-60 Instruments and controls WARNING To ensure proper operation of the driver’s and/or front passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (if so equipped), please observe the following items: • Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest. • Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket. LIC4004 LIC4301 Storage compartment (if so equipped) Instrument panel pocket STORAGE TRAYS (if so equipped) WARNING Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

Instruments and controls 2-61 LIC3986 LIC3580 LIC4648 Center console (if so equipped) GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped) Open the glove box by pulling the handle. To open the console box, pull on the lever O1 and raise the lid O2 . WARNING To close, push the lid down until the lock Keep glove box lid closed while driving latches. to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-62 Instruments and controls LIC4647 LIC3574 LIC3575 Front console Bottle holder — front Bottle holder — rear CUP HOLDERS CAUTION CAUTION • Do not use bottle holder for any other • Avoid abrupt starting and braking objects that could be thrown about in when the cup holder is being used to the vehicle and possibly injure prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid people during sudden braking or an is hot, it can scald you or your accident. passenger. • Do not use bottle holder for open liq- • Use only soft cups in the cup holder. uid containers. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

Instruments and controls 2-63 LIC4651 LIC4652 LIC4653 To Close To Open To Remove To Close: Insert finger through flap notches To remove mechanism: Make sure the CAUTION and pull them up O1 . flaps are open. Insert finger through the To Open: Pull down flaps from notch O2 . handle and pull it up O3 to remove the Do not use excessive force to operate entire mechanism. flaps. It can result in mechanism failure. NOTE: • Close flaps for larger cup holder space such as for 32 oz. paper cups. • Open flaps for smaller cup holder space such as for 12 oz. cans.

2-64 Instruments and controls • Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo. • Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with LIC4300 items in the cargo area. Secure any LIC3569 items in the cargo area. Your child Left side shown (right similar) LUGGAGE HOOKS could be seriously injured or killed in The luggage hooks that are located on the a collision if the top tether strap is GROCERY HOOKS floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. damaged. The grocery hooks are located in the cargo (490 N) to a single hook. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in area and allow for standard size plastic grocery bags to hang side by side. The luggage hooks can be used to secure a seat and using a seat belt properly. cargo with ropes or other types of straps. CAUTION WARNING Do not apply a total load of more than • Properly secure all cargo with ropes 6.6 lbs. (3 kg) to a single grocery hook. or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Instruments and controls 2-65 CARGO COVER (if so equipped) • Properly secure cargo and do not al- WARNING low it to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether • Never put anything on the cargo anchor. Cargo that is not properly se- cover, no matter how small. Any ob- cured or cargo that contacts the top ject on it could cause an injury in an tether strap may damage the top accident or sudden stop. tether strap during a collision. If the • Do not put objects heavier than 44 cargo cover contacts the top tether lbs. (20 kg) on the cargo cover for strap when it is attached to the top long periods of time. tether anchor, remove the cargo • Do not leave the cargo cover in the cover from the vehicle or secure it on vehicle with it disengaged from the the cargo floor below its attachment holder. location. If the cargo cover is not removed, it may damage the top tether • Properly secure all cargo with ropes strap during a collision. Your child LIC3349 or straps to help prevent it from slid- could be seriously injured or killed in ing or shifting. Do not place cargo To remove the cargo cover: a collision if the child restraint top higher than the seatbacks. In a sud- tether strap is damaged. ᭺1 Remove the straps from the rear hatch. den stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. The cargo cover keeps the luggage com- ᭺2 Remove the cargo cover from the hold- partment contents hidden from the ers on the rear pillar. outside.

2-66 Instruments and controls • Heavy loading of the crossbars has Do not apply any load directly to the roof the potential to affect the vehicle side rails OA . Crossbars OB must be in- stability and handling during sudden stalled before applying load/cargo/ or unusual handling maneuvers. luggage to the roof of the vehicle. • Properly secure all cargo with ropes Genuine NISSAN accessory crossbars may or straps to help prevent it from slid- be available through a NISSAN dealer. It is ing or shifting. In a sudden stop or recommended that you visit a NISSAN collision, unsecured cargo could dealer for additional information. cause personal injury. The service load capacity for the roof side • Drive extra carefully when the vehicle rails is 110 lbs. (50 kg.), however do not ex- is loaded at or near the cargo carry- ceed the crossbars load capacity. ing capacity, especially if the signifi- Be careful that your vehicle does not ex- cant portion of that load is carried on ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating the crossbars. LIC4202 (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating ROOF RACK (if so equipped) (GAWR front and rear). CAUTION WARNING For additional information regarding GVWR • Use care when placing or removing and GAWR, refer to: • Always install the crossbars onto the items from the roof rack. If you can- • F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. certification label (lo- roof side rails before loading cargo of not comfortably lift the items onto cated on the driver’s door pillar). any kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof rack from the ground, use a the roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof ladder or a stool. may cause vehicle damage. • Roof rack cross bars should be evenly distributed. • Do not exceed maximum roof rack crossbars load capacity and always distribute the load uniformly.

Instruments and controls 2-67 Installing Crossbars (if so equipped)

WARNING • It is recommended that you have the roof rack crossbars installed by a NISSAN dealer. • Protect the painted area on the vehicle roof under the crossbars by placing a piece of cloth under the cross bars to prevent scratch damage. • Make sure the moonroof (if so equipped) is in the closed position LIC4010 LIC4011 during the installation process. 1. Manually remove all 8 protective caps 2. Identify the FRONT (A) & REAR (B) cross- from the roof rack rails. See Fig. 1. bar assembly in the kit. NOTE: NOTE: Please stow these protective covers in REAR Crossbar is shorter in length com- the glove box. pared to the FRONT Crossbar

CAUTION Covers should be re-installed if crossbar is removed.

2-68 Instruments and controls LIC4012 LIC4013 LIC4014 3. Identify markings on bottom side of 4. Position FRONT crossbar onto left and 5. Make sure that the FRONT crossbar is in crossbar end supports. right roof rack rail; and adjust right support proper position with respect to the roof in and out until it fits securely into position. rack rail attachment positions, and loosely NOTE: See Fig. 4. install all 4 bolts on FRONT crossbar using • FL is FRONT Crossbar Driver Side. the T–30 TORX® screwdriver provided. • FR is FRONT Crossbar Passenger Side See Fig. 5. • RL is REAR Crossbar Driver Side. • RR is REAR Crossbar Passenger Side. NOTE: When assembled, the Arrow on the bot- Start with driver side front bolt. Bolts tom side of the crossbar end support al- should not be fully tightened, only par- ways points towards the front of the tially tightened. vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-69 WINDOWS

WARNING POWER WINDOWS WARNING • Please locate max load label on crossbar end support. • Make sure that all passengers have • Do not load more than 100 lbs. (45kg). their hands, etc., inside the vehicle • Be careful that your vehicle does not while it is in motion and before clos- exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing the windows. Use the window ing (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight lock switch to prevent unexpected Rating (GAWR Front and Rear). The use of the power windows. GVWR and GAWR are located on the • To help avoid risk of injury or death Safety Compliance Certification La- through unintended operation of the bel. For more information regarding vehicle and/or its systems, including GVWR and GAWR, see “Technical and entrapment in windows or inadver- consumer information” (P. 10-10). tent door lock activation, do not LIC4015 • Always evenly distribute the luggage leave children, people who require 6. Tighten all 4 bolts to 8–9 N-m torque and appropriate crossbar attach- the assistance of others or pets unat- using a T–30 TORX® torque wrench. ment on the crossbar. tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- NOTE: hicle on a warm day can quickly be- a. Start with driver side front bolt. come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people b. T–30 TORX® torque wrench is not pro- and pets. vided with kit. The power windows operate when the ig- 7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the REAR nition switch is placed in the ON position or crossbar installation. for a period of time after the ignition switch 8. After installation, gently wiggle the cross- is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's bars to check for any loose fit. If loose fit is or passenger's door is opened during this noticed, please uninstall and repeat the period of time, the power to the windows is steps 4 through 7. canceled.

2-70 Instruments and controls To open a window, push the switch to the detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch to the detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached.

LIC3238 LIC2309 1. Window lock button Front passenger's power window 2. Power door lock switch switch 3. Front passenger side automatic switch The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's win- 4. Right rear passenger side switch dow. To open the window partially, push the 5. Left rear passenger side switch switch down O1 lightly until the desired window position is reached. To close the 6. Driver’s side automatic switch window partially, pull the switch up O2 until Driver's side power window the desired window position is reached. switch The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows.

Instruments and controls 2-71 Auto-reverse function The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING There are some small distances immediately before the closed position LIC2663 LIC0410 which cannot be detected. Make sure Rear power window switch Automatic operation that all passengers have their hands, The rear power window switches open or To fully open a window equipped with au- etc., inside the vehicle before closing close only the corresponding windows. To tomatic operation, push the window the window. open the window, push the switch and hold switch down to the second detent and re- If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, re- it down O1 . To close the window, pull the lease it; it need not be held. The window placed, or jump started, the power window switch up O2 . automatically opens all the way. To stop auto-reverse function may not operate the window, lift the switch up while the win- properly. Have the power window auto- Locking passengers' windows dow is opening. reverse system re-initialized. It is recom- When the window lock switch is depressed, If so equipped, it may be possible to fully mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for only the driver's side window can be close a window equipped with automatic this service. opened or closed. Push it again to cancel operation, pull the switch up to the second If the control unit detects something the window lock function. detent and release it; it need not be held. To caught in a window equipped with auto- stop the window, push the switch down matic operation as it is closing, the window while the window is closing. will be immediately lowered.

2-72 Instruments and controls INTERIOR LIGHTS

When power window switch does If the power window function does not op- not operate erate properly after performing the above procedure have the system checked and If the power window automatic function repaired. It is recommended that you visit a (closing only) does not operate properly, NISSAN dealer for this service. perform the following procedure to initial- ize the power window system: 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch. 3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the LIC3985 window is closed. The interior light has a three-position 4. Release the power window switch. Op- switch and operates regardless of ignition erate the window by the automatic switch position. function to confirm the initialization is When the switch is in the ON position O3 , complete. The power window automati- the interior lights illuminate, regardless of cally opens or closes depending on if the door position. The lights will go off after a automatic down or up function is period of time unless the ignition switch is selected. placed in the ON position. 5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows.

Instruments and controls 2-73 When the switch is in the O2 position, the CAUTION interior lights will stay on for a period of time when: Do not use for extended periods of time • The doors are unlocked by the key or the with the engine stopped. This could re- power door lock switch while all doors are sult in a discharged battery. closed and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. • The driver’s door is opened and then closed while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. • The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while all doors are closed. The light will turn off while the timer is activated when: LIC3988 • The driver’s door is locked by the key, or MAP LIGHTS the power door lock switch. • The ignition switch is placed in the ON To turn the map lights on, push the switch position. to the O1 position. To turn them off, push the switch to the O2 position. When the switch is in the OFF position O1 , the interior lights do not illuminate, regard- CAUTION less of door position. The lights will turn off automatically after a Do not use for extended periods of time period of time while doors are open to pre- with the engine stopped. This could re- vent the battery from becoming discharged. sult in a discharged battery.

2-74 Instruments and controls The personal light will stay on for about 15 NOTE: seconds when: If the interior lights are turned off auto- • The doors are unlocked while the ignition matically by the battery saver feature, switch is placed in the OFF position and the ignition switch must be placed in the all doors are closed. ON position before the interior lights will • The driver's door is opened and then illuminate again. closed while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. For information regarding the interior light bulb replacement, see “Exterior and interior • The ignition switch is placed in the OFF lights” (P. 8-25). position while all doors are closed. The personal light will turn off while the 15 CAUTION second timer is activated when: Do not use for extended periods of time • The driver's door is locked by the key fob, with the engine stopped. This could re- SIC2063A a key or the lock-unlock switch. sult in a discharged battery. Center personal light • The ignition switch is placed in the ON PERSONAL LIGHT position. LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT The personal light has a three-position When the switch is in the OFF position O3 , The light illuminates when the rear hatch is switch and operates regardless of ignition the light does not illuminate, regardless of opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the switch position. door position. light goes off. For additional information, see “Exterior and interior lights” (P. 8-25). When the switch is in the ON position O1 , Some vehicles are equipped with a battery the light illuminates, regardless of door saver feature that will automatically turn position. off the interior lights after approximately 10 minutes if: When the switch is in the DOOR position O2 , the light illuminates by opening a door. • doors are open, or • the interior light switch is in the ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-75 MEMO

2-76 Instruments and controls 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys...... 3-2 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-2 notwork...... 3-20 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Hood ...... 3-21 keys...... 3-3 Liftgate ...... 3-22 Doors ...... 3-4 Opening the liftgate ...... 3-23 Locking with key ...... 3-5 Closing the liftgate ...... 3-23 Locking with inside lock knob ...... 3-5 Secondary liftgate unlock ...... 3-24 Locking with power door lock switch ...... 3-6 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-25 Automatic door locks ...... 3-6 Opening the fuel-filler door ...... 3-25 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-6 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-25 NISSAN Intelligent Key® system ...... 3-7 Steering wheel ...... 3-26 Operating range ...... 3-8 Tilt and telescopic operation ...... 3-27 Door locks/unlocks precaution ...... 3-9 Sun visors ...... 3-27 NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation ...... 3-9 Vanity mirrors ...... 3-28 How to use the remote keyless entry Card holder (driver's side only) ...... 3-28 function ...... 3-13 Mirrors ...... 3-28 Warning signals ...... 3-15 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror Troubleshooting guide ...... 3-16 (if so equipped) ...... 3-28 Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...... 3-18 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror Remote Engine Start operating range ...... 3-18 (if so equipped) ...... 3-29 Remote starting the vehicle ...... 3-19 Outside mirrors ...... 3-29 Extending engine run time ...... 3-19 Canceling a Remote Engine Start ...... 3-19 KEYS

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.

CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the Intelli- gent Key: LPD2487 LPD2797 • Do not allow the Intelligent Key, Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) which contains electrical compo- 1. Intelligent Keys (two sets) dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key nents, to come into contact with wa- System of your vehicle. Since the registra- ter or salt water. This could affect the 2. Mechanical key tion process requires erasing all memory in system function. 3. Key number plate (one plate) the Intelligent Key components when reg- • Do not drop the Intelligent Key. NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli- • Do not strike the Intelligent Key gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN sharply against another object. Your vehicle can only be driven with the dealer. Intelligent Keys which are registered to • Do not change or modify the Intelli- your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System A key number plate is supplied with your gent Key. components. keys. Record the key number and keep it in • Wetting may damage the Intelligent a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, Never leave the keys in the vehicle. vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom- immediately wipe until it is com- As many as four Intelligent Keys can be mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for pletely dry. registered and used with one vehicle. The duplicates by using the key number. new keys must be registered by a NISSAN 3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments • Do not place the Intelligent Key for an CAUTION extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). Always carry the mechanical key in- • Do not attach the Intelligent Key with stalled in the Intelligent Key slot. a key holder that contains a magnet. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER • Do not place the Intelligent Key near SYSTEM KEYS equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment Additional or replacement keys: and personal computers. If you still have a key, the key number is not If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN necessary when you need extra NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex- Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may isting key can be duplicated without know- prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- ing the key number. As many as four gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- SPA1951 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should mation regarding the erasing procedure, it Mechanical key is recommended that you visit a NISSAN bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- dealer. The Intelligent Key contains the mechani- tem keys that you have to the NISSAN cal key. dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory To remove the mechanical key, release the of all key codes previously registered into lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af- To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it ter the registration process, these compo- into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob nents will only recognize keys coded into returns to the lock position. the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock during registration. Any key that is not the driver’s door. given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your For additional information, see “Doors” vehicle. (P. 3-4).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 DOORS

CAUTION When the doors are locked using one of the • To help avoid risk of injury or death following methods, the doors cannot be through unintended operation of the Do not allow the immobilizer system opened using the inside or outside door vehicle and/or its systems, including key, which contains an electrical tran- handles. The doors must be unlocked to entrapment in windows or inadver- sponder, to come into contact with wa- open the doors. tent door lock activation, do not ter or salt water. This could affect sys- leave children, people who require tem function. WARNING the assistance of others or pets unat- • Always have the doors locked while tended in your vehicle. Additionally, driving. Along with the use of seat the temperature inside a closed ve- belts, this provides greater safety in hicle on a warm day can quickly be- the event of an accident by helping to come high enough to cause a signifi- prevent persons from being thrown cant risk of injury or death to people from the vehicle. This also helps keep and pets. children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. • Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD2777 LPD2942 LPD3141 Driver’s side Power (if so equipped) Inside lock LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as lock or unlock all doors at the same time. To lock the door without the key, move the shown. inside lock knob to the lock position 1 , Turning the key toward the front 1 of the O O then close the door. vehicle locks all doors. Manual To unlock the door without the key, move Turning the key one time toward the rear To lock the driver’s door, turn the key to- the inside lock knob to the unlock position 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From ward the front of the vehicle 1 . To unlock, O 2 . O that position, returning the key to neutral O turn it toward the rear 2 . O O3 (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors O4 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle while any door is open, a warning chime will sound and all doors unlock automatically. AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS • All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). • All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the P (Park) position or when the ignition switch is LPD2309 SPA2037 placed in the OFF position depending on LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR the option selected in the “Vehicle Set- CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK LOCK SWITCH tings” menu (if so equipped). Child safety locks help prevent the rear To lock all the doors without a key, push the NOTE: doors from being opened accidentally, es- door lock switch (driver's or front passen- pecially when small children are in the The Auto Door Unlock function can be ger's side) to the lock position 1 . When vehicle. O changed using “Vehicle Settings” of the locking the door this way, be certain not to The child safety lock levers are located on leave the key inside the vehicle. vehicle information display (if so equipped). For additional information, the edge of the rear doors. To unlock all the doors without a key, push see “Vehicle information display (if so When the lever is in the unlock position O2 , the door lock switch (driver's or front pas- equipped)” (P. 2-23). the door can be opened from the outside senger's side) to the unlock position O2 . or the inside. When the lever is in the LOCK position O1 , the door can be opened only from the outside.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® SYSTEM

WARNING CAUTION In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key func- • Radio waves could adversely affect • Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key tion or use the mechanical key. electric medical equipment. Those with you when operating the vehicle. Although the life of the battery varies de- who use a pacemaker should contact • Never leave the Intelligent Key in the pending on the operating conditions, the the electric medical equipment vehicle when you leave the vehicle. battery’s life is approximately two years. If manufacturer for the possible influ- the battery is discharged, replace it with a ences before use. The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio new one. • The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak waves when the buttons are pressed. When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the radio waves. Environmental conditions The FAA advises the radio waves may NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so may interfere with the operation of the In- affect aircraft navigation and com- equipped) will blink green for about 30 sec- telligent Key under the following operating munication systems. Do not operate onds after the ignition switch is placed in conditions: the Intelligent Key while on an air- the ON position. plane. Make sure the buttons are not • When operating near a location where Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re- operated unintentionally when the strong radio waves are transmitted, such ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near unit is stored for a flight. as a TV tower, power station and broad- equipment which transmits strong radio casting station. waves, such as signals from a TV and per- The Intelligent Key can operate all the door • When in possession of wireless equip- sonal computer, the battery life may be- locks using the remote control function or ment, such as a cellular telephone, trans- come shorter. pushing the request switch (if so equipped) ceiver, or a CB radio. on the vehicle without taking the key out When the battery is discharged, firmly ap- from a pocket or purse. The operating en- • When the Intelligent Key is in contact with ply the foot brake and touch the ignition vironment and/or conditions may affect or covered by metallic materials. switch with the Intelligent Key. Then push the Intelligent Key operation. • When any type of radio wave remote con- the ignition switch while depressing the trol is used nearby. brake pedal within 10 seconds after the Be sure to read the following before using chime sound. For additional information, the Intelligent Key. • When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal see “Push-button ignition switch” (P. 5-11). computer. For additional information, see “Battery re- • When the vehicle is parked near a parking placement” (P. 8-22). meter. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 As many as four Intelligent Keys can be When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- registered and used with one vehicle. For charged or strong radio waves are present information about the purchase and use of near the operating location, the Intelligent additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom- Key operating range becomes narrower, mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm) from each request switch (if so equipped) O1 . If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches (if so equipped) may not function. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelli- gent Key, to push the request switch (if so equipped) to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2073 OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch (if so equipped) O1 .

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments • To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors. • Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped). The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD2554 LPD2445 DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® PRECAUTION OPERATION • Do not push the door handle request You can lock or unlock the doors without switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket Key held in your hand as illustrated. The or bag. close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing Key is outside the vehicle. the door handle request switch (if so equipped) within the range of operation. • After locking with the door handle request switch (if so equipped), verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 LPD2798 LPD2816 LPD2446 Locking doors NOTE: • Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- • Request switches (if so equipped) for while any door is open. However, doors tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK all doors and liftgate can be deacti- lock with the mechanical key even if position and make sure you carry the vated when the “Ext. Door Switch” set- any door is open. Intelligent Key with you. ting is switched to OFF in the “Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle information • Doors do not lock with the door handle 2. Close all doors. display (if so equipped). For additional request switch (if so equipped) with 3. Push the door handle request switch (if information, see “Vehicle information the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. How- so equipped) 1 or the liftgate request display (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23). O ever, when an Intelligent Key is inside switch (if so equipped) O2 . • Doors lock with the door handle request switch (if so equipped) while the the vehicle, doors can be locked with 4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock. ignition switch is not in the LOCK another Intelligent Key. 5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice position. and the buzzer sounds twice.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments WARNING When any door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put After locking the doors using the re- inside the vehicle and all the doors are quest switch (if so equipped), make closed, a chime will sound and the lock will sure that the doors have been securely automatically unlock. locked by operating the door handles. NOTE: Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the The doors may not lock when the Intelli- doors, which may decrease the safety gent Key is in the same hand that is op- and security of your vehicle. erating the request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intel- ligent Key in a purse, pocket or your CAUTION other hand. • When locking the doors using the request switch (if so equipped), make CAUTION LPD2798 sure to have the Intelligent Key in The lockout protection may not func- Unlocking doors your possession before operating tion under the following conditions: the request switch to prevent the In- 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. telligent Key from being left in the • When the Intelligent Key is placed on 2. Push the door handle request switch (if top of the instrument panel. vehicle. so equipped) O1 or the liftgate request • The request switch (if so equipped) is • When the Intelligent Key is placed in- switch (if so equipped) O2 . side the glove box or a storage bin. operational only when the Intelligent 3. The hazard indicator lights flash once • When the Intelligent Key is placed in- Key has been detected by the Intelli- and the outside chime sounds once. gent Key system. side the door pockets. • When the Intelligent Key is placed in- 4. Push the door handle request switch (if Lockout protection side or near metallic materials. so equipped) O1 again within 30 sec- To prevent the Intelligent Key from being onds to unlock all doors and the liftgate. accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 All doors and the liftgate will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 30 seconds after pushing the request switch (if so equipped). • Opening any doors or the liftgate. • Pushing the ignition switch. Using the interior lights The interior lights illuminate for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the interior light switch is in the DOOR position. The lights can be turned off without waiting LPD2816 LPD2446 by performing one of the following NOTE: • Request switches (if so equipped) for operations: • If Selective Unlock is turned off in “Ve- all doors can be deactivated when the • Placing the ignition switch in the ON hicle Settings” of the vehicle informa- Intelligent Key Door Lock setting is position. tion display (if so equipped), all doors switched to OFF in “Vehicle Settings” of • Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. will unlock upon the first push of the the vehicle information display (if so • Switching the interior lights switch to the door handle request switch (if so equipped). For additional information, OFF position. equipped). For additional information, see “Vehicle information display (if so For additional information, see “Interior see “Vehicle information display (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23). lights” (P. 2-73). equipped)” (P. 2-23). If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to unlock the door. 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 10 m (33 ft) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle. The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions: • When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range. • When the doors or the rear liftgate are LPD3600 LPD3602 open or not closed securely. Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) • When the Intelligent Key battery is 1. (remote engine start) button discharged. 1. (lock) button 2. (lock) button 2. (unlock) button CAUTION 3. (unlock) button 3. (panic) button When locking the doors using the Intel- 4. (panic) button ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle. Locking doors 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. 2. Close all doors. 3. Press the button on the Intelli- gent Key. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice All doors and the liftgate will be locked au- button on the Intelligent Key for lon- and the horn beeps once. tomatically unless one of the following op- ger than 1 second. erations is performed within 30 seconds 5. All doors will be locked. The headlights will flash and the panic after pressing the button. alarm will stay on for a period of time. • Opening any doors or the liftgate. WARNING The panic alarm stops when: • Engaging the ignition switch from the After locking the doors using the Intelli- lock position. • It has run for a period of time. gent Key, be sure that the doors have been • Any button is pressed on the Intelligent securely locked by operating the door Using the interior lights Key. handles. Failure to follow these instruc- The interior lights illuminate for a period of • The request switch on the driver or pas- tions may result in inadvertently unlock- time when a door is unlocked and the inte- senger door is pushed and the Intelligent ing the doors, which may decrease the rior light switch is in the DOOR position. Key is in range of the door handle. safety and security of your vehicle. • The liftgate request switch is pushed with The lights can be turned off without waiting the Intelligent Key in range of the liftgate Unlocking doors by performing one of the following area. 1. Press the button on the Intelligent operations: Key. • Placing the ignition switch in the ON Answer back horn feature position. 2. The hazard indicator lights flash once. If desired, the answer back horn feature • Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. 3. Press the button again within 30 can be deactivated using the Intelligent • Switching the interior lights switch to the seconds to unlock all doors and the Key. When it is deactivated and the OFF position. liftgate. button is pressed, the hazard indicator For additional information, see “Interior lights flash twice. When the button is NOTE: lights” (P. 2-73). pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights If Selective Unlock is turned off in “Ve- nor the horn operates. hicle Settings” of the vehicle informa- Using the panic alarm tion display (if so equipped), all doors will unlock upon the first press If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- ened, you may activate the panic alarm to of the key fob. For additional infor- call attention by pressing and holding the mation, see “Vehicle information display (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23). 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments NOTE: be replaced. For additional information re- If you change the Answer Back Horn garding the replacement of a battery, see and light flash feature with the Intelli- “Battery replacement” (P. 8-22). gent Key, the vehicle information display (if so equipped) will show the cur- WARNING SIGNALS rent mode after the ignition switch To help prevent the vehicle from moving has been cycled from the OFF to the unexpectedly by erroneous operation of ON position. The vehicle information the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the display screen can also be used to vehicle from being stolen, a chime or change the answer back horn mode. buzzer sounds from inside and outside the For additional information, see “Ve- vehicle and a warning is displayed in the hicle information display (if so instrument panel. equipped)” (P. 2-23). When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle To deactivate: LPD2836 and the Intelligent Key. Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard Intelligent Key button operation For additional information, see “Trouble- indicator lights will flash three times to con- light shooting guide” (P. 3-16) and “Vehicle infor- firm that the answer back horn feature has The light blinks only when you press any mation display (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23). been deactivated. button on the Intelligent Key. The light illu- To activate: mination only signifies that the key fob has Press and hold the and but- transmitted a signal. You may look and/or tons for at least 2 seconds once more. listen to verify that the vehicle has per- The hazard indicator lights will flash once formed the intended operation. The num- and the horn will sound once to confirm ber of blinks identifies each registered key that the horn beep feature has been (i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for reactivated. your own identification purposes. Deactivating the horn beep feature does If the light does not blink, your battery may not silence the horn if the alarm is be too weak to communicate to the ve- triggered. hicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected. Symptom Possible Cause Remedy When pushing the ignition switch to The Shift to Park warning appears on The shift lever is not in the P (Park) po- Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- stop the engine the display and the inside warning sition with the parking brake fully ap- sition. chime sounds continuously. plied. When pushing the button on The outside chime sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with the Intelligent Key or the door handle mately a few seconds. you. request switch (if so equipped) to lock A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely. the door When opening the driver's door to get The Door/liftgate Open warning ap- The ignition switch is in the ON posi- Place the ignition switch in the OFF out of the vehicle pears on the display and the inside tion. position. warning chime sounds continuously. When closing the doors after getting The No Key Detected warning appears The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF out of the vehicle on the display, the outside chime position. position. sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds. The Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) The Rear Door Alert is activated. Check the back seat for all articles, warning message appears on the dis- press the OK button to clear the Rear play, the horn sounds three times Door Alert warning message. twice, or a Check Back Seat For All Ar- ticles (if so equipped) warning appears in the display. The Shift to Park warning appears on The ignition switch is in the ACC posi- Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- the display and the outside chime tion and the shift lever is not in the P sition and place the ignition switch in sounds continuously. (Park) position. the OFF position.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Symptom Possible Cause Remedy When closing the door with the inside The outside chime sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with lock knob turned to LOCK mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. you. When pushing the ignition switch to The Key Battery Low warning appears The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. start the engine on the display. For additional information, see “Battery replacement” (P. 8-22). The No Key Detected warning appears The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds. The I-Key System Error: See Owner’s It warns of a malfunction with the Intel- It is recommended that you visit a Manual warning appears in the vehicle ligent Key system. NISSAN dealer. information display (if so equipped).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

Laws in some local communities may re- REMOTE ENGINE START strict or prohibit the use of Remote Engine OPERATING RANGE Start, or the amount of time a parked vehicle engine may idle. For example, some WARNING laws require a person using Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in view or may • To help avoid risk of injury or death restrict idling time except in freezing tem- through unintended operation of the peratures. Check local regulations for any vehicle and/or its systems, including requirements. entrapment in windows or inadver- Other conditions may affect the function of tent door lock activation, do not the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi- leave children, people who require tional information, see “Conditions the Re- the assistance of others or pets unat- mote Engine Start will not work” (P. 3-20). tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- LPD2995 Other conditions can affect the perfor- hicle on a warm day can quickly be- mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. come high enough to cause a signifi- The button will be on the NISSAN For additional information, see “NISSAN In- cant risk of injury or death to people Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote telligent Key® system (if so equipped)” and pets. Engine Start. This feature allows the engine (P. 3-7). to start from outside the vehicle. • Do not use Remote Engine Start in closed spaces such as a garage. Do Vehicles with an automatic climate control not breathe exhaust gases; they con- system (if so equipped) will default to either tain colorless and odorless carbon heating or cooling mode. For additional in- monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan- formation, see “Remote Engine Start with gerous. It can cause unconscious- Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped)” ness or death. (P. 4-41).

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments CAUTION The following events will occur when the • The second 10 minutes will start immedi- engine starts: ately when the Remote Engine Start When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- • The parking lights will turn on and remain function is performed again. For example, charged or other strong radio wave on as long as the engine is running. if the engine has been running for 5 min- sources are present near the operating • The doors will be locked and the climate utes, and 10 minutes are added, the en- location, the Intelligent Key operating control system may come on. gine will run for a total of 15 minutes. range becomes narrower, and the Intel- • The engine will continue to run for 10 min- • Extending engine run time will bring you ligent Key may not function properly. utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time to the two Remote Engine Start limit. The Remote Engine Start function can only for an additional 10 minutes. For addi- A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, be used when the Intelligent Key is within tional information, see “Extending engine or a single start with an extension, are al- the specified operating range from the run time” (P. 3-19). lowed between ignition cycles. vehicle. Press and hold the brake pedal while The ignition switch must be cycled to the The Remote Engine Start operating range switching the ignition to the ON position ON position and then back to the OFF po- is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the before driving. For additional information, sition before the Remote Engine Start pro- vehicle. see “Driving the vehicle” (P. 5-17). cedure can be used again. REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE To use the Remote Engine Start feature The Remote Engine Start feature can be START perform the following: extended one time by performing the To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle” 1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle. one of the following: (P. 3-19). Run time will be calculated as • Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and 2. Press the button to lock all doors. follows: press until the parking lights turn off. 3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the • The first 10–minute run time will start • Turn on the hazard indicator flashers. when the Remote Engine Start function is button until the turn signal lights • Cycle the ignition switch on and then off. flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the performed. • The extended engine run time has vehicle is not within view press and hold expired. the button for at least 2 seconds. • The first 10–minute timer has expired. • The engine hood has been opened.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 • The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). • The doors are not closed and locked. • The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into • The liftgate is open. the vehicle. • The Key System Error warning message • The ignition switch is pushed without an appears in the vehicle information dis- Intelligent Key in the vehicle. play (if so equipped). • The ignition switch is pushed with an In- • The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into telligent Key in the vehicle but the brake the vehicle. pedal is not depressed. • Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE have already been used. START WILL NOT WORK • The vehicle is not in P (Park). The Remote Engine Start will not operate if • There is a detected registered key already any of the following conditions are present: inside of the vehicle. • The ignition switch is placed in the ON • The Remote Engine Start feature has position. been switched to the OFF position using • The hood is not securely closed. the “Vehicle Settings” menu on the vehicle • The hazard indicator lights are on. information display (if so equipped). For • The engine is still running. The engine additional information, see “Vehicle infor- must be completely stopped. Wait at mation display (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23). least 6 seconds if the engine goes from The Remote Engine Start may display a running to off. This is not applicable when warning or indicator in the vehicle informa- extending engine run time. tion display (if so equipped). For additional • The button is not pressed and held information, see “Vehicle information dis- for at least 2 seconds. play (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23). • The button is not pressed and held within 5 seconds of pressing the lock button. • The brake is pressed.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments HOOD

WARNING • Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. • If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD2494 1. Pull the hood lock release handle OA lo- 5. When closing the hood, return the sup- cated below the driver side instrument port rod to its original position, lower the panel. The hood will spring up slightly. hood slowly and drop the hood from the height of 8 to 12 in (20 to 30 cm). This 2. Push the lever B at the front of the O allows proper engagement of the hood hood to the side as illustrated with your latch. fingertips and raise the hood OC . 3. Remove the support rod and insert it into the slot OD . 4. When closing the hood, reset the support rod to its original position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 LIFTGATE

WARNING CAUTION • Always be sure the liftgate has been • Before opening the liftgate, be sure closed securely to prevent it from to clear away snow, ice or dust that opening while driving. may be stuck to the liftgate. If the • Do not drive with the liftgate open. liftgate is opened while materials are This could allow dangerous exhaust still stuck to it, it may suddenly close gases to be drawn into the vehicle. again due to the weight of these For additional information, see “Ex- materials. haust gas (carbon monoxide)” • Always be sure to fully open the lift- (P. 5-4). gate. If it is not fully opened, it may • Do not leave children or adults who suddenly shut. would normally require the assis- • Be especially careful when opening tance of others alone in your vehicle. the liftgate in strong wind. The door Pets should also not be left alone. could be caught by a gust of wind LPD2475 They could accidently injure them- and may close suddenly. • The liftgate gas stays OA are installed in selves or others through inadvertent order to support the weight of the lift- operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, gate. In order to prevent the gas stays sunny days, temperatures in a closed being damaged or not operating prop- vehicle could quickly become high erly, be sure to observe the following enough to cause severe or possibly points. fatal injuries to people or animals. • Do not insert hands or cords into the gas • Always be sure that hands and feet stays OA or apply any force to them are clear of the door frame to avoid laterally. injury while closing the liftgate. • Do not attach any adhesive foreign materials such as pieces of plastic or stickers to the rod OB portion.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments • Do not close the liftgate while holding the CLOSING THE LIFTGATE gas stays or hang anything on them. Do- WARNING ing so may lead to hands or arms becoming trapped in the liftgate and could • Do not shut the liftgate with one result in an injury. hand and the other hand remaining on the liftgate or vehicle body. Doing so may lead to your hand becoming trapped and could result in an injury. • When closing the liftgate, do not place your hands near the edge of the liftgate. Always be sure to close the liftgate from the outside. • After closing the liftgate, be sure to check that it has been closed se- LPD2476 curely. If the liftgate opens while the OPENING THE LIFTGATE vehicle is being driven this could re- To open the liftgate use the following op- sult in a serious accident. erations: To close the liftgate, pull down until it se- • Push the liftgate opener switch and pull curely locks. up on the liftgate. • Push the button on the Intelligent Key. Then push the liftgate opener switch and pull up on the liftgate. • With the Intelligent Key in range, push the liftgate request switch (if so equipped) and pull up on the liftgate.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23 LPD2604 LPD2478 LPD2479 SECONDARY LIFTGATE UNLOCK 1. Move the cover OA by using a screw- 2. Then move the inside lever OB by using a driver or a similar tool available on hand. screwdriver or similar tool available on Follow the following steps to unlock the hand. The liftgate will open. liftgate when the battery is discharged. NOTE: It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for inspection. Unlocking the liftgate:

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments FUEL-FILLER DOOR

FUEL-FILLER CAP • Do not fill a portable fuel container in WARNING the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable • Gasoline is extremely flammable and liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or highly explosive under certain condi- trailer. To reduce the risk of serious tions. You could be burned or seri- injury or death when filling portable ously injured if it is misused or mis- fuel containers: handled. Always stop the engine and – Always place the container on the do not smoke or allow open flames or ground when filling. sparks near the vehicle when refueling. – Do not use electronic devices when filling. • Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle – Keep the pump nozzle in contact shuts off automatically. Continued with the container while you are LPD2022 refueling may cause fuel overflow, filling it. OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR resulting in fuel spray and possibly a – Use only approved portable fuel fire. containers for flammable liquid. The fuel-filler door release is located below • Use only an original equipment type the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel- CAUTION a built-in safety valve needed for filler door securely. proper operation of the fuel system • Do not use a fuel containing more and emission control system. An in- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For correct cap can result in a serious additional information, see “Fuel rec- malfunction and possible injury. It ommendation” (P. 10-4). could also cause the Malfunction In- dicator Light (MIL) to come on. • Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25 STEERING WHEEL

• The Loose Fuel Cap warning mes- WARNING sage will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take • Do not adjust the steering wheel a few driving trips for the message to while driving. You could lose control be displayed. Failure to tighten the of your vehicle and cause an fuel-filler cap properly after the accident. Loose Fuel Cap warning message ap- • Do not adjust the steering wheel any pears may cause the Malfunc- closer to you than is necessary for tion Indicator Light (MIL) to proper steering operation and com- illuminate. fort. The driver's air bag inflates with • Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap great force. If you are unrestrained, properly may cause the Mal- leaning forward, sitting sideways or function Indicator Light (MIL) to illu- out of position in any way, you are at minate. If the light illuminates greater risk of injury or death in a because the fuel-filler cap is loose or LCE2260 crash. You may also receive serious missing, tighten or install the cap and To remove the fuel-filler cap: or fatal injuries from the air bag if you continue to drive the vehicle. The are up against it when it inflates. Al- 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise light should turn off after a few ways sit back against the seatback to remove. driving trips. If the light does not and as far away as practical from the turn off after a few driving trips, have 2. Loop the tether strap around the hook steering wheel. Always use the seat the vehicle inspected. It is recom- O1 while refueling. belts. mended that you visit a NISSAN To install the fuel-filler cap: dealer for this service. • For additional information, see “Mal- 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the function Indicator Light (MIL)” fuel-filler tube. (P. 2-19). 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a • If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, single click is heard. flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments SUN VISORS

3. Slide the sun visor extension O3 in or out as needed.

CAUTION • Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position. • Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

LPD2448 TILT AND TELESCOPIC OPERATION Push the lock lever O1 down: • Adjust the steering wheel up or down in direction O2 to the desired position. • Adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in direction O3 to the desired position. WPD0435 1. To block glare from the front, swing Pull the lock lever O1 up firmly to lock the steering wheel in place. down the sun visor O1 . 2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side O2 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27 MIRRORS

LPD2820 LPD2471 WPD0126 VANITY MIRRORS CARD HOLDER (driver's side only) MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun To access the card holder, pull the sun visor MIRROR (if so equipped) visor down and flip open the mirror cover. down and slide card in the card holder OA . Use the night position O1 to reduce glare Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and Do not view information while operating from the headlights of vehicles behind you turn on when the mirror cover is open. the vehicle. at night. Use the day position O2 when driving in daylight hours.

WARNING Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments NOTE: Do not hang any objects over the sensors O1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation. With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the button as described: • To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the button. The indicator light will turn off. • To turn on the anti-glare feature, press the button again. The indicator light WPD0446 will turn on. LPD2452 AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE OUTSIDE MIRRORS REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) To operate the outside mirror remote con- The inside mirror is designed so that it au- trol move the small switch O1 to select the tomatically dims during night time condi- right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the tions and according to the intensity of the desired position using the large switch O2 . headlights of the vehicle following you. The Move the small switch to the center (neu- automatic anti-glare feature is activated tral) position to prevent accidentally mov- when the ignition switch is in the ON ing the mirror. position. The indicator light O2 will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29 WARNING • Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. • Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

LPD0259 Foldable outside mirrors Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. Heated mirrors (if so equipped) Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, see “Rear window and/or outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” (P. 2-42).

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31 4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual How to park with predicted course (if so equipped) ...... 4-2 lines ...... 4-22 Control panel buttons ...... 4-3 How to switch the display ...... 4-23 How to use the touch-screen ...... 4-3 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-24 How to use the MENU button ...... 4-5 Intelligent Around View Monitor system (brightness control) button ...... 4-7 limitations ...... 4-24 How to use the VOL (volume) knob / System maintenance ...... 4-26 PUSH (power)button...... 4-7 Moving Object Detection (MOD) Selecting menu from launch bar ...... 4-7 (if so equipped) ...... 4-27 RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...... 4-8 MOD system operation ...... 4-28 RearView Monitor system operation ...... 4-9 Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) .....4-29 How to read the displayed lines ...... 4-9 MOD system limitations ...... 4-30 Difference between predicted and System maintenance ...... 4-31 actual distances ...... 4-10 Vents ...... 4-31 How to park with predicted course Heater and air conditioner (manual) lines ...... 4-12 (if so equipped) ...... 4-32 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-13 Controls ...... 4-33 How to turn on and off predicted Heater operation ...... 4-34 course lines ...... 4-13 Air conditioner operation ...... 4-35 RearView Monitor system limitations ...... 4-13 Air flow charts ...... 4-36 System maintenance ...... 4-15 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so equipped) ...... 4-40 (if so equipped) ...... 4-16 Automatic operation ...... 4-41 Intelligent Around View Monitor system Manual operation ...... 4-41 operation ...... 4-17 Operating tips ...... 4-42 Difference between predicted and Servicing air conditioner...... 4-43 actual distances ...... 4-20 Audio system ...... 4-43 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ...... 4-67 Radio ...... 4-43 Regulatory information ...... 4-69 FM radio reception ...... 4-44 Using the system ...... 4-69 AM radio reception ...... 4-44 Indicators ...... 4-71 Audio operation precautions ...... 4-44 Control buttons ...... 4-71 FM/AM radio ...... 4-48 Connecting procedure ...... 4-72 USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection Voice commands ...... 4-73 port...... 4-53 Phone display screen ...... 4-75 iPod®* player operation ...... 4-56 Making a call ...... 4-76 Bluetooth® streaming audio ...... 4-59 Receiving a call ...... 4-76 Steering wheel switch for audio control .....4-62 During a call ...... 4-76 USB/iPod® charging ports ...... 4-63 Ending a call ...... 4-77 Antenna...... 4-63 Text messaging (if so equipped) ...... 4-77 Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) ...... 4-64 Bluetooth® connections screen ...... 4-81 Requirements ...... 4-64 Phone and text message settings ...... 4-82 Operating Siri® Eyes Free ...... 4-64 iPod®/iPhone® ...... 4-84 Troubleshooting guide ...... 4-66 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-67 NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S MANUAL (if so equipped)

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s WARNING Manual that includes the following information. • Positioning of the heating or air con- • Audio system ditioning controls and display con- • Apple CarPlay® trols should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be • Android Auto TM given to the driving operation. • Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system • Do not disassemble or modify this • Viewing information system. If you do, it may result in ac- • Other settings cidents, fire, or electrical shock. • Voice Recognition (if so equipped) • Do not use this system if you notice • General system information any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. • In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS

* For additional information, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” (P. 4-67) regarding the Bluetooth® Hands- Free Phone System control button. When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: “Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen. HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION • The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If LHA4703 the glass screen breaks, do not touch 1. MENU button 5. TUNE•SCROLL knob / PUSH SOUND it. Doing so could result in an injury. button • To clean the display, never use a 2. Display screen rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner 6. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) 3. DISP button or any kind of solvent or paper towel button with a chemical cleaning agent. They 4. BACK button 7. (brightness control) button will scratch or deteriorate the panel. 8. button* Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3 • Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction. To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving. The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

WARNING • ALWAYS give your full attention to driving. LHA5318 • Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you Touch-screen operation could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Menu Item Result Selecting the item Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “ ”keyto return to the previous screen. Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “−” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time. Inputting characters Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters. 123 Touch to manually enter numbers. OK Completes the character input.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Touch-screen maintenance If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen.

LHA5319 LHA5318 HOW TO USE THE MENU BUTTON To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle: 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Touch the “Settings” key. 3. Touch the desired item.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 Menu item Result Settings Touch to change the following settings. Connections Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional information, see “USB connections screen” (P. 4-54) and “Bluetooth® connections screen” (P. 4-81). Phone For additional information, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” (P. 4-67). Sound For additional information, see “Audio system” (P. 4-43). Volume & Beeps For additional information, see “Volume & beeps” (P. 4-84). Clock Touch this key to adjust clock settings. On-screen Clock Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen. Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12–hour or 24–hour format. Daylight Savings Time Touch to adjust the daylight savings time to on or off. Set Clock Manually Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes. System Voice For additional information, see “Settings” (P. 4-75). Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings. Others Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear. Display Touch this key to toggle the display off or to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, see “Adjusting the screen” (P. 4-13). Language Touch this key to change the language on the display. OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information. Return All Settings To Default Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems (brightness control) BUTTON The following menu items are available on To change the display brightness, press the the Launch Bar: button. Pressing the button again will •AM change the display to the day or the night •FM display. • USB/iPod Press and hold the button for more • Bluetooth than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press •AUX and hold the button again to turn the dis- • Settings play on. HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume) KNOB / PUSH (power) BUTTON Press the PUSH (power) button to turn LHA4707 audio function on and off. Turn the VOL SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH (volume) knob to adjust audio volume. BAR Various system functions can be accessed by touching the items on the Launch Bar O1 which is displayed on most of the main menu screens (the Launch Bar does not appear on some screens such as keyboard screens, camera screens, etc.) Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to display the corresponding menu screens.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7 REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

LHA5390

1. CAMERA button WARNING • RearView Monitor is a convenience 2. DISP button feature and is not a substitute for • Failure to follow the warnings and in- proper backing. Always turn and look structions for proper use of the Rear- out the windows and check mirrors View Monitor system could result in to be sure that it is safe to move be- serious injury or death. fore operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems • The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle. • The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

LHA4109 LHA4805 CAUTION To display the rear view, the RearView Moni- HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED Do not scratch the camera lens when tor system uses a camera located just LINES above the vehicle’s license plate O1 . cleaning dirt or snow from the front of Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle the camera. REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM width and distances to objects with refer- The RearView Monitor system automati- OPERATION ence to the vehicle body line OA are dis- cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when played on the monitor. With the ignition switch in the ON position, the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- Distance guide lines position. The radio can still be heard while sition to operate the RearView Monitor. the RearView Monitor is active. Indicate distances from the vehicle body. • Red line O1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) • Yellow line O2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) • Green line O3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 Vehicle width guide lines O4 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED Indicate the vehicle width when backing AND ACTUAL DISTANCES up. The displayed guidelines and their loca- Predicted course lines O5 tions on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill Indicate the predicted course when back- surfaces or projecting objects will be actu- ing up. The predicted course lines will be ally located at distances different from displayed on the monitor when the shift those displayed in the monitor relative to lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When steering wheel is turned. The predicted in doubt, turn around and view the objects course lines will move depending on how as you are backing up, or park and exit the much the steering wheel is turned and will vehicle to view the positioning of objects not be displayed while the steering wheel is behind the vehicle. in the straight-ahead position. The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

LHA5050 Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor. 4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA5051 LHA4995 LHA5052 Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting Backing up behind a projecting When backing up the vehicle down a hill, object object the distance guide lines and the vehicle The predicted course lines OA do not touch The position OC is shown farther than the width guide lines are shown farther than the object in the display. However, the ve- position OB in the display. However, the po- the actual distance. Note that any object hicle may hit the object if it projects over sition OC is actually at the same distance as on the hill is closer than it appears on the the actual backing up course. the position OA . The vehicle may hit the monitor. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 object when backing up to the position OA if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING • If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. • On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line. • If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: – Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is LHA5043 LHA4770 running. 1. Visually check that the parking space is 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the – Drive the vehicle on a straight road safe before parking your vehicle. steering wheel so that the predicted for more than 5 minutes. course lines B enter the parking space 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed O • When the steering wheel is turned OC . on the screen OA when the shift lever is with the ignition switch in the ACC moved to the R (Reverse) position. position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel PREDICTED COURSE LINES to the parking space OC while referring to the predicted course lines. To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position: 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P 1. Press the CAMERA button. (Park) position and apply the parking 2. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” key brake. to turn the feature ON or OFF. To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the R (Reverse) position, press the CAMERA button. REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LHA3522 LIMITATIONS

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN WARNING 1. While on the main menu screen, touch the “Settings” key. Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to oper- 2. Touch the “Camera” key. ate the vehicle in accordance with 3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, these system limitations could result in “Color”, or “Black Level” key. serious injury or death. • The system cannot completely elimi- 4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” nate blind spots and may not show key on the touch-screen display. every object. NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 • Underneath the bumper and the cor- • When washing the vehicle with high • There may be a delay when switching ner areas of the bumper cannot be pressure water, be sure not to spray it between views. viewed on the RearView Monitor be- around the camera. Otherwise, water • If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the cause of its monitoring range limita- may enter the camera unit causing camera, the RearView Monitor may not tion. The system will not show small water condensation on the lens, a display objects clearly. Clean the camera. objects below the bumper, and may malfunction, fire or an electric shock. • Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe not show objects close to the bum- • Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- off any wax with a clean cloth dampened per or on the ground. sion instrument. Otherwise, it may with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then • Objects viewed in the RearView malfunction or cause damage result- wipe with a dry cloth. Monitor differ from actual distance ing in a fire or an electric shock. because a wide-angle lens is used. The following are operating limitations and • Objects in the RearView Monitor will do not represent a system malfunction: appear visually opposite compared • When the temperature is extremely high to when viewed in the rearview and or low, the screen may not clearly display outside mirrors. objects. • Use the displayed lines as a refer- • When strong light directly shines on the ence. The lines are highly affected by camera, objects may not be displayed the number of occupants, fuel level, clearly. vehicle position, road conditions and road grade. • Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected • Make sure that the liftgate is securely light from the bumper. closed when backing up. • The screen may flicker under fluorescent • Do not put anything on the rearview light. camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate. • The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects. • Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera O1 , the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

LHA4109 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION • Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. • Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

LHA5391 1. CAMERA button

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems WARNING The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in • Failure to follow the warnings and in- situations such as slot parking or parallel structions for the proper use of the parking. Intelligent Around View Monitor sys- The monitor displays various views of the tem could result in serious injury or position of the vehicle in a split screen for- death. mat. Not all views are available at all times. • The Intelligent Around View Monitor Available views: is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle opera- • Front View tion because it has areas where ob- An approximately 150–degree view of the jects cannot be viewed. The four cor- front of the vehicle. ners of the vehicle in particular, are • Rear View areas where objects do not always An approximately 150–degree view of the appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear rear of the vehicle. LHA4113 views. Always check your surround- • Bird's-Eye View To display the multiple views, the Intelligent ings to be sure that it is safe to move The surrounding views of the vehicle Around View Monitor system uses cam- before operating the vehicle. Always from above. eras located in the front grille, on the vehi- operate the vehicle slowly. • Front-Side View cle’s outside mirrors and one just above • The driver is always responsible for The view around and ahead of the front the vehicle’s license plate O1 . safety during parking and other passenger's side wheel. maneuvers. INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION CAUTION With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- Do not scratch the camera lens when sition or press the CAMERA button to oper- cleaning dirt or snow from the front of ate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. the camera.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 The screen displayed on the Intelligent • When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob- Around View Monitor will automatically re- jects viewed in the monitor are fur- turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after ther than they appear. When driving the CAMERA button has been pressed with the vehicle down a hill, objects the shift lever in a position other than R viewed in the monitor are closer than (Reverse) position. they appear. • Objects in the rear view will appear Available views visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside WARNING mirrors. • The distance guide lines and the ve- • Use the mirrors or actually look to hicle width lines should be used as a properly judge distances to other reference only when the vehicle is on objects. a paved, level surface. The apparent • On a snow-covered or slippery road, SAA1840 distance viewed on the monitor may there may be a difference between Front view be different than the actual distance the predicted course lines and the between the vehicle and displayed actual course line. Front and rear view objects. • The vehicle width and predicted Guiding lines that indicate the approximate • Use the displayed lines and the course lines are wider than the actual vehicle width and distance to objects with bird’s-eye view as a reference. The width and course. reference to the vehicle body line OA are lines and the bird’s-eye view are • The displayed lines will appear displayed on the monitor. greatly affected by the number of oc- slightly off to the right, because the Distance guide lines: cupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle po- rearview camera is not installed in sition, road condition and road the rear center of the vehicle. Indicate distances from the vehicle body: grade. • Red line O1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) • If the tires are replaced with different • Yellow line 2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) sized tires, the predicted course lines O and the bird's-eye view may be dis- • Green line O3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m) played incorrectly. • Green line O4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m) (if so equipped) 4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). NOTE: When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight- ahead position, both the right and left predicted course lines O6 are displayed. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

LHA4992 LHA4264 Rear view Bird’s-eye view Vehicle width guide lines O5 : The bird's-eye view shows the overhead Indicate the approximate vehicle width view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the when backing up. vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space. Predicted course lines O6 : Indicate the predicted course when oper- The vehicle icon O1 shows the position of ating the vehicle. The predicted course the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis- lines will be displayed on the monitor when tance between objects viewed in the the steering wheel is turned. The predicted bird's-eye view may differ somewhat from course lines will move depending on how the actual distance to the vehicle. much the steering wheel is turned and will The areas that the cameras cannot cover not be displayed while the steering wheel is O2 are indicated in black. in the straight-ahead position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 After the ignition switched is placed in the DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED ON position, the non-viewable area O2 is AND ACTUAL DISTANCES highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the birds-eye view is displayed. The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate In addition, the non-viewable corners O3 reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill are displayed in red and blink for the first 3 surfaces or projecting objects will be actu- seconds to remind the driver to be ally located at distances different from cautious. those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When WARNING in doubt, turn around and view the objects • Objects in the bird's-eye view will ap- as you are backing up, or park and exit the pear further than the actual distance. vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle. • Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed LHA2652 at the seam of the views. Front-side view • Objects that are above the camera Guiding lines cannot be displayed. • The view of the bird's-eye view may Guiding lines that indicate the approximate be misaligned when the camera po- width and the front end of the vehicle are sition alters. displayed on the monitor. • A line on the ground may be mis- The front-of-vehicle line O1 shows the front aligned and is not seen as being part of the vehicle. straight at the seam of the views. The The side-of-vehicle line O2 shows the ap- misalignment will increase as the proximate vehicle width including the out- line proceeds away from the vehicle. side mirrors. The extensions O3 of both the front O1 and side O2 lines are shown with a green dotted line.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA5050 LHA5051 LHA4995 Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, object distance guide lines and the vehicle width the distance guide lines and the vehicle The predicted course lines OA do not touch guide lines are shown closer than the ac- width guide lines are shown farther than the object in the display. However, the ve- tual distance. Note that any object on the the actual distance. Note that any object hicle may hit the object if it projects over hill is further than it appears on the on the hill is closer than it appears on the the actual backing up course. monitor. monitor. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 object when backing up to the position OA if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING • If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. • On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line. • If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: – Turn the steering wheel from lock LHA5052 to lock while the engine is LHA5043 Backing up behind a projecting running. 1. Visually check that the parking space is object – Drive the vehicle on a straight road safe before parking your vehicle. for more than 5 minutes. 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed The position OC is shown farther than the • When the steering wheel is turned position OB in the display. However, the po- on the screen OA when the shift lever is with the ignition switch in the ON po- moved to the R (Reverse) position. sition OC is actually at the same distance as sition, the predicted course lines may the position OA . The vehicle may hit the be displayed incorrectly.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive) the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel position, the available views are: to the parking space OC while referring • Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen to the predicted course lines. • Front view/front-side view split screen 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space The display will switch from the Intelligent completely, move the shift lever to the P Around View Monitor screen when: (Park) position and apply the parking • The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position brake. and the vehicle speed increases above HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). With the ignition switch in the ON position, • A different screen is selected. press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views. If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are: LHA4770 • Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the • Rear view/front-side view split screen steering wheel so that the predicted course lines OB enter the parking space OC .

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

LHA3522 ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. While on the main menu screen, touch the “Settings” key. 2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen and touch the “Camera” key. 3. Touch the “Display Settings” key. LHA4117 4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW “Color”, or “Black Level” key. MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS 5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” key on the touch-screen display.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems WARNING • Do not strike the cameras. They are • Objects on the Intelligent Around View precision instruments. Doing so Monitor may not be clear and the color of Listed below are the system limitations could cause a malfunction or cause the object may differ in a dark for Intelligent Around View Monitor. damage resulting in a fire or an elec- environment. Failure to operate the vehicle in accor- tric shock. • There may be differences in sharpness dance with these system limitations between each camera view of the bird's- could result in serious injury or death. There are some areas where the system eye view. will not show objects and the system does • Do not use the Intelligent Around not warn of moving objects. When in the • Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe View Monitor with the outside mir- front or rear view display, an object below off any wax with a clean cloth that has rors in the stored position, and make the bumper or on the ground may not be been dampened with a diluted mild sure that the liftgate is securely cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry viewed 1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall closed when operating the vehicle O cloth. object near the seam O2 of the camera using the Intelligent Around View viewing areas will not appear in the Monitor. monitor. • The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent The following are operating limitations and Around View Monitor differs from the do not represent a system malfunction: actual distance. • There may be a delay when switching • The cameras are installed on the between views. front grille, the outside mirrors and • When the temperature is extremely high above the rear license plate. Do not or low, the screen may not display objects put anything on the vehicle that cov- clearly. ers the cameras. • When strong light directly shines on the • When washing the vehicle with high camera, objects may not be displayed pressure water, be sure not to spray it clearly. around the cameras. Otherwise, wa- • The screen may flicker under fluorescent ter may enter the camera unit caus- light. ing water condensation on the lens, a • The colors of objects on the Intelligent malfunction, fire or an electric shock. Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 LHA3591 LHA3592 LHA4113 System temporarily unavailable When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE screen, the camera image may be receiv- When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, ing temporary electronic disturbances there are abnormal conditions in the Intel- CAUTION from surrounding devices. This will not hin- ligent Around View Monitor. This will not der normal driving operation but the sys- • Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin- hinder normal driving operation but the tem should be inspected if it occurs fre- ner to clean the camera. This will system should be inspected. It is recom- quently. It is recommended that you visit a cause discoloration. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN dealer for this service. • Do not damage the cameras as the this service. monitor screen may be adversely affected. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras O1 , the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth. 4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)

LHA5391 1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 WARNING MOD SYSTEM OPERATION The MOD system will turn on automatically • Failure to follow the warnings and in- under the following conditions: structions for proper use of the Mov- ing Object Detection (MOD) system • When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) could result in serious injury or death. position. • The MOD system is not a substitute • When the CAMERA button is pressed to for proper vehicle operation and is activate the camera view on the display. not designed to prevent contact with • When vehicle speed decreases below ap- objects surrounding the vehicle. proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and the When maneuvering, always use the camera screen is displayed. outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver. • The system is deactivated at speeds LHA4190 above 5 mph (8 km/h) . It is reacti- Front and bird’s-eye views vated at lower speeds. The MOD system operates in the following • The MOD system is not designed to conditions when the camera view is detect surrounding stationary displayed: objects. • When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is The MOD system can inform the driver of stopped, the MOD system detects mov- moving objects near the vehicle when ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The backing out of garages, maneuvering in MOD system will not operate if the out- parking lots and in other such instances. side mirrors are moving in or out, in the The MOD system detects moving objects stowed position, or if either front door is by using image processing technology on opened. the image shown in the display.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame O1 is displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected. The yellow frame O2 is displayed on each view in the front view and rear view modes. A blue MOD icon O3 is displayed in the view where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative. If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon O3 is not displayed.

LHA5171 LHA4997 TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so Rear and bird’s-eye views Rear and front-side views equipped) • When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) The MOD system does not detect moving Some vehicles include the option to allow position and the vehicle speed is below objects in the front-side view. The MOD the MOD system to be turned on or off in approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in the vehicle information display. system detects moving objects in the this view. To turn the MOD system on or off: front view. When the MOD system detects moving ob- 1. Using buttons on the steering • When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard wheel to select “Settings”. position and the vehicle speed is below when in front or rear view and a yellow approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD frame will be displayed on the view where 2. Select “Driver Assistance” and press the system detects moving objects in the the objects are detected. While the MOD OK button. rear view. The MOD system will not oper- system continues to detect moving ob- ate if the liftgate is open. jects, the yellow frame continues to be 3. Select “Parking Aids”. displayed. 4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” using the OK button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – When camera orientation is not in NOTE: The blue MOD icon will change to or- WARNING its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded. ange if one of the following has oc- Listed below are the system limitations – When there is dirt, water drops or curred for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle snow on the camera lens. • When the system is malfunctioning. in accordance with these system limi- – When the position of the moving • When the component temperature tations could result in serious injury or objects in the display is not reaches a high level (icon will blink). death. changed. • When the RearView camera has detected • Do not use the MOD system when • The MOD system might detect flow- a blockage (icon will blink). towing a trailer. The system may not ing water droplets on the camera function properly. If the icon light continues to illuminate lens, white smoke from the muffler, orange, have the MOD system checked. It • Excessive noise (for example, audio moving shadows, etc. is recommended that you visit a NISSAN system volume or open vehicle win- • The MOD system may not function dealer for this service. dow) will interfere with the chime properly depending on the speed, di- sound, and it may not be heard. rection, distance or shape of the • The MOD system performance will be moving objects. limited according to environmental • If your vehicle sustains damage to conditions and surrounding objects the parts where the camera is in- such as: stalled, leaving it misaligned or bent, – When there is low contrast be- the sensing zone may be altered and tween background and the mov- the MOD system may not detect ob- ing objects. jects properly. – When there is a blinking source of • When the temperature is extremely light. high or low, the screen may not dis- – When strong light such as another play objects clearly. This is not a vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is malfunction. present.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems VENTS

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras O1 , the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA4113 LHA4123 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Side vents Adjust air flow direction of side vents by CAUTION opening, closing, or rotating. Adjust air flow direction of center vent by • Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin- moving the vent slides. ner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. • Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped)

• Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. • Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the win- LHA4124 dows to fog up. Center vents NOTE: WARNING • Odors from inside and outside the ve- • The air conditioner cooling function hicle can build up in the air conditioner operates only when the engine is unit. Odor can enter the passenger running. compartment through the vents. • When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Fan speed control dial The fan speed control dial turns the fan on and off and controls fan speed. Air flow control dial The air flow control dial allows you to select the air flow outlets. — Air flows from center and side vents. — Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from the foot outlets. — Air flows from defroster outlets and the foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to LHA4202 adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the CONTROLS 5. Temperature control dial left. To increase the temperature, turn the 6. Fresh air intake button dial to the right. 1. Air flow control dial 7. Rear window and outside mirror (if 2. A/C (air conditioner) button so quipped) defroster switch 3. Fan speed control dial 4. Air recirculation button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 Fresh air intake HEATER OPERATION 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Press the fresh air intake button to Heating draw outside air into the passenger This mode is used to direct heated air to compartment. Defrosting or defogging the foot outlets. Some air also flows from This mode directs the air to the defrost Air recirculation the defrost outlets. outlets to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Press the button for normal heat- Press the air recirculation button to 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the ing. The indicator light on the but- recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. position. ton will go off. The air recirculation cannot be activated 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to when the air conditioner is in the front 2. Turn the airflow control dial to the the desired position. defrosting mode. position. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to desired position between the middle A/C (air conditioner) button the desired position. and the hot position. Start the engine, turn the fan speed 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the • To quickly remove ice or fog from the win- control dial to the desired position and desired position between the middle dows, turn the fan speed control dial press the button to turn on the air and the hot position. to the right and the temperature control conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, to the full HOT position. press the button again. Ventilation The air conditioner cooling function op- This mode directs outside air to the side Bi-level heating erates only when the engine is running. and center vents. The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the foot Rear window and outside mirror 1. Press the button. The indicator light on the button will go off. outlets. (if so equipped) defroster switch 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the 1. Press the button. The indicator light For additional information, see “Rear win- position. on the button will go off. dow and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” (P. 2-42). 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to 2. Turn the airflow control dial to the the desired position. position.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to Operating tips • For quick cooling when the outside tem- the desired position. perature is high, press the button. Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades The indicator light on the button will 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the and air inlet in front of the windshield. come on. Press the button for nor- desired position. This improves heater operation. mal cooling. The indicator light on the Heating and defogging AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION button will go off. This mode heats the interior and defogs Start the engine, turn the fan speed Dehumidified heating the windshield. control dial to the desired position, and press the button to activate the air This mode is used to heat and dehumidify 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the air. position. cooling and dehumidifying functions are 1. Press the button. The indicator light 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to added to the heater operation. on the button will go off. the desired position. The air conditioner cooling function op- 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the erates only when the engine is running. position. desired position between the middle 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to and the hot position. Cooling the desired position. •Ifinthe mode for more than 1 This mode is used to cool and dehumidify minute, the air conditioning system will the air. 4. Press the button on. continue to operate until the vehicle is 1. Press the button. 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the shut off. This dehumidifies the air which desired position. helps defog the windshield. The 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the mode automatically turns off, allowing position. Dehumidified defogging outside air to be drawn into the passen- 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to This mode is used to defog the windows ger compartment to further improve the the desired position. defogging performance. and dehumidify the air. 4. Press the button. 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the position. desired position. 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 3. Press the button. The indicator • The air conditioning system should be light comes on. operated for approximately ten min- When the , or positions in be- utes at least once a month. This helps tween are selected, the air conditioner au- prevent damage to the system due to tomatically turns on. The air conditioning lack of lubrication. system will continue to operate until the • A visible mist may be seen coming from fan speed control dial is turned to OFF or the ventilators in hot, humid conditions the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flow as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not control dial is turned to a position other indicate a malfunction. than the position. This dehumidifies • If the high temperature warning light the air which helps defog the windshield. illuminates in red indicating en- The mode automatically turns off, al- gine coolant temperature is over the lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas- normal range, turn the air conditioner senger compartment to further improve off. For additional information, see “If the defogging performance. your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-12). 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the AIR FLOW CHARTS desired position. The following charts show the button and Operating tips dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air • Keep the windows closed while the air recirculation button should always be in conditioner is in operation. the OFF position for heating and • After parking in the sun, drive for two or defrosting. three minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4674 LHA4675

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 LHA4676 LHA4677

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4678

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped)

WARNING • The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. • Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. • Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. NOTE: LHA5218 • Odors from inside and outside the ve- 1. Temperature control dial /AUTO button 6. Rear window and outside mirror hicle can build up in the air conditioner 2. Heated seat switches (if so (if so equipped) defroster switch unit. Odor can enter the passenger equipped) 7. MODE (manual air flow control) button compartment through the vents. 3. Display Screen 8. Front defroster button • When parking, set the heater and air 4. Fan speed control dial/A/C (air 9. ON-OFF button conditioner controls to turn off air re- conditioner) button circulation to allow fresh air into the 5. Air recirculation button passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle. 4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems AUTOMATIC OPERATION • The temperature of the passenger com- Remote Engine Start with partment will be maintained automati- Heating (A/C OFF) Intelligent Climate Control (if so cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed equipped) The air conditioner does not activate. When are also controlled automatically. you need to heat only, use this mode. • A visible mist may be seen coming from Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function 1. Press the AUTO button. the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate may go into automatic heating or cooling 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set a malfunction. mode when Remote Engine Start is acti- the desired temperature. vated depending on outside and cabin • The temperature of the passenger com- Dehumidified defrosting or temperatures. During this period, the cli- partment will be maintained automati- defogging mate control display and buttons will be cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed inoperable until the ignition switch is are also controlled automatically. 1. Press the front defroster button on. turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster, • Do not set the temperature lower than 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set heated seats (if so equipped) and heated the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the maximum temperature to aid in steering wheel (if so equipped) may be ac- the system may not work properly. defogging. tivated automatically. • Not recommended if windows fog up. • To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, use the fan speed con- MANUAL OPERATION Cooling and/or dehumidified trol dial to set the fan speed to maximum. heating (AUTO) • As soon as possible after the windshield Fan speed control is clean, press the AUTO button to return This mode may be used all year round as Turn the fan speed control dial to to the automatic mode. the system automatically works to keep a manually control the fan speed. • When the front defroster button is constant temperature. Air flow distribution Press the AUTO button to return to auto- pressed, the air conditioner will automati- and fan speed are also controlled matic control of the fan speed. automatically. cally be turned on. 1. Press the AUTO button on. 2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 Temperature control dial — Air flows mainly from foot outlets. The temperature control dial allows you to — Air flows from defroster and foot adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To outlets. lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the To turn system off dial to the right. To turn off the heater and air conditioner, Air recirculation press the ON-OFF button. Press the ON- OFF button again, the system will turn on in Press the air recirculation button to the mode which was used immediately recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. before the system was turned off. A/C (air conditioner) button Rear window and outside mirror Start the engine, turn the fan speed (if so equipped) defroster switch LHA4125 control dial to the desired position and For additional information, see “Rear win- press the button to turn on the air dow and outside mirror (if so equipped) OPERATING TIPS conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, defroster switch” (P. 2-42). press the button again. The sunload sensor, located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel, as shown, The air conditioner cooling function op- Heated seat switches (if so helps the system maintain a constant erates only when the engine is running. equipped) temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor. Air flow control For additional information, see “Heated seat switches” (P. 2-51). • When the engine coolant temperature Press the MODE button to manually control and outside air temperature are low, the air flow and select the air outlet. Heated steering wheel switch (if air flow from the foot outlets may not so equipped) operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. — Air flows from center and side However, this is not a malfunction. After vents. For additional information, see “Heated the coolant temperature warms up, air — Air flows from center and side steering wheel switch” (P. 2-52). flow from the foot outlets will operate vents and foot outlets. normally.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

• If you feel that the air flow mode you have The air conditioner system in your NISSAN RADIO selected and the outlets the air is coming vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de- When the ignition is placed in the ACC or out do not match, select the mode. signed with the environment in mind. ON position, press the PUSH (power) • When you change the air flow mode, you This refrigerant does not harm the button to turn the radio on. If you listen to may feel air flow from the foot outlets for earth's ozone layer. the radio with the engine not running, the just a moment. This is not a malfunction. Special charging equipment and lubricant ignition should be placed in the ACC is required when servicing your NISSAN air position. conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or Radio reception is affected by station sig- lubricants will cause severe damage to nal strength, distance from radio transmit- your air conditioner system. For additional ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other information, see “Air conditioner system re- external influences. Intermittent changes frigerant and oil recommendations” in reception quality normally are caused by (P. 10-8). these external influences. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- dealer to service your “environmentally hicle may influence radio reception friendly” air conditioner system. quality.

WARNING Radio reception The air conditioner system contains re- Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with frigerant under high pressure. To avoid state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en- personal injury, any air conditioner ser- hance radio reception. These circuits are vice should be done only by an experi- designed to extend reception range, and to enced technician with proper enhance the quality of that reception. equipment. However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 area and do not indicate any malfunction Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away for several seconds during ionospheric tur- in your NISSAN radio system. from a station transmitter, the signals will bulence even in areas where no obstacles Reception conditions will constantly tend to fade and/or drift. exist. change because of vehicle movement. Static and flutter: During signal interfer- Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter- ence from buildings, large hills or due to power lines, electric signs and even traffic ference from other vehicles can work antenna position (usually in conjunction lights. against ideal reception. Described below with increased distance from the station are some of the factors that can affect your transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS radio reception. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble MP3 or WMA terms Some cellular phones or other devices may control to reduce treble response. cause interference or a buzzing noise to Multipath reception: Because of the reflec- • MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures come from the audio system speakers. tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the Storing the device in a different location reflected signals reach the receiver at the most well-known compressed digital au- may reduce or eliminate the noise. same time. The signals may cancel each dio file format. This format allows for near other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the FM RADIO RECEPTION of sound. size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can re- Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – AM RADIO RECEPTION duce the file size by approximately a 10:1 30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in channel) FM having slightly more range AM signals, because of their low frequency, quality. MP3 compression removes the than stereo FM. External influences may can bend around objects and skip along redundant and irrelevant parts of a sometimes interfere with FM station re- the ground. In addition, the signals can be sound signal that the human ear doesn’t ception even if the FM station is within 25 bounced off the ionosphere and bent back hear. mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is to earth. Because of these characteristics, directly related to the distance between AM signals are also subject to interference the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol- as they travel from transmitter to receiver. low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing the same characteristics as light. For ex- through freeway underpasses or in areas ample, they will reflect off objects. with many tall buildings. It can also occur

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems • WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a * Windows® and Windows Media® are reg- • Do not leave the USB cable in a place compressed audio format created by Mi- istered trademarks and trademarks in the where it can be pulled unintention- crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA United States of America and other coun- ally. Pulling the cable may damage codec offers greater file compression tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA. the port. than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same USB (Universal Serial Bus) The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de- amount of space when compared to connection port vice. USB devices should be purchased MP3s at the same level of quality. separately as necessary. • Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of WARNING This system cannot be used to format USB bits per second used by a digital music devices. To format a USB device, use a per- file. The size and quality of a compressed Do not connect, disconnect or operate sonal computer. digital audio file is determined by the bit the USB device while driving. Doing so In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the rate used when encoding the file. can be a distraction. If distracted you front seats plays only sound without im- • Sampling frequency — Sampling fre- could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. ages for regulatory reasons, even when the quency is the rate at which the samples vehicle is parked. of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second. This system supports various USB CAUTION memory devices, USB hard drives and • Multisession — Multisession is one of the iPod® players. Some USB devices may not methods for writing data to media. Writ- • Do not force the USB device into the be supported by this system. ing data once to the media is called a USB port. Inserting the USB device single session, and writing more than tilted or up-side-down into the port • Partitioned USB devices may not play once is called a multisession. may damage the port. Make sure correctly. • ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the that the USB device is connected cor- • Some characters used in other lan- part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that rectly into the USB port. guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not contains information about the digital • Do not grab the USB port cover (if so appear properly in the display. Using Eng- music file such as song title, artist, encod- equipped) when pulling the USB de- lish language characters with a USB de- ing bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 vice out of the port. This could dam- vice is recommended. tag information is displayed on the Artist/ age the port and the cover. song title line on the display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45 General notes for USB use • If an iPod® automatically selects large • An incorrect song title may appear when • For additional information, refer to your video files while in the shuffle mode, the the Play Mode is changed while using the device manufacturer's owner informa- vehicle center display may momentarily iPod® nano (2nd Generation). tion regarding the proper use and care of black out, but will soon recover. • Audiobooks may not play in the same the device. order as they appear on the iPod®. iPod®* player Notes for iPod® use • The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re- • Some characters used in other lan- main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not connected during a seek operation. In tered in the U.S. and other countries. displayed properly on the vehicle center this case, please manually reset the • Improperly plugging in the iPod® may screen. We recommend using English or iPod®. cause a checkmark to be displayed on Spanish language characters with an • If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation and off (flickering). Always make sure that iPod®. with Dock connector), do not use very the iPod® is connected properly. • Large video podcast files cause slow re- long names for the song title, album • An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may responses in the iPod®. The vehicle center name or artist name to prevent the iPod® main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is display may momentarily black out, but it from resetting itself. connected during a seek operation. In will soon recover. • Be careful not to do the following, or the this case, please manually reset the • If the iPod® automatically selects large cable could be damaged and a loss of iPod®. video podcast files while in the shuffle function may occur: • An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con- mode, the vehicle center display may – Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40 tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is dis- momentarily black out, but it will soon mm) radius maximum). connected during a seek operation. recover. – Twist the cable excessively (more than • An incorrect song title may appear when • Improperly plugging in the iPod® may 180 degrees). the Play Mode is changed while using an cause a checkmark to be displayed on – Pull or drop the cable. iPod® nano (2nd Generation). and off (flickering). Always make sure that – Do not force the iPod® cable connector • Audiobooks may not play in the same the iPod® is connected properly. into the device port. order as they appear on an iPod®. • The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con- – Close the center console lid on the cable or connectors. • Large video files cause slow responses in tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is dis- – Store objects with sharp edges in the an iPod®. The vehicle center display may connected during a seek operation. storage where the cable is stored. momentarily black out, but will soon recover. 4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems – Spill liquids on the cable and *iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- • While an audio device is connected connectors. tered in the U.S. and other countries. through the Bluetooth® wireless connec- • Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if tion, the battery power of the device may the cable and/or connectors are wet. It Bluetooth® streaming audio discharge quicker than usual. may damage the iPod®. • Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not • This system supports the Bluetooth® Au- • If the cable and connectors are exposed be recognized by the in-vehicle audio dio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP). to water, allow the cable and/or connec- system. tors to dry completely before connecting • It is necessary to set up the wireless con- BLUETOOTH® is a the cable to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it nection between a compatible trademark owned by to dry). Bluetooth® audio device and the in- Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and vehicle Bluetooth® module before using • If the connector is exposed to fluids other licensed to than water, evaporative residue may the Bluetooth® audio. cause a short between the connector • Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® Panasonic. pins. In this case, replace the cable, other- audio will vary depending on the devices. wise damage to the iPod® and a loss of Make sure how to operate your audio de- function may occur. vice before using it with this system. • If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, • The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped connectors cracked, contamination such under the following conditions: as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connec- – Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® tors), do not use the cable. It is recom- Hands-Free Phone System. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to – Checking the connection to the replace the cable with a new one. hands-free phone. • When not in use for extended periods of • Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device time, store the cable in a clean, dust free in an area surrounded by metal or far environment at room temperature and away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® without direct sun exposure. module to prevent tone quality degrada- • Do not use the cable for any other pur- tion and wireless connection disruption. poses other than its intended use in the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47 7. VOL (volume) knob/PUSH (power) button 8. AUDIO button Audio main operation VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) button Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the PUSH (power) button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off. To turn the system off, press the PUSH (power) button. Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume. This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driv- LHA4704 ing speed changes. 3. SEEK button FM/AM RADIO MENU button For additional information, see “Audio op- 4. TRACK button Press the MENU button to show the eration precautions” (P. 4-44). 5. BACK button Menu screen. Touch the “Settings” key on 1. MENU button the display, then touch the “Sound” key. 6. PUSH SOUND button / TUNE• SCROLL 2. Display screen knob

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Sound Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level. Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level. Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers. Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Speed Sensitive Volume Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed. Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching ”-”/”+”, “L”/”R”, or “R”/”F” keys. BACK button Press the BACK button to return to the previous menu screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49 AUDIO button Press to display the audio screen. When 5. Preset list this button is pressed while the audio To listen to a preset station, touch the screen is not displayed, the last audio corresponding station from the preset source played will play. list. If displayed, touch the “ <”or“>”keys to scroll the preset list. AM radio operation Press the MENU button and touch the “AM” key or press the AUDIO button and select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar to bring up the AM display screen. If another audio source is playing when the “AM” key is pressed, the audio source play- LHA4708 ing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. AM/FM radio screen AM Menu 1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key Touch to display the radio menu screen. Touch the “AM Menu” key to display the AM Menu screen options: 2. “Direct Tune” (if so equipped) • SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the “AM Touch to manually enter a station. Menu” key on the radio screen and then 3. Audio source indicator touch the “SCAN” key. The stations will be Indicates the currently selected audio turned from low to high frequencies and source. stop at each broadcasting station for several seconds. Touching the “SCAN” key 4. Reception information display again during this period of several sec- Reception information currently avail- onds will stop tuning and the radio will able such as frequency, station name, remain tuned to that station. etc. is displayed.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems • Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to up- FM radio operation • Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to update the station list displayed on the right date the station list displayed on the right Press the MENU button and touch the side of the AM Menu screen. side of the FM Menu screen. “FM” key or press the AUDIO button and (SEEK/TRACK) buttons select FM on the bottom of the Launch Bar • RDS Info: Radio station and song informa- to bring up the FM display screen. tion can be displayed on the FM display Press the or buttons to tune screen. from low to high or high to low frequencies If another audio source is playing when the and to stop at the next broadcasting “FM” key is pressed, the audio source play- (SEEK/TRACK) buttons station. ing will automatically be turned off and the Press the or buttons to tune Direct Tune last radio station played will begin playing. from low to high or high to low frequencies The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown and to stop at the next broadcasting Touch the “Direct Tune” key to display the station. Direct Tune menu and manually enter a on the screen during FM stereo reception. station. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, 1 to 12 station memory operations the radio automatically changes from ste- Up to 12 stations can be registered in the 1 to 6 station memory operations reo to monaural reception. preset list. Up to six stations can be registered in the FM Menu preset list. 1. Select the FM radio band. Touch the “FM Menu” key to display the FM 1. Select the AM radio band. Menu screen options: 2. Tune to the station you wish to store. 2. Tune to the station you wish to store. • SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the “FM 3. Touch and hold one of the preset num- Menu” key on the radio screen and then bers in the preset list. 3. Touch and hold one of the preset num- touch the “SCAN” key. The stations will be bers in the preset list. The information such as frequency will be tuned from low to high frequencies and displayed on the preset list. The information such as frequency will be stop at each broadcasting stations for displayed on the preset list. several seconds. Touching the “SCAN” key To select and listen to the preset stations, press or on the steering wheel To select and listen to the preset stations, again during this period of several seconds will stop tuning and the radio will briefly or touch a preferred station on the press or on the steering wheel preset list on the radio screen. briefly or touch a preferred station on the remain tuned to that station. preset list on the radio screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51 Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation Additional features Connecting auxiliary devices For additional information, see “iPod® Connect an AUX device into the AUX input player operation” (P. 4-56) regarding the jack located on the center console below iPod® player available with this system. the heater and air conditioner controls. For additional information, see “USB (Uni- The AUX input jack accepts any standard versal Serial Bus) connection port” (P. 4-53) analog audio input such as from a portable regarding the USB connection port avail- cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or able with this system. phone. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in streaming audio” (P. 4-59) about the the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono Bluetooth® audio interface available with plug is used, the audio output may not this system. function normally. LHA4709 Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of Activation and playing AUX screen Labeling Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX • Audio source indicator Additional Obligation of Labeling cable to the AUX device and the AUX input Indicates that the AUX source is currently jack. Select AUX mode from the audio playing. This product is protected by certain intel- lectual property rights of Microsoft source menu screen or by pressing the • “Volume Setting” keys Corporation and third parties. Use or distri- Source button on the steering wheel. Touch one of the keys to select the sound bution of such technology outside of this output gain from Low, Medium and High. product is prohibited without a license • AUX from Launch Bar from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft Touch to change from another source to subsidiary and third parties. AUX.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CAUTION When a compatible storage device is plugged into the connection port, compat- • To avoid damage and loss of function ible audio files on the storage device can be when using a USB device, note the played through the vehicle's audio system. following precautions. • Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. • Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could dam- LHA4701 age the port and the cover. USB (Universal Serial Bus) • Do not leave the USB cable in a place CONNECTION PORT where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage Connecting a device to the USB the port. connection port For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information re- WARNING garding the proper use and care of the device. Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so The USB port is located on the center con- can be a distraction. If distracted you sole beneath the heater and air condi- could lose control of your vehicle and tioner controls. Insert the USB device into cause an accident or serious injury. the connection port.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53 5. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track. USB operation keys Touch to control USB playback functions.

Keys Description Each time “ ”keyis touched, the repeat mode changes. Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch again to select the LHA4711 LHA4710 previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current USB connections screen USB screen track. Press the MENU button and touch the 1. “USB Menu” key Touch to play the track. “Connections” key or touch the “Settings” Touch to switch to the USB Menu screen. Touch to pause the track. key and touch the “Connections” key to 2. Track information Touch to select the next change USB settings. track. Touch and hold to Track information such as the song fast-forward the track. • Auto Change Source name, artist name and album name are Each time “ ”keyis Touch “ON” or “OFF” to change the audio displayed. source settings for USB memory devices touched, the random mode changes. or an iPod® connected through a USB 3. Audio source indicator cable. Indicates the currently selected audio source. 4. USB operation keys Touch to control USB playback functions

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems USB memory device player Fast-forwarding/rewinding USB menu operation To rewind or fast-forward the track, press Touch the “USB Menu” key on the USB and hold the or buttons on the Activation and playing screen to display the USB Menu screen. control panel or touch and hold the “ ” Connecting the USB memory device into or “ ” keys on the screen. “Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB the port will start playing the USB memory. Changing play mode screen. “Folder List” key Touch to display the folder list. USB memory device can also be played by Repeat mode touching the “USB” key on the Menu screen Touch an item on the list to or by touching USB on the Launch Bar. Touch the “ ” key on the USB screen to select the folder. The sub- change the repeat mode. folder or track list will be displayed. Select a sub-folder or To pause playing the USB memory device The following modes are available: touch the “ ” key. To resume playing, track from the list. touch the “ ”key. All: Repeat all “Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the USB Skipping tracks 1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder screen. To skip the tracks, press the or 1 Track: Repeat track buttons on the control panel or touch the “ Random mode ”or“ ” keys on the screen repeat- edly until the preferred track is selected. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to change the random mode as follows: NOTE: No text displayed: Random off Depending on the condition, skipping to All: Repeat all the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice. 1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder Pressing the button or touching the key once may only restart the current track from the beginning.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55 CAUTION battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the • Do not force the USB device into the ON position. USB port. Inserting the USB device While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® tilted or up-side-down into the port can only be operated by the vehicle audio may damage the port. Make sure controls. that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, • Do not grab the USB port cover (if so remove the USB end of the cable from the equipped) when pulling the USB de- USB connection port on the vehicle, then vice out of the port. This could dam- remove the cable from the iPod®. age the port and the cover. * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- • Do not leave the USB cable in a place tered in the U.S. and other countries. where it can be pulled unintention- LHA4701 ally. Pulling the cable may damage Compatibility iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION the port. The following models are compatible: Connecting iPod® For additional information, refer to your de- • iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware vice manufacturer’s owner information re- version 1.3.0 or later) WARNING garding the proper use and care of the • iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware device. version 2.0.1 or later) Do not connect, disconnect, or operate To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that • iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware the USB device while driving. Doing so the iPod® can be controlled with the audio version 2.0.4 or later) can be a distraction. If distracted you system controls and display screen, use • iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware could lose control of your vehicle and the USB connection port located on the version 4.2.1 or later)* cause an accident or serious injury. center console below the heater and air • iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®- version 5.1 or later) specific end of the cable to the iPod® and • iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware the USB end of the cable to the USB conversion 5.1 or later) nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its 4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems • iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware 4. Album artwork version 1.3.1 or later) An image of the album artwork is dis- • iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware played when available if the setting is version 1.1.3 or later) turned on. • iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware 5. iPod® operation keys version 1.1.3 or later) Touch to control iPod® playback • iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware functions version 1.0.4 or later) 6. Play time and progress bar • iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware The play time of the track is displayed. version 1.0.2 or later) The bar indicates the progress in playing • iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware a track. version 1.1 or later) iPod® operation keys • iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later) Touch to control iPod® playback functions. • iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later) LHA4724 • iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later) iPod screen Keys Description • iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later) 1. “iPod Menu” key Each time “ ” key is touched, the repeat mode changes. * Some features of this iPod® may not be Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen. fully functional. Touch to return to the beginning of the 2. Track information current track. Touch again to select the Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up- Track information such as the song previous track. Touch and hold to re- dated to the version indicated above. name, artist name and album name are wind the current track. displayed. Touch to play the track. 3. Audio source indicator Touch to pause the track. Indicates the currently selected audio Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track. source. Each time “ ” key is touched, the random mode changes.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57 iPod® memory device player Changing play mode “Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB operation Repeat mode screen. Touch the “ ” key on the iPod® screen “Folder List” key (if Touch to display the folder list. Activation and playing so equipped) Touch an item on the list to Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB to change the repeat mode. The following select the folder. The sub- cable will activate the iPod® mode. modes are available. folder or track list will be dis- No text displayed: Repeat off played. Select a sub-folder or The iPod® can also be played by touching track from the list. the “iPod” key on the Menu screen or by All: Repeat all “Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the album touching iPod on the Launch Bar. key artwork display on the USB One: Repeat track screen. Skipping tracks Random mode “Playlists” key Touch to display the list ac- To skip the tracks, press the or cording to the selected item. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to “Artists” key buttons on the control panel or touch the “ change the random mode as follows. “Albums” key ”or“ ” keys on the screen repeat- edly until the preferred track is selected. “ ” is not highlighted: Random off “Songs” key “Podcasts” key “ ” highlighted: Random on NOTE: “Genres” key Depending on the condition, skipping to iPod® Menu “Composers” key the previous track may require pressing “Audiobooks” key Touch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod® the button or touching the key twice. “iTunes Radio” Pressing the button or touching the key screen to display the iPod® Menu screen. key once may only restart the current track from the beginning. Fast-forwarding/rewinding To rewind or fast-forward the track, press and hold the or buttons on the control panel or touch and hold the “ ” or “ ” keys on the screen,

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio Hands-Free Phone System: device that is capable of playing audio files, Manual Connecting Procedure the device can be connected to the vehi- 1. Press the MENU button on the con- cle's audio system so that the audio files on trol panel. the device play through the vehicle's speakers. For additional information, see 2. Touch the “Connections” key on the “FM/AM radio” (P. 4-48). screen. NOTE: 3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add New” key to connect a phone. For additional information regarding Bluetooth® Streaming Audio, refer to the 4. When a compatible phone is found a cellular phone owner’s manual. message with a PIN appears on the screen. LHA4726 5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the Connecting procedure connection. NOTE: 6. To access the Bluetooth® settings menu The connecting procedure must be per- touch the “ ” key on the Connections formed when the vehicle is stationary. If screen. The following options are the vehicle starts moving during the pro- available: cedure, the procedure will be canceled. Menu Item Result Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device. ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off. Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off. PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59 Automatic Connecting Procedure 4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys If no phone is connected to the system, Touch to control Bluetooth® audio play- press and hold the button on the back functions steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. 5. Play time and progress bar After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the The play time of the track is displayed. system will announce “transferring to the The bar indicates the progress in playing add phone settings menu”. The system will a track. start the pairing procedure. When a compatible phone is found, a message with a Bluetooth® operation keys PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Touch to control Bluetooth® playback Bluetooth® phone to complete the con- functions. nection process. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connections screen” Keys Description (P. 4-81). Each time “ ”keyis LHA4727 touched, the repeat mode Bluetooth® screen changes. Touch to return to the begin- 1. “BT Menu” key ning of the current track. Depending on the Bluetooth® version Touch again to select the supported by the connected device, ei- previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current ther the “BT Menu” key or “Connections” track. key is displayed. Touch to play the track. 2. Track information Touch to pause the track. Track information such as the song Touch to select the next name, artist name and album name are track. Touch and hold to displayed. fast-forward the track. Each time “ ”keyis 3. Audio source indicator touched, the random mode Indicates the currently selected audio changes. source.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Bluetooth® audio operation Fast-forwarding/rewinding The following items are available. The ability to pause, change tracks, fast To fast-forward or rewind the track, press and hold the or buttons on the “Now Playing” key Touch to display the forward, rewind, randomize and repeat Bluetooth® audio screen. control panel or touch the “ ”or“ ” music may be different between devices. “Current List” key (if so A list of track in the cur- Some or all of these functions may not be keys on the screen. equipped)* rently selected folder is supported on each device. Changing play mode displayed. Repeat mode “Connections” key Touch to display the con- NOTE: nections screen. Depending on the Bluetooth® audio de- Touch the “ ” key on the screen to “Folder List” key* Touch to display the vice that is connected, it may not be pos- change the repeat mode. folder list. Touch an item sible to perform audio operations or a on the list to select the Random mode folder. delay may occur before music is played back. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to *: displayed only when available. change the random mode. Activation and playing NOTE: NOTE: A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by Depending on the connected device, the touching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menu Available repeat/random modes change “BT Menu” key may not be displayed. screen or by touching Bluetooth on the depending on the connected device. Launch Bar. To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio, BT Menu touch the “ ” key. Touch the “ ”key Touch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth® to resume playing. audio screen to display the Bluetooth® au- Changing folders dio menu screen. To change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61 * These modes are only available when USB compatible media storage is inserted into • Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to the device or connected to the system. increase or decrease the track number. • Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to Volume control switch reverse or fast forward the track being Push the volume control switch to increase played. or decrease the volume. SEEK/TRACK buttons

AM and FM • Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station LHA4227 and show a list of the preset stations. STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR • Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to AUDIO CONTROL seek up or down to the next station. iPod® 1. SEEK/TRACK buttons • Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to 2. SOURCE switch increase or decrease the track number. 3. Volume control switch • Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the track being SOURCE switch played. Push the SOURCE switch to change the Bluetooth® Streaming Audio mode in the following sequence: • Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the next song. AM → FM→ USB/iPod®*→ Bluetooth® Au- dio* → AUX* → AM.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CAUTION • Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise. • When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

LHA4725 LHA5423 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) USB/iPod® CHARGING PORTS ANTENNA There are USB/iPod® charging ports lo- The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin cated on top of the center console or on antenna and an antenna pattern is printed the back of the center console. These ports inside the rear window. will charge compatible devices. NOTE: The USB/iPod® charging ports will not operate with the display screen. Only the USB connection port located on the instrument panel, below the temperature controls, will operate USB/iPod® devices through the audio system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63 SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant REQUIREMENTS can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes Siri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S or Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S mode to reduce user distraction. In this are not supported by the Siri® Eyes Free mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac- system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for tion by voice control. After connecting a details about device compatibility. compatible Apple device by using Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please from the button on the steering check phone settings. wheel. If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered accessible from the lock screen. Please in the U.S. and other countries. check phone settings. • Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as For best results, always update your device displaying pictures or opening apps, may to the latest software version. not be available while driving. LHA4733 • For getting best results, always update OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE your device to the latest software version. 1. Press button for less than 1.5 • Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as seconds. possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vi- 2. Speak your command and then listen to bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the Siri® Eyes Free reply. the system from recognizing the voice After starting Siri Eyes Free, press the commands correctly. button again within 5 seconds of the end of • For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend Free, please refer to the Apple website. the session.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Example 1 – Playing music Example2–Replying to text messages 1. Press button for less than 1.5 1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected seconds. and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone® settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis- 2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”. play a notification for new incoming text 3. Your vehicle will automatically change to messages. Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* when 2. After reading the message, press or the music starts playing. Mode selection press and hold the button to reply is determined by the phone. using Siri Eyes Free. * If the iPhone® is also connected with the USB cable. 3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or a similar command to reply using Siri If the audio track does not start playing Eyes Free. automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try changing the track or audio source to resume playback. NOTE: For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the iPhone®.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Cannot access Siri Eyes Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system. Freefromswitchonthe Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting. steering wheel Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone. For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party Audio Source does not music apps may vary. change automatically to For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade perfor- iPod® or Bluetooth® Au- mance. dio mode Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel. Play, pause, next track, For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party previous track or play music apps may vary and is controlled by the device. timer does not work Cannot hear any music/ audio being played back Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode. from a connected iPhone® Cannot receive text mes- Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”. sage notifications on the Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”. vehicle audio system Cannot reply to text mes- After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Press the button for 1.5 seconds on the steering wheel for sage notifications by Siri Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”. Eyes Free

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

When installing a CB, ham radio or car CAUTION WARNING phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the • Keep the antenna as far away as pos- • Use a phone after stopping your ve- new equipment may adversely affect the sible from the electronic control hicle in a safe location. If you have to engine control system and other electronic modules. use a phone while driving, exercise parts. • Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in extreme caution at all times so full (20 cm) away from the electronic attention may be given to vehicle WARNING control system harnesses. Do not operation. • A cellular phone should not be used route the antenna wire next to any • If you are unable to devote full atten- for any purpose while driving so full harness. tion to vehicle operation while talk- attention may be given to vehicle op- • Adjust the antenna standing-wave ing on the phone, pull off the road to eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit ratio as recommended by the a safe location and stop your vehicle. the use of cellular phones while manufacturer. driving. • Connect the ground wire from the CB CAUTION • If you must make a call while your radio chassis to the body. vehicle is in motion, the hands free • For additional information, it is rec- To avoid discharging the vehicle bat- cellular phone operational mode (if ommended that you visit a NISSAN tery, use a phone after starting the so equipped) is highly recom- dealer. engine. mended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. • If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talk- ing on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67 the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. NOTE: Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatically to the system, consult the phone's owner's manual for details on device operation. You can connect up to six different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in- vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. • Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in- vehicle phone module before using the LHA5315 hands-free phone system. Your NISSAN is equipped with the make or receive a hands-free telephone • Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. phones may not be recognized or work properly. Please visit you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled Once your cellular phone is connected to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or cellular phone, you can set up the wireless the in-vehicle phone module, no other www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom- connection between your cellular phone phone connecting procedure is required. mended phone list and connecting and the in-vehicle phone module. With Your phone is automatically connected instructions. Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can with the in-vehicle phone module when 4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems • You will not be able to use a hands-free • Some cellular phones or other devices IC Regulatory information phone under the following conditions: may cause interference or a buzzing – Operation is subject to the following two Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser- noise to come from the audio system conditions: (1) this device may not cause vice area. speakers. Storing the device in a different interference, and (2) this device must ac- Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult location may reduce or eliminate the cept any interference, including interfer- to receive a cellular signal; such as in a noise. ence that may cause undesired opera- tunnel, in an underground parking garage, • For additional information, refer to the tion of the device. near a tall building or in a mountainous cellular phone owner's manual regarding – This Class B digital apparatus meets all area. the telephone charges, cellular phone requirements of the Canadian Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it antenna and body, etc. Interference-Causing Equipment from being dialed. REGULATORY INFORMATION Regulations. • When the radio wave condition is not FCC Regulatory information ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may BLUETOOTH® is a be difficult to hear the other person's – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with trademark owned by voice during a call. FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an- • Do not place the cellular phone in an area tenna, modification, or attachments licensed to surrounded by metal or far away from could damage the transmitter and may Panasonic. the in-vehicle phone module to prevent violate FCC regulations. tone quality degradation and wireless USING THE SYSTEM connection disruption. – Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The system allows hands-free operation of • While a cellular phone is connected 1.1) This device may not cause interfer- the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. through the Bluetooth® wireless connec- ence and tion, the battery power of the cellular If the vehicle is in motion, some commands 2.2)this device must accept any interfer- phone may discharge quicker than usual. may not be available so full attention may ence, including interference that may The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- be given to vehicle operation. cause undesired operation of the tem cannot charge cellular phones. device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69 Initialization • For calling contacts by name, please say • You can cancel a command when the both the first and last name of the con- system is waiting for a response by say- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON tact for better recognition. ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an- position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial- nounces “Exit” and ends the Voice Recog- ized, which takes a few seconds. If the nition session. You can also press and button is pressed before the initialization Giving voice commands hold the button on the steering completes, the system will announce To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to end “There is no phone connected” and will not press the button located on the steer- the Voice Recognition session. Whenever react to voice commands. ing wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After the Voice Recognition session is can- the tone sounds, speak a command. celed, a double beep is played to indicate Operating tips The command given is picked up by the you have exited the system. To get the best performance out of the microphone, and voice feedback is given • If you want to adjust the volume of the NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe when the command is accepted. voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume the following: • If a command is not recognized, the sys- control switches on the steering wheel • Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as tem announces, “Please say or select a while being provided with feedback. You possible. Keep all vents pointed away command from the displayed list.” Make can also use the radio volume control from the microphone and close the win- sure the command is said exactly as knob. prompted by the system and repeat the dows to eliminate surrounding noises Voice Prompt Interrupt (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), command in a clear voice. which may prevent the system from rec- • If you want to go back to the previous In most cases you can interrupt the voice ognizing voice commands correctly. command, you can say “Go back” or “Cor- feedback to speak the next command by pressing the button on the steering • Wait until the tone sounds before speak- rection” any time the system is waiting for wheel. After interrupting the system, wait ing a command. Otherwise, the com- a response. for a beep before speaking your command. mand will not be received properly. • Start speaking a command within 5 sec- One Shot Call (if so equipped) onds after the tone sounds. To use the system faster, you may speak • Speak in a natural voice without pausing the second level commands with the main between words. menu command on the main menu. For example, press the button and after the tone say, “Call Redial”.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Indicator Description Indicates there are un- read received messages. Indicates the Bluetooth® device that is currently connected. Indicates the strength of the signal the Bluetooth® device is receiving. Indicates the amount of remaining Bluetooth® device battery. LHA4723 LHA4684 INDICATORS CONTROL BUTTONS When a cellular phone is connected The control buttons for the Bluetooth® through the Bluetooth® wireless connec- Hands-Free Phone System are located on tion, indicators O1 for the phone and text the steering wheel. messaging are displayed on the top of the screen. VOICE COMMAND BUTTON Press and hold the button for less than 1.5 seconds to initiate the Voice Recognition session. To exit the Voice Recognition session press and hold the for less than 1.5 seconds. For additional information, see “Voice prompt interrupt” (P. 4-70).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71 You can use the button to To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® interrupt the system feedback Hands-Free Phone System: and give a command at once. Manual Connecting Procedure If an iPhone® is connected, Siri® 1. Press the MENU button on the con- can be accessed by pressing the trol panel. button for more than two 2. Touch the “Connections” key on the seconds. For additional informa- screen. tion, see “Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)” (P. 4-64). 3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add New” key to connect a phone. PHONE BUTTON 4. When a compatible phone is found a To answer an incoming call or to message with a PIN appears on the end a call press the button. screen. LHA4726 5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the To reject a call press and hold the CONNECTING PROCEDURE button. connection. NOTE: 6. To access the Bluetooth® settings menu The connecting procedure must be per- touch the “ ” key on the Connections formed when the vehicle is stationary. If screen. The following options are the vehicle starts moving during the pro- available: cedure, the procedure will be canceled. Menu Item Result Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device. ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off. Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off. PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: VOICE COMMANDS “Call ” Some cellular phones may require you to Voice commands can be used to operate Speak this command to make a call to a accept certain permissions in order to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. contact that is stored in the phonebook. enable features on your Bluetooth® sys- Press and hold the button for less Say “Call” followed by a phonebook name to tem. During the Bluetooth® pairing pro- than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone initiate a call. If the system does not recog- cess, please check your cellular phone’s command menu. The commands avail- nize the name it will display a list of similar display for a pop-up with the request to able are: names. After the prompt, speak or touch grant phonebook access. • Call an item number from the displayed list to Granting phonebook access permission • Dial place the call. will allow your contacts to be down- • Recent Calls loaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® sys- “Dial ” • Read/Send Text (if so equipped) tem. A pop-up may display on your cellu- Speak this command to make a call with a • Siri® (if so equipped) lar phone stating that the Bluetooth® spoken phone number. After the prompt, system would like to access your con- • Voice Assistant (if so equipped) say “Dial” followed bya7to10digit phone tacts and call history. Please select “Al- • Phonebook number. The system will repeat the num- low” or Yes” to grant this permission. • Quick Dial ber back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or Automatic Connecting Procedure • Redial “Correction” to re-enter the phone number. If no phone is connected to the system, • Select Phone press and hold the button on the • Add Phone steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. • Call Mobile After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the system will announce “transferring to the • Call Home add phone settings menu”. The system will • Call Office start the pairing procedure. When a com- • Call Main patible phone is found, a message with a • Call Other PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to complete the con- • Settings nection process. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connections screen” (P. 4-81). Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73 “Recent Calls” • Missed Calls The following commands are available: Speak this command to list the last 20 The following commands are available un- • missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is der “Recent Calls”: • Main from an entry in the phonebook, the • Incoming Calls name will be displayed. Otherwise, the • Home Speak this command to list the last 20 phone number of the missed call will be • Mobile incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is displayed. • Office from an entry in the phonebook, the When prompted, speak or touch the item • Other name will be displayed. Otherwise, the number on the screen to place the call. phone number of the incoming call will Touch the “Next” key to move through the For additional information on manually se- be displayed. list of missed calls. lecting phonebook entries, see “Making a When prompted, speak or touch the item call” (P. 4-76). number on the screen to place the call. “Read Text/Send Text” (if so Touch the “Next” key to move through the equipped) “Quick dial” list of incoming calls. Speak this command to access the Quick Speak this command to access text mes- • Outgoing Calls dial menu. After the prompt, speak or se- saging functions. For additional informa- Speak this command to list the last 20 lect an item number on the displayed list to tion, see “Text messaging” (P. 4-77). outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call place the call. For additional information, was to an entry in the phonebook, the see “Making a call” (P. 4-76). name will be displayed. Otherwise, the “Phonebook through voice phone number of the outgoing call will be command” “Redial” displayed. Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quick Speak this command to call the last num- When prompted, speak or touch the item steps to access entries stored in the number on the screen to place the call. ber dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” to phonebook. Commands are organized by dial the number of the last outgoing call. Touch the “Next” key to move through the the phone number type selected in the cel- list of outgoing calls. The system will display “Redialing ”. The name of the phonebook en- fer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual. try will be displayed if it is available, otherwise the number being redialed will be displayed.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems “Select Phone” • Best Match List When the system doesn't recognize a Speak this command to access the Con- phonebook name or dial number, it will nections menu. For additional information, provide a list of similar sounding results. see “Bluetooth® connections screen” To turn this off, touch the “ON” key, the (P. 4-81). indicator light will turn off. To turn on, touch the “ON” key again, the indicator “Add Phone” light will turn on. Speak this command to access the Con- nections menu. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connections screen” (P. 4-81). “Settings” Speak this command to access the Sys- LHA4705 tem Voice settings menu. The system will PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of the following options on the screen to The Phone screen can be displayed by change the settings. pressing the button on the control panel. • Beep Only for Opening Prompt By touching the “ON” key, the indicator The following options are displayed: light will illuminate, the system voice will • Quick Dial turn off and only a tone will sound when Displays the Quick Dial screen. For addi- the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- tional information, see “Quick dial” (P.4-74). tem is activated. To turn the system voice • Phonebook back on, touch the “ON” key again, the Displays the Phonebook screen. For addi- indicator light will turn off. tional information, see “Making a call” (P. 4-76).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75 • Call History MAKING A CALL RECEIVING A CALL Displays the Call History screen. For addi- To make a call press the button on the When a call is received by the phone con- tional information, see “Making a call” control panel. Touch an option from menu nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands- (P. 4-76). screen: Free Phone System, the call information is • Dial Number • Phonebook displayed on the control panel display. Displays the Dial Number screen. For ad- Select a person and the phone number Press the button on the steering ditional information, see “Making a call” you wish to call from the phonebook. (P. 4-76). wheel or touch the “ Answer” key on Depending on the device, the phonebook the screen to accept the call. To reject the • Text Message will be downloaded from the cellular call touch the “ Decline” key on the Displays the received message screen. phone automatically when it is con- screen. For additional information, see “Text mes- nected. If the automatic download does saging” (P. 4-77). not take place, the phone number must If the user is not able to answer the call • Connections be transferred to the hands-free phone right away, touch the “Hold Call” key dis- Displays the Connections screen. For ad- system from the cellular phone prior to played on the screen. A message will be ditional information, see “Bluetooth® con- using this method. For additional infor- played for the caller: “I’m not able to take a nections screen” (P. 4-81). mation, see “Phone and text message call right now.” The user may then accept the call when available or reject the call. • Volume settings” (P. 4-82). Displays the volume adjustment screen. • Call History To reject a call, press and hold the For additional information, see “Volume & Select a phonebook name or phone button on the steering wheel. beeps” (P. 4-84). number from the recent incoming, outgoing or missed calls tabs. Touch a DURING A CALL phonebook name or phone number While a call is active the following options listed to initiate the call. will appear on the control panel display: • Dial Number • Mute Enter the phone number manually using Touch this key to mute or unmute the the keypad displayed on the screen. system. Touch the “OK” key on the screen to initi- • Dial Number ate the call. Touch this key to dial digits during the For additional options to make a call, see phone call. “Voice commands” (P. 4-73). 4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems • Use Handset ENDING A CALL NOTE: Touch this key to transfer the call to the To end an active call, press the button handset. To transfer the call back from This feature is automatically disabled if on the steering wheel or touch the “ the connected device does not support the handset to the Bluetooth® Hands- Hang up” key on the screen. Free Phone System, press the but- the Message Access Profile (MAP). For ton on the control panel then select the TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped) additional information, refer to the “Transfer Hands-free” key on the screen. phone’s owner’s manual for details and instructions. • Switch Call WARNING This option will only be available when a NOTE: second call is active. • Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Many phones may require special per- If supported by the phone, the Check local regulations before using mission to enable text messaging. Check Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System this feature. the phone’s screen during Bluetooth® allows for call waiting functionality. If a • Laws in some jurisdictions may re- pairing. For some phones, you may need call is received while another call is al- to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s ready active, a message will be displayed strict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social Bluetooth® menu for text messages to on the screen. Press the button on appear on the headunit. For additional the steering wheel or touch the “ networking and texting. Check local regulations for any requirements. information, refer to your phone’s own- Answer” key on screen to accept the in- er’s manual. Text message integration • Use the text messaging feature after coming call. Touch the “ Decline” key requires that the phone support MAP stopping your vehicle in a safe loca- on the screen to reject the second call. (Message Access Profile) for both receiv- tion. If you have to use the feature While a call is active, press the button ing and sending text messages. Some while driving, exercise extreme cau- on the steering wheel to access additional phones may not support all text mes- tion at all times so full attention may options. Speak one of the following saging features. Please refer to be given to vehicle operation. commands: www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or • If you are unable to devote full atten- • “Send Digits” www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat- tion to vehicle operation while using Speak this command followed by the dig- ibility information, as well as your de- the text messaging feature, pull off its to enter digits during the phone call. vice’s owner’s manual. the road to a safe location and stop • “Switch call” your vehicle. The system allows for the sending and re- Speak this command to hold the second ceiving of text messages through the ve- call and switch back to the original call. hicle interface. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77 The availability of the text message func- • Outgoing Calls button on the steering wheel and tion may vary depending on the cellular • Missed Calls speak the number item list on the screen. phone. • Dial The following options will be available: When the cellular phone connected to the • Play 4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system vehicle receives a text message, a notifica- Speak this command to have the system prompts for which message to send. tion will appear on the control panel dis- say the message. Nine predefined messages are avail- play. To check the message, touch the • Reply able. To choose one of the predefined “Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to save Speak this command to send a text mes- messages, speak one of the following the message to be checked later. sage response to the sender of the text after the tone: message. Access text messaging through the ve- • “Driving, can't text” hicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or • Call • “Call me” through the vehicles control panel. Speak this command to call the sender. • “On my way” • Previous Text messaging using Bluetooth® • “Running late” Speak this command to move to the pre- Hands-Free Phone System (if so • “Okay” vious text message (if available). equipped) • “Yes” •Next • “No” Speak this command to move to the next Sending a text message (if so equipped) text message (if available). • “Where are you?” 1. Press and hold the button on the Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. • “When?” Reading a received text message If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, 2. Say “Send Text” after the tone. it can also be used to create custom mes- 1. Press and hold the button on the 3. The system will provide a list of available sages that are sent through the phone. For steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. commands in order to determine the additional information, see “Siri® Eyes Free recipient of the text message. Choose 2. Say “Read Text” after the tone. (if so equipped)” (P. 4-64). from the following: The display will show a list of 20 messages NOTE: • Phonebook with the sender and delivery time. Touch Text messages are only displayed if the • Quick Dial the “Next” key on the screen to view all mes- vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). • Incoming Calls sages. To view a text message press the

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: message from the message list will show • Reply the details of the received message on the A reply message can be selected from For Apple iPhones®, text messages can display. the predefined list. only be sent through Siri. Available actions: Sending a text message (if so equipped) Text messaging using the control •Prev. This function may not be supported de- panel Touch this key to read the previous pending on the cellular phone. message. Display received message list 1. Press the button on the control •Next panel. 1. Press the button on the control Touch this key to read the next message. panel. • Play/Stop 2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the 2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the Touch the “Play” key to have the hands- screen. screen free phone system read out the received 3. Touch the “Create Message” key on the message. Touch the “Stop” key to stop screen. 3. Touch an item on the list to read or reply reading. to the message. • Call Up to 100 messages can be stored in the If the sender of the message is registered message list. in the phonebook, touch the “Call” key to Received message screen make a call to the sender. Touching the “Read” key on the incoming message notification screen or selecting a

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79 The following items are available: Available item Action To Enter Number by Keypad Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm. Quick Dial Select a recipient from the quick dial list. Phonebook Select a recipient from the phonebook. Call History Select a recipient/phone number from call history. Select Text Touch to display a list of predefined text messages. Send Touch to send the message.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Touch the “Connections” key on the screen Bluetooth tab then select the Bluetooth tab. This tab will display up to six Bluetooth® The paired phone will be added to the list devices. If six devices are already con- on the Bluetooth® connections screen. nected, one of the devices must be deleted Touching the name of another device on before another device can be connected. the list will switch the connected device. “Add New” key “ ” (back) key Touch the “Add New” key on the screen to connect a new Bluetooth® device. For ad- Touch the “ ” key to go back to the ditional information, see “Connecting pro- previous screen. cedure” (P. 4-72). Connecting Bluetooth® “ ” (Bluetooth® settings) key LHA4716 For additional information on connecting a BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth® Touch the “ ” key on the screen to SCREEN Hands-Free Phone System, see “Connect- display a list of options. ing procedure” (P. 4-72). • Bluetooth 1. “ ” (back) key Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth® 2. Bluetooth tab NOTE: connection on or off 3. Connections screen Some cellular phones or other devices • Favorite (Connection first) 4. “Add New” key Touch this key to change which device 5. “ ” (settings) key may cause interference or a buzzing will be connected first when multiple de- 6. “ ” (info) key noise to come from the audio system vices are connected to the vehicle. 7. “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio connection) key speakers. Storing the device in a differ- Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the 8. “ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone ent location may reduce or eliminate the device a favorite connection. System connection) key noise. Access the Connections screen to change Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the settings and view Bluetooth® information. device a favorite connection. To access the Connections screen press the MENU button on the control panel. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81 • Pin “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio Touch this key to customize the PIN code. connection) key Input a four digit number then touch the “OK” key. The new PIN will be set. A list of connected devices will be displayed on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to “ ” (info) key the name to connect a device to Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to Touch the key again to disconnect the de- display the information of the cellular vice. The device will not be removed from phone or to delete the device. the list. For additional information on re- Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paired moving a device, see “ ” (info) key device then select “Yes” when a message (P. 4-82). appears. LHA4721 “ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System connection) key PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE SETTINGS A list of connected devices will be displayed on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System set- the name to connect a device to the tings can be changed according to the us- Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is er’s preference. To access the “Phone” set- listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the tings menu press the MENU button on icon. Touch the key again to disconnect the the control panel. Touch the “Settings” key device. The device will not be removed then touch the “Phone” key. from the list. For additional information on removing a device, see “ ” (info) key (P. 4-82).

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The following options are available: Menu Item Result Quick Dial Edit Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, see “Quick dial” (P. 4-74). Delete All Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial. Phonebook Download Entire Phone- All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle are book downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual. Auto Downloaded Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected. Text Message Text Message Turns the text messaging function on/off. Text Message Ringtone Turn the incoming message sound on/off. Signature Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off. Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off. Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages. Notifications Driver Only When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset. Vehicle Ringtone Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off. Automatic Hold When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83 iPod®/IPHONE®

Volume & beeps Volume Settings “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and The Volume settings screen can be found “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic There are several methods to customize by pressing the button on the control accessory has been designed to connect the volume settings. panel then touching the “Volume” key on specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respec- Volume & Beeps the screen. To adjust the volume of the tively, and has been certified by the devel- The Volume & Beeps screen can be found following options, touch the “-” and “+” keys oper to meet Apple performance stan- by pressing the MENU button on the on the screen. dards. Apple is not responsible for the control panel, touching the “Settings” key The available settings are: operation of this device or its compliance on the screen and selecting “Volume & with safety and regulatory standards. Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the follow- • Ringtone Please note that the use of this accessory ing options, touch the “-” and “+” keys on the Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wire- screen. incoming calls. less performance. • Outgoing Call The available settings are: Adjust the volume level of the outgoing iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod • Ringtone calls. shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other incoming calls. countries. Lightning is a trademark of • Outgoing Call Apple Inc. Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls. • Voice Prompt Vol. Adjust the volume level of the system voice. • Text-to-speech Vol. Adjust the volume of the replay voice for text messaging. • Button Beeps Turns on/off the button beep sounds and alarm for prohibited operations.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-4 Parking brake ...... 5-22 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...... 5-4 Hand type ...... 5-22 Three-way catalyst ...... 5-4 Electronic parking brake (switch type) ...... 5-23 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Automatic brake hold (if so equipped) ...... 5-25 (TPMS)...... 5-5 How to activate/deactivate the On-pavement and off-road driving automatic brake hold function ...... 5-26 precautions ...... 5-9 How to use the automatic brake hold Avoiding collision and rollover ...... 5-9 function ...... 5-27 Off-roadrecovery...... 5-9 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Rapid air pressure loss ...... 5-10 (if so equipped) ...... 5-28 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...... 5-10 LDW system operation ...... 5-29 Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-11 How to enable/disable the LDW system .....5-30 Operating range ...... 5-12 LDW system limitations ...... 5-32 Push-button ignition switch positions ...... 5-12 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-33 Emergency engine shut off ...... 5-13 System malfunction ...... 5-34 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery System maintenance ...... 5-34 discharge ...... 5-13 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped)...... 5-35 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) BSW system operation ...... 5-36 (if so equipped) ...... 5-14 How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-38 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 5-14 BSW system limitations ...... 5-40 Before starting the engine ...... 5-15 BSW driving situations ...... 5-41 Starting the engine ...... 5-15 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-44 Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...... 5-16 System maintenance ...... 5-45 Driving the vehicle ...... 5-17 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . .5-46 Continuously Variable Transmission RCTA system operation ...... 5-47 (CVT) ...... 5-17 How to enable/disable the RCTA RAB system limitations ...... 5-85 system ...... 5-50 System malfunction ...... 5-87 RCTA system limitations...... 5-52 System maintenance ...... 5-87 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-54 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) System maintenance ...... 5-55 (if so equipped) ...... 5-88 Cruise control (if so equipped) ...... 5-56 AEB system operation ...... 5-89 Precautions on cruise control ...... 5-56 Turning the AEB system on/off ...... 5-91 Cruise control operations ...... 5-56 AEB system limitations ...... 5-93 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . .5-58 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-94 How to select the cruise control mode ...... 5-60 System malfunction ...... 5-96 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control System maintenance ...... 5-97 mode ...... 5-60 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) ...... 5-98 mode operation ...... 5-61 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operation ...... 5-99 mode switches ...... 5-63 Turning the AEB with Pedestrian Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Detection system on/off ...... 5-101 mode limitations ...... 5-69 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-73 limitations ...... 5-103 System maintenance ...... 5-75 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-105 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise System malfunction ...... 5-107 control mode ...... 5-76 System maintenance ...... 5-108 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (if so equipped) . . 5-81 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . 5-109 RAB system operation...... 5-82 I-FCW system operation ...... 5-112 Turning the RAB system on/off ...... 5-84 Turning the I-FCW system on/off ...... 5-113 I-FCW system limitations ...... 5-115 Chassis Control (if so equipped) ...... 5-137 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-120 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) ...... 5-137 System malfunction ...... 5-122 Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB)...... 5-138 System maintenance ...... 5-123 Active Ride Control (ARC) ...... 5-138 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) Hill start assist system ...... 5-139 (if so equipped) ...... 5-124 Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) ...... 5-140 Intelligent Driver Alertness system System operation ...... 5-141 operation ...... 5-125 How to enable/disable the sonar How to enable/disable the Intelligent system ...... 5-142 Driver Alertness (I-DA) system ...... 5-126 Sonar limitations ...... 5-143 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-144 system limitations ...... 5-126 System maintenance ...... 5-144 Break-in schedule ...... 5-128 Cold weather driving ...... 5-145 Fuel efficient driving tips ...... 5-128 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-145 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-129 Antifreeze ...... 5-145 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-130 Battery...... 5-145 Power steering ...... 5-131 Draining of coolant water ...... 5-145 Brake system ...... 5-132 Tire equipment ...... 5-145 Brake precautions ...... 5-132 Special winter equipment ...... 5-146 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-132 Driving on snow or ice ...... 5-146 Brake Assist ...... 5-134 Parking brake ...... 5-146 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ...... 5-146 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ...... 5-134 Brake force distribution ...... 5-135 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) • If electrical wiring or other cable con- WARNING nections must pass to a trailer • Do not leave children or adults who through the seal on the trunk lid or would normally require the assis- • Do not breathe exhaust gases; they the body, follow the manufacturer's tance of others alone in your vehicle. contain colorless and odorless car- recommendation to prevent carbon Pets should also not be left alone. bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is monoxide entry into the vehicle. They could accidentally injure them- dangerous. It can cause uncon- • The exhaust system and body should selves or others through inadvertent sciousness or death. be inspected by a qualified mechanic operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, • If you suspect that exhaust fumes whenever: sunny days, temperatures in a closed are entering the vehicle, drive with all a. The vehicle is raised for service. vehicle could quickly become high windows fully open, and have the ve- enough to cause severe or possibly hicle inspected immediately. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes fatal injuries to people or animals. are entering into the passenger • Do not run the engine in closed compartment. • Properly secure all cargo with ropes spaces such as a garage. or straps to help prevent it from slid- c. You notice a change in the sound • Do not park the vehicle with the en- ing or shifting. Do not place cargo of the exhaust system. gine running for any extended length higher than the seatbacks. In a sud- of time. d. You have had an accident involv- den stop or collision, unsecured ing damage to the exhaust sys- cargo could cause personal injury. • Keep the rear vent windows, lift- tem, underbody, or rear of the gates, doors and trunk lids (if so • To avoid raising the center of gravity vehicle. equipped) closed while driving, oth- excessively, do not exceed the rated erwise exhaust gases could be capacity of the roof rack (if so THREE-WAY CATALYST drawn into the passenger compart- equipped) and evenly distribute the The three-way catalyst is an emission con- ment. If you must drive with one of load. trol device installed in the exhaust system. these open, follow these precau- Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst tions: are burned at high temperatures to help 1. Open all the windows. reduce pollutants. 2. Set the air recirculation button to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air.

5-4 Starting and driving WARNING • Avoid driving with an extremely low pressure. Driving on a significantly under- fuel level. Running out of fuel could inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and • The exhaust gas and the exhaust cause the engine to misfire, damag- can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also system are very hot. Keep people, ing the three-way catalyst. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, animals or flammable materials and may affect the vehicle’s handling and • Do not race the engine while warm- away from the exhaust system stopping ability. ing it up. components. • Do not push or tow your vehicle to Please note that the TPMS is not a substi- • Do not stop or park the vehicle over start the engine. tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is flammable materials such as dry the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor- grass, waste paper or rags. They may TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation ignite and cause a fire. SYSTEM (TPMS) has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), CAUTION should be checked monthly when cold and Your vehicle has also been equipped with a inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate • Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits mended by the vehicle manufacturer on when the system is not operating properly. from leaded gasoline will seriously the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- reduce the three-way catalyst's abil- label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different bined with the low tire pressure telltale. ity to help reduce exhaust pollutants. size than the size indicated on the vehicle When the system detects a malfunction, • Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- placard or tire inflation pressure label, you the telltale will flash for approximately one tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or should determine the proper tire inflation minute and then remain continuously illu- electrical systems can cause overrich pressure for those tires.) minated. This sequence will continue upon fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as causing it to overheat. Do not keep As an added safety feature, your vehicle the malfunction exists. When the malfunc- driving if the engine misfires, or if no- has been equipped with a Tire Pressure tion indicator is illuminated, the system ticeable loss of performance or other Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates may not be able to detect or signal low tire unusual operating conditions are de- a low tire pressure telltale when one or pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions tected. Have the vehicle inspected more of your tires is significantly under- may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- promptly. It is recommended that inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire ing the installation of replacement or alter- you visit a NISSAN dealer for this pressure telltale illuminates, you should nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that service. stop and check all your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper Starting and driving 5-5 prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- • The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warning • You can also check the pressure of all erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction appears in the vehicle information dis- tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle telltale after replacing one or more tires or play, or the “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning information display screen (if so wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the appears in the trip computer when the equipped). The order of the tire pressure replacement or alternate tires and wheels low tire pressure warning light is illumi- figures displayed on the screen corre- allow the TPMS to continue to function nated and low tire pressure is detected. sponds with the actual order of the tire properly. The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” or position. Additional information: “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning turns off For additional information, see “Low tire when the low tire pressure warning light pressure warning light” (P. 2-17) and “Tire • When using a wheel without the TPMS turns off. such as a spare tire, the TPMS does not Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-3). monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire. • The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” or “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning does not ap- WARNING • The TPMS will activate only when the ve- pear if the low tire pressure warning light hicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 illuminates to indicate a TPMS • Radio waves could adversely affect km/h). Also, this system may not detect a malfunction. electric medical equipment. Those sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, who use a pacemaker should contact a flat tire while driving). • Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s opera- the electric medical equipment • The low tire pressure warning light does tion and the outside temperature. Do not manufacturer for the possible influ- not automatically turn off when the tire reduce the tire pressure after driving be- ences before use. pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in- cause the tire pressure rises after driving. flated to the recommended pressure, the Low outside temperature can lower the vehicle must be driven at speeds above temperature of the air inside the tire 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS which can cause a lower tire inflation and turn off the low tire pressure warning pressure. This may cause the low tire light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check pressure warning light to illuminate. If the the tire pressure. warning light illuminates, check the tire • The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” or pressure for all four tires. “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning appears each • The Tire and Loading Information label is time the ignition switch is placed in the located in the driver's door opening. ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. 5-6 Starting and driving • If the low tire pressure warning light • When using a wheel without the • Do not place metalized film or any illuminates while driving, avoid sud- TPMS such as the spare tire, when a metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the den steering maneuvers or abrupt spare tire is mounted or a wheel is windows. This may cause poor re- braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull replaced, the TPMS will not function ception of the signals from the tire off the road to a safe location and and the low tire pressure warning pressure sensors, and the TPMS will stop the vehicle as soon as possible. light will flash for approximately 1 not function properly. Driving with under-inflated tires may minute. The light will remain on after Some devices and transmitters may tem- permanently damage the tires and 1 minute. Have your tires replaced porarily interfere with the operation of the increase the likelihood of tire failure. and/or TPMS system reset as soon as TPMS and cause the low tire pressure Serious vehicle damage could occur possible. It is recommended that you warning light to illuminate. and may lead to an accident and visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. could result in serious personal in- • Replacing tires with those not origi- Some examples are: jury. Check the tire pressure for all nally specified by NISSAN could af- • Facilities or electric devices using similar four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to fect the proper operation of the radio frequencies are near the vehicle. the recommended COLD tire pres- TPMS. • If a transmitter set to similar frequencies sure shown on the Tire and Loading • Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol is being used in or near the vehicle. Information label to turn the low tire tire sealant into the tires, as this may pressure warning light off. If you have • If a computer (or similar equipment) or a cause a malfunction of the tire pres- DC/AC converter is being used in or near a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sure sensors. as soon as possible. (For additional the vehicle. information, see “Flat tire” (P. 6-3) for The low tire pressure warning light may changing a flat tire.) CAUTION illuminate in the following cases: • If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and • The TPMS may not function properly tire without TPMS. when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in • If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID snow. has not been registered. • If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN.

Starting and driving 5-7 FCC Notice: TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once. For USA: When adding air to an under-inflated tire, • If the hazard indicator does not flash This device complies with Part 15 of the the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the ve- within approximately 15 seconds after FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- starting to inflate the tire, it indicates lowing two conditions: (1) This device hicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not may not cause harmful interference, and operating. (2) this device must accept any interfer- Vehicle set-up ence received, including interference • The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill 1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place. that may cause undesired operation. Tire Alert under the following conditions: 2. Apply the parking brake and place the – If there is interference from an exter- NOTE: shift lever in the P (Park) position. Changes or modifications not ex- nal device or transmitter. pressly approved by the party re- 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON posi- – The air pressure from the inflation sponsible for compliance could void tion. Do not start the engine. device is not sufficient to inflate the the user's authority to operate the Operation tire. equipment. – There is a malfunction in the TPMS. 1. Add air to the tire. – There is a malfunction in the horn or For Canada: 2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica- hazard indicators. This device contains licence-exempt tors will start flashing. – The identification code of the tire transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply pressure sensor is not registered to with Innovation, Science and Economic 3. When the designated pressure is the system. development Canada’s licence-exempt reached, the horn beeps once and the – The battery of the tire pressure sen- RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol- hazard indicators stop flashing. sor is low. lowing two conditions: (1) This device 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. • If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not oper- may not cause interference, and (2) This • If the tire is over-inflated more than ate due to TPMS interference, move device must accept any interference, in- approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward cluding interference that may cause un- beeps and the hazard indicators flash or forward and try again. desired operation of the device. three times. To correct the pressure, If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a push the core of the valve stem on the tire pressure gauge. tire briefly to release pressure. When 5-8 Starting and driving ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD AVOIDING COLLISION AND Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ROLLOVER collisions and rollovers. Utility vehicles have a significantly In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is higher rollover rate than other types of WARNING significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe They have higher ground clearance than and prudent manner may result in loss OFF-ROAD RECOVERY passenger cars to make them capable of of control or an accident. While driving, the right side or left side performing in a variety of on-pavement Be alert and drive defensively at all times. wheels may unintentionally leave the road and off-road applications. This gives them Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive surface. If this occurs, maintain control of a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve- speed, high speed cornering, or sudden the vehicle by following the procedure be- hicles. An advantage of higher ground steering maneuvers, because these driving low. Please note that this procedure is only clearance is a better view of the road, allow- practices could cause you to lose control of a general guide. The vehicle must be driven ing you to anticipate problems. However, your vehicle. as appropriate based on the conditions of they are not designed for cornering at the the vehicle, road and traffic. same speeds as conventional 2-wheel As with any vehicle, loss of control could drive vehicles any more than low-slung result in a collision with other vehicles or 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. sports cars are designed to perform satis- objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, 2. Do not apply the brakes. factorily under off-road conditions. If at all particularly if the loss of control causes possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. the vehicle to slide sideways. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a As with other vehicles of this type, failure to Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving straight course. operate this vehicle correctly may result in when tired. Never drive when under the in- loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll- fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- 4. When appropriate, slowly release the ac- over crash, an unbelted person is signifi- scription or over-the-counter drugs which celerator pedal to gradually slow the cantly more likely to die than a person may cause drowsiness). Always wear your vehicle. wearing a seat belt. seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the tem” section of this manual, and also in- vehicle to follow the road while vehicle struct your passengers to do so. speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced. Starting and driving 5-9 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn The vehicle must be driven as appropriate 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu- the steering wheel until both tires return based on the conditions of the vehicle, road ally stop the vehicle. to the road surface. When all tires are on and traffic. 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and the road surface, steer the vehicle to contact a roadside emergency service stay in the appropriate driving lane. WARNING to change the tire. For additional infor- • If you decide that it is not safe to return mation, see “Changing a flat tire” (P. 6-4). the vehicle to the road surface based If there is a sudden loss of tire air pres- on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, sure, the vehicle will generally move or DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND pull in the direction of the flat tire. In gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in DRIVING a safe place off the road. this situation, losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS personal injury. WARNING To help avoid loss of control: Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can Never drive under the influence of alco- occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged • Do not rapidly apply the brakes. hol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood- due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air • Do not rapidly release the accelerator stream reduces coordination, delays pressure loss can also be caused by driving pedal. reaction time and impairs judgement. on under-inflated tires. • Do not rapidly turn the steering Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han- wheel. accident injuring yourself and others. dling and stability of the vehicle, especially 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. Additionally, if you are injured in an ac- at highway speeds. 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering cident, alcohol can increase the sever- Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by wheel with both hands and try to hold a ity of the injury. maintaining the correct air pressure and straight course. visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, see 3. When appropriate, slowly release the ac- “Wheels and tires” (P. 8-27). If a tire rapidly celerator pedal to gradually slow the loses air pressure or “blows-out” while driv- vehicle. ing, maintain control of the vehicle by fol- 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe lo- lowing the procedure below. Please note cation off the road and away from traffic that this procedure is only a general guide. if possible.

5-10 Starting and driving PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How- WARNING ever, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thou- Do not operate the push-button igni- sands of people are injured or killed in tion switch while driving the vehicle ex- alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo- cept in an emergency. (The engine will cal laws vary on what is considered to be stop when the ignition switch is pushed legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol three consecutive times in less than 1.5 affects all people differently and most seconds or the ignition switch is people underestimate the effects of pushed and held for more than 2 sec- alcohol. onds.) If the engine stops while the ve- Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! hicle is being driven, this could lead to a That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, crash and serious injury. prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other LSD2645 physical condition. When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illuminate. If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position, push the ignition switch center: • Once to change to ON. • Two times to change to OFF. The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed. If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position. Starting and driving 5-11 Some indicators and warnings for opera- The operating range of the engine start tion are displayed on the vehicle informa- function is inside of the vehicle O1 . tion display (if so equipped). For additional • The luggage area is not included in the information, see “Vehicle information dis- operating range, but the Intelligent Key play” (P. 2-23). may function. • If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function. • If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function. PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH LSD2020 POSITIONS OPERATING RANGE LOCK (Normal parking position) The Intelligent Key functions can only be The ignition switch can only be locked in used when the Intelligent Key is within the this position. specified operating range. The ignition switch will be unlocked when it When the Intelligent Key battery is almost is pushed to the ON position while carrying discharged or strong radio waves are pres- the Intelligent Key. ent near the operating location, the Intelli- gent Key system’s operating range becomes The ignition switch will lock when any door narrower and may not function properly. is opened or closed with the ignition switched off. If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine.

5-12 Starting and driving ON (Normal operating position) OFF This position turns on the ignition system The ignition switch is in the OFF position and electrical accessories. when the engine is turned off using the ON has a battery saver feature that will ignition switch. place the ignition switch in the OFF posi- AUTO ACC: tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the time under the following conditions: Intelligent Key with you, and the ignition • The shift lever is in P (Park). switch placed from the ON to the OFF po- • The hazard lamps are off. sition, the radio can still be used for a period • The turn signals are off. of time, or until the driver’s door is opened. The battery saver feature will be canceled if After a period of time, functions such as any of the following occur: radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® Hands- Free Phone System may be restarted by • The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) SSD0860 position. pressing the “POWER button/VOLUME control knob” or the key fob unlock button. For NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® • The ignition switch changes position. additional information, refer to “Monitor, cli- BATTERY DISCHARGE • The hazard lamps are turned on. mate, audio, phone and voice recognition • The turn signals are turned on. systems” in this manual. If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, CAUTION EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF start the engine according to the following To shut off the engine in an emergency procedure: Do not leave the vehicle with the igni- situation while driving, perform the follow- tion switch in the ON or AUTO ACC posi- ing procedure: 1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) tion when the engine is not running for • Rapidly push the ignition switch three position. an extended period. This can discharge consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec- the battery. 2. Firmly apply the foot brake. onds, or 3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel- • Push and hold the ignition switch for ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will more than 2 seconds. sound.)

Starting and driving 5-13 (After step 3 is performed, when the ig- NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM If this procedure allows the engine to start, nition switch is pushed without de- (NATS) (if so equipped) NISSAN recommends placing the regis- pressing the brake pedal, the ignition tered NATS key separate from other de- switch position will change to ON.) The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) will vices to avoid interference. not allow the engine to start without the 4. Push the ignition switch while depress- use of the registered NATS key. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds SYSTEM after the chime sounds. The engine will If the engine does not start by using the start. registered NATS key, it may be due to inter- The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ference caused by: will not allow the engine to start without NOTE: • Another NATS key. the use of the registered key. • When the ignition switch is pushed to • An automated toll road device. If the engine fails to start using a registered the ON position or the engine is started • An automated payment device. key (for example, when interference is by the above procedure, the Intelligent caused by another registered key, an auto- Key battery discharge indicator ap- • Other devices that transmit similar signals. mated toll road device or automatic pay- pears in the vehicle information dis- ment device on the key ring), restart the play (if so equipped) even when the In- Start the engine using the following proce- engine using the following procedures: telligent Key is inside the vehicle. This dure: is not a malfunction. To turn off the In- 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- 1. Remove any items that may be causing tion for approximately 5 seconds. telligent Key battery discharge indica- the interference away from the NATS key. tor, touch the ignition switch with the 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or Intelligent Key again. 2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- LOCK position, and wait approximately • If the Intelligent Key battery discharge tion for approximately 5 seconds. 10 seconds. indicator appears, replace the battery 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. as soon as possible. For additional in- LOCK position, and wait approximately formation, see “Battery replacement” 10 seconds. 4. Restart the engine while holding the de- (P. 8-22). vice (which may have caused the inter- 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3. ference) separate from the registered 5. Start the engine. key. 6. Repeat the steps above until all possible interferences are eliminated. 5-14 Starting and driving BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN • Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake. recommends placing the registered key on clear. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu- a separate key ring to avoid interference • Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- tral). P (Park) is recommended. from other devices. ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least The shift lever cannot be moved out of whenever you refuel. P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is • Check that all windows and lights are placed in the OFF position. clean. • Visually inspect tires for their appearance The starter is designed not to operate and condition. Also check tires for proper if the shift lever is in any of the driving inflation. positions. • Lock all doors. 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi- • Position seat and adjust headrests/head tion. Depress the brake pedal and push restraints. the ignition switch to start the engine. • Adjust inside and outside mirrors. To start the engine immediately, push • Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers and release the ignition switch while de- to do likewise. pressing the brake pedal with the igni- • Check the operation of warning lights tion switch in any position. when the ignition switch is pushed to the • If the engine is very hard to start in ON position. For additional information, extremely cold weather or when re- see “Warning lights, indicator lights and starting, depress the accelerator audible reminders” (P. 2-10). pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

Starting and driving 5-15 • If the engine is very hard to start be- 4. Warm-up: REMOTE ENGINE START (if so cause it is flooded, depress the accel- Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 equipped) erator pedal all the way to the floor seconds after starting. Do not race the and hold it. Push the ignition switch to Vehicles started with the Remote Engine engine while warming it up. Drive at a Start require the ignition switch to be the ON position to start cranking the moderate speed for a short distance engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop placed in the ON position before the shift first, especially in cold weather. In cold lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi- cranking by pushing the ignition weather, keep the engine running for a switch to LOCK. After cranking the en- tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON minimum of2-3minutes before shut- position, follow these steps: gine, release the accelerator pedal. ting it off. Starting and stopping the en- Crank the engine with your foot off the gine over a short period of time may 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on accelerator pedal by depressing the make the vehicle more difficult to start. you. brake pedal and pushing the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine 5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever 2. Apply the brake. starts, but fails to run, repeat the to the P (Park) position and push the 3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON above procedure. ignition switch to the OFF position. position. NOTE: CAUTION For additional information, see “NISSAN In- Care should be taken to avoid situa- telligent Key® system” (P. 3-7). Do not operate the starter for more tions that can lead to potential bat- than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine tery discharge and potential no-start does not start, push the ignition switch conditions such as: to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds 1. Installation or extended use of elec- before cranking again, otherwise the tronic accessories that consume bat- starter could be damaged. tery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.). 2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. 5-16 Starting and driving DRIVING THE VEHICLE

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CAUTION Starting the vehicle TRANSMISSION (CVT) 1. After starting the engine, fully depress • Except in an emergency, do not shift the foot brake pedal before moving the to the N (Neutral) position while driv- WARNING shift lever out of the P (Park) position. ing. Coasting with the transmission This Continuously Variable Transmis- • Do not depress the accelerator pedal in the N (Neutral) position may cause sion is designed so that the foot brake while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- serious damage to the transmission. pedal must be depressed before shift- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low). • To avoid possible damage to your ve- ing from P (Park) to any driving posi- Always depress the brake pedal until hicle, when stopping the vehicle on tion while the ignition switch is in the shifting is completed. Failure to do so an uphill grade, do not hold the ve- ON position. could cause you to lose control and hicle by depressing the accelerator The shift lever cannot be moved out of have an accident. pedal. The foot brake should be used the P (Park) position and into any of • Cold engine idle speed is high, so use for this purpose. the other positions if the ignition caution when shifting into a forward The CVT in your vehicle is electronically switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF or reverse gear before the engine has position. warmed up. controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation. • Do not downshift abruptly on slip- 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed pery roads. This may cause a loss of The recommended operating procedures and move the shift lever to a driving control. for this transmission are shown on the fol- position. • Never shift to either the P (Park) or R lowing pages. Follow these procedures for 3. Release the parking brake and foot (Reverse) position while the vehicle is maximum vehicle performance and driv- brake pedal, and then gradually start the moving forward and P (Park) or D ing enjoyment. vehicle in motion. (Drive) position while the vehicle is NOTE: reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission. Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.

Starting and driving 5-17 WARNING CAUTION • Do not depress the accelerator pedal • To avoid possible damage to your ve- while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- hicle, when stopping the vehicle on tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low) an uphill grade, do not hold the ve- position. Always depress the brake hicle by depressing the accelerator pedal until shifting is completed. pedal. The foot brake should be used Failure to do so could cause you to for this purpose. lose control and have an accident. • Except in an emergency, do not shift • Cold engine idle speed is high, so use to the N (Neutral) position while driv- caution when shifting into a forward ing. Coasting with the transmission or reverse gear before the engine has in the N (Neutral) position may cause warmed up. serious damage to the transmission. • Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of LSD2643 control. Shifting • Never shift to either the P (Park) or R To move the shift lever: (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D Press the button OA while depress- (Drive) position while the vehicle is ing the brake pedal reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission. Press the button OA to shift

Shift without pressing the button OA

5-18 Starting and driving After starting the engine, fully depress the Apply the parking brake. When parking on a D (Drive) brake pedal and move the shift lever from P hill, apply the parking brake first, then move Use this position for all normal forward (Park) to any of the desired shift positions. the shift lever into the P (Park) position. driving. R (Reverse) WARNING L(Low) CAUTION Use this position for engine braking on Apply the parking brake if the shift le- steep downhill gradients/climbing steep ver is in any position while the engine is To prevent transmission damage, use slopes and whenever approaching sharp not running. Failure to do so could the R (Reverse) position only when the bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in cause the vehicle to move unexpect- vehicle is completely stopped. any other circumstances. edly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage. Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely P (Park) stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be de- CAUTION pressed in to move the shift lever from P (Park) or the shift lever button pressed in To prevent transmission damage, use from N (Neutral) or any drive position to R the P (Park) position only when the ve- (Reverse). hicle is completely stopped. N (Neutral) Use the P (Park) shift lever position when Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- the vehicle is parked or when starting the gaged. The engine can be started in this engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and stopped. restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is The brake pedal should be depressed to moving. move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). The P (Park) position is automatically engaged if you switch off the ignition.

Starting and driving 5-19 To move the shift lever, complete the fol- If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P lowing procedure: (Park), have the transmission checked as 1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK soon as possible. It is recommended that position. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 2. Apply the parking brake. CAUTION 3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a Make sure to take extra care during the small (1/8 inch or 3 mm) flat-head removal of the shift lock cap as this screwdriver, remove the shift lock re- part is easily damaged. lease cover. • If available, a plastic trim tool can also be used. WARNING 4. Insert the rod from the spare tire tool kit If the shift lever cannot be moved from LSD2644 into the shift lock release slot and push the P (Park) position while the engine is Shift lock release in at an angle (about 45°). A small screw- running and the brake pedal is de- driver or small trim tool may also be pressed, the stop lights may not work. If the battery charge is low or discharged, used. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause the shift lever may not be moved from the • For additional information, see an accident injuring yourself and P (Park) position even with the brake pedal “NISSAN Intelligent Key® system” others. depressed and the shift lever button (P. 3-7). pressed. 5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) It will be necessary to jump start or have position while holding down the shift your battery charged. For additional infor- lock release. mation, see “Jump starting” (P. 6-10). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN 6. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi- dealer or a professional towing service. tion. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location.

5-20 Starting and driving tion other than D (Drive), the drive sport High fluid temperature protection mode will be automatically turned off. mode OFF position: This transmission has a high fluid tem- For normal driving and fuel economy, use perature protection mode. If the fluid tem- the OFF position. perature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high tem- ON position: peratures with heavy loads, such as when For driving up or down long slopes where towing a trailer), engine power and, under engine braking is necessary, or for powerful some conditions, vehicle speed will be de- acceleration, use the ON position. The creased automatically to reduce the transmission will automatically select a dif- chance of transmission damage. Vehicle ferent gear ratio, allowing the engine to speed can be controlled with the accelera- provide high output. tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited. LSD2647 Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the drive Drive sport mode switch (if so sport mode in the ON position. This re- Fail-safe equipped) duces fuel economy. If the vehicle is driven under extreme To select the drive sport mode, push the conditions, such as excessive wheel drive sport mode switch with the shift lever Accelerator downshift spinning and subsequent hard braking, in the D (Drive) position. — in D (Drive) position — the fail-safe system may be activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The SPORT mode indicator light illumi- For passing or hill climbing, depress the may come on to indicate the fail-safe nates in the meter or the drive sport mode accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts mode is activated. For additional infor- indicator in the vehicle information display the transmission down into a lower gear, mation, see “Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates next to the Transmission Shift depending on the vehicle speed. (MIL)” (P. 2-19). This will occur even if all Position indicator. To turn off the drive sport electrical circuits are functioning prop- mode, push the drive sport mode switch erly. In this case, place the ignition switch again. The SPORT mode indicator light or in the OFF position and wait for 10 sec- drive sport mode indicator will turn off. onds. Then push the switch back to the When the shift lever is shifted to any posi- ON position. The vehicle should return to Starting and driving 5-21 PARKING BRAKE

its normal operating condition. If it does WARNING not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and • Be sure the parking brake is fully re- repaired, if necessary. It is recommended leased before driving. Failure to do so that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this can cause brake failure and lead to service. an accident. • Do not release the parking brake WARNING from outside the vehicle. When the high fluid temperature pro- • Do not use the shift lever in place of tection mode or fail-safe operation oc- the parking brake. When parking, be curs, vehicle speed may be gradually sure the parking brake is fully reduced. The reduced speed may be engaged. lower than other traffic, which could in- • To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the crease the chance of a collision. Be es- WSD0169 pecially careful when driving. If neces- vehicle and/or its systems, do not sary, pull to the side of the road at a safe leave children, people who require HAND TYPE place and allow the transmission to re- the assistance of others or pets unat- To engage: Pull the lever up OA . turn to normal operation, or have it re- tended in your vehicle. Additionally, paired if necessary. the temperature inside a closed ve- To release: hicle on a warm day can quickly be- 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) and pets. position. 3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, press the button and lower completely OB . 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

5-22 Starting and driving – The shift lever is in the P (Park) position. CAUTION – The driver’s seat belt is unfastened. – The ignition switch is placed in the OFF When parking in an area where the out- position. side temperature is below 32°F (0°C), the parking brake, if applied, may – The parking brake is applied manually. freeze in place and may be difficult to – If a malfunction occurs in the automatic release. brake hold function. For safe parking, it is recommended The electronic parking brake is automati- that you place the shift lever in the P cally released as soon as the vehicle starts (Park) position and securely block the and the accelerator pedal is depressed wheels. with the driver’s seat belt fastened. NOTE: WARNING • To keep the electronic parking brake LSD4106 released after the engine is turned off, • Before leaving the vehicle, move the ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE place the ignition switch in the OFF po- shift lever to the P (Park) position and sition, depress the brake pedal and (switch type) check that the electronic parking push down the parking brake switch The electronic parking brake can be ap- brake warning light is illuminated to before opening the driver’s door. confirm that the electronic parking plied or released automatically or by oper- • If a malfunction occurs in the elec- brake is applied. The electronic park- ating the parking brake switch. tronic parking brake system (for ex- ing brake warning light will remain ample, due to battery discharge), it is on for a period of time after the driv- Automatic operation recommended that you visit a NISSAN er’s door is locked. Under the following conditions, the elec- dealer. tronic parking brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released: – The braking force is applied by the automatic brake hold function for 3 minutes or longer.

Starting and driving 5-23 • Under the following conditions, the Before driving, check that the electronic • If the electronic parking brake must be parking brake will automatically be ap- parking brake indicator light ( or PARK) applied while driving in an emergency, plied and the brake force of the auto- goes out. For additional information, see pull up and hold the parking brake matic brake hold will be released: “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible switch. When you release the parking – The braking force is applied by the reminders” (P. 2-10). brake switch, the parking brake will be automatic brake hold function for 3 released. NOTE: minutes or longer. • While pulling up the electronic parking – The shift lever is in the P (Park) • A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is brake switch during driving, the park- position. driven without releasing the parking ing brake is applied and a chime – The driver’s seat belt is unfastened. brake. For additional information, see sounds. The electronic parking brake – The ignition switch is placed in the “Warning lights, indicator lights and indicator light in the meter and in the OFF position. audible reminders” (P. 2-10). parking brake switch illuminates. This – The parking brake is applied • While the electronic parking brake is does not indicate a malfunction. The manually. applied or released, an operating electronic parking brake indicator light – If a malfunction occurs in the auto- sound is heard from the lower side of in the meter and in the parking brake matic brake hold function. the rear seat. This is normal and does switch turns off when the parking not indicate a malfunction. brake is released. Manual operation • When the electronic parking brake is • When pulling the electronic parking The electronic parking brake will not be au- frequently applied and released in a brake switch up with the ignition tomatically applied if the engine is stopped short period of time, the parking brake switch in the OFF or AUTO ACC position, without using the ignition switch (for ex- may not operate in order to prevent the the parking brake switch indicator ample, by engine stalling). In such a case, parking brake system from overheat- light will continue to illuminate for a you have to apply the parking brake ing. If this occurs, operate the elec- short period of time. manually. tronic parking brake switch again after waiting approximately 1 minute. To apply: Pull the switch up O1 . The indicator light OA will illuminate. To release: With the ignition switch in the ON position, depress the brake pedal and push the switch down O2 . The indicator light OA will turn off. 5-24 Starting and driving AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD (if so equipped)

The automatic brake hold function main- • Be sure to deactivate the automatic • The automatic brake hold function tains the braking force without the driver brake hold function when using a car will not be activated if the slip indica- having to depress the brake pedal when wash or towing your vehicle. tor light, electronic parking brake the vehicle is stopped at a traffic light or • Make sure to place the shift lever in warning light or master warning light intersection. As soon as the driver de- the P (Park) position and apply the illuminate and the chassis control presses the accelerator pedal again, the parking brake when parking your ve- system fault message appears in the automatic brake hold function is deacti- hicle or loading luggage. Failure to do vehicle information display. vated and the braking force is released. The so could cause the vehicle to move or • To maintain the braking force to keep operating status of the automatic brake roll away unexpectedly and result in the vehicle to a standstill, a noise hold is shown by color on the vehicle infor- serious personal injury or property may be heard. This is not a mation display. For additional information, damage. malfunction. see “Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23). • If any of the following conditions oc- WARNING cur, the automatic brake hold function may not function. Have the sys- • The automatic brake hold function is tem checked promptly. It is not designed to hold the vehicle on a recommended that you visit a steep hill or slippery road. Never use NISSAN dealer for this service. Failure the automatic brake hold when the to operate the vehicle in accordance vehicle is stopped on a steep hill or with these conditions could cause slippery road. Failure to do so may the vehicle to move or roll away un- cause the vehicle to move. expectedly and result in serious per- • When the automatic brake hold func- sonal injury or property damage. tion is activated but fails to maintain – A warning message appears in the the vehicle at a standstill, depress the vehicle information display. brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the – The indicator light on the auto- vehicle unexpectedly moves due to matic brake hold switch does not outside conditions, the chime may illuminate when the switch is sound and automatic brake hold pushed. warning may illuminate in the vehicle information display.

Starting and driving 5-25 How to activate the automatic How to deactivate the automatic brake hold function brake hold function 1. With the ignition switch in the ON posi- While the automatic brake hold function is tion, push the automatic brake hold activated, push the automatic brake hold switch O1 . The indicator light on the au- switch to turn off the automatic brake hold tomatic brake hold switch O2 indicator light and deactivate the auto- illuminates. matic brake hold function. To deactivate the automatic brake hold function while 2. When the automatic brake hold function the brake force has been maintained by goes into standby, the automatic brake the automatic brake hold function, depress hold indicator light (white) illuminates. the brake pedal and push the automatic To use the automatic brake hold function, brake hold switch. the following conditions need to be met: LSD4137 • The driver’s seat belt is fastened. WARNING HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE • The electronic parking brake is released. Make sure to firmly depress and hold THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD • The shift lever is not in the P (Park) the brake pedal when turning off the position. automatic brake hold function while FUNCTION • The vehicle is not parked on a steep hill. the brake force is applied. When the au- For additional information on activating tomatic brake hold function is deacti- and deactivating the automatic brake hold NOTE: vated, the brake force will be released. function, refer to the instructions outlined The automatic brake hold function re- This could cause the vehicle to move or in this section. sets to OFF every time the ignition roll away unexpectedly. Failure to pre- switch is switched from the OFF position vent the vehicle from rolling may result to the ON position. in serious personal injury or property damage.

5-26 Starting and driving HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC Parking – The parking brake is applied manually. BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION When the shift lever is in the P (Park) posi- – If a malfunction occurs in the auto- tion with the brake force maintained by the For additional information on using the au- matic brake hold function. tomatic brake hold function, refer to the automatic brake hold function, the parking • When the vehicle stops, but the brake instructions outlined in this section. brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will force is not automatically applied, de- be released. The automatic brake hold in- press the brake pedal firmly until the To maintain braking force automatic brake hold indicator light automatically dicator light turns off. When the electronic parking brake is applied with the brake (green) illuminates. With the automatic brake hold function ac- force maintained by the automatic brake tivated and the automatic brake hold indi- hold function, the brake force of the auto- cator light (white) illuminated on the meter, matic brake hold will be released. The au- depress the braking pedal to stop the ve- tomatic brake hold indicator light turns off. hicle. The brake force is automatically maintained without your foot depressed NOTE: on the brake pedal. While the brake hold is • Under the following conditions, the maintained, the automatic brake hold indi- electronic parking brake will automati- cator light (green) illuminates on the meter. cally be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be To start the vehicle from a released: standstill – The braking force is applied by the automatic brake hold function for 3 With the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N minutes or longer. (Neutral) position, depress the accelerator – The shift lever is in the P (Park) pedal while the brake force is maintained. position. The brake force will automatically be re- – The driver's seat belt is unfastened. leased to restart the vehicle. – The ignition switch is placed in the The automatic brake hold indicator light OFF position. (white) on the meter illuminates and the automatic brake hold returns to standby.

Starting and driving 5-27 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if so equipped)

The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road. The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit OA located above the inside mirror. The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, see “LDW system operation” (P. 5-29). LSD3922 LSD3632

Automatic brake hold function WARNING display Failure to follow the warnings and in- The automatic brake hold function status structions for proper use of the LDW is shown by color in the “Chassis Control” system could result in serious injury or mode in the vehicle information display. death. For additional information, see “Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23). • This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential un- Also depending on the driving situations, intended lane departure. It will not some warnings or indicators may be dis- steer the vehicle or prevent loss of played in the vehicle information display. control. It is the driver’s responsibility For additional information, see “Vehicle in- to stay alert, drive safely, keep the formation display warnings and indicators” vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in (P. 2-31) control of the vehicle at all times.

5-28 Starting and driving ᭺2 Vehicle Information Display or Trip Computer

᭺3 LDW Switch (if so equipped) The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator (if so equipped) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LSD4121 Vehicle information display LDW SYSTEM OPERATION ᭺1 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator or Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light Starting and driving 5-29 Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Lane Departure Warning” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

LSD3989 Trip computer HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM

5-30 Starting and driving For vehicles with the LDW switch (if so equipped): 1. Push the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch to turn the LDW system on. 2. Push the LDW switch again to turn the LDW system off. When the LDW system is turned on, the indicator light on the LDW switch illuminates.

LSD4122

Starting and driving 5-31 WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. • The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers. • Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly: – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). – When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow. – When driving on winding or uneven roads. – When there is a lane closure due to road repairs. – When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane. LSD3991 – When driving on roads where the LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS lane width is too narrow.

5-32 Starting and driving – When driving without normal tire – On roads where there are sharply – When a sudden change in bright- conditions (for example, tire wear, contrasting objects, such as shad- ness occurs. (For example, when low tire pressure, installation of ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel spare tire, tire chains, nonstan- seams or lines remaining after or under a bridge.) dard wheels). road repairs. (The LDW system SYSTEM TEMPORARILY – When the vehicle is equipped with could detect these items as lane non-original brake parts or sus- markers.) UNAVAILABLE pension parts. – On roads where the traveling lane If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight – When you are towing a trailer or merges or separates. under high temperature conditions (over other vehicle. – When the vehicle’s traveling direc- approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then • The system may not function prop- tion does not align with the lane started, the LDW system may be deacti- erly under the following conditions: marker. vated automatically and the following message will appear in the vehicle infor- – On roads where there are multiple – When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which ob- mation display (if so equipped): “Unavail- parallel lane markers; lane mark- able: High Cabin Temperature.” ers that are faded or not painted structs the lane camera unit de- clearly; yellow painted lane mark- tection range. When the interior temperature is reduced, ers; non-standard lane markers; – When rain, snow, dirt or an object the LDW system will resume operating or lane markers covered with wa- adheres to the windshield in front automatically. ter, dirt, snow, etc. of the lane camera unit. The LDW system is not designed to warn – On roads where the discontinued – When the headlights are not under the following conditions: lane markers are still detectable. bright due to dirt on the lens or if • When you operate the lane change signal – On roads where there are sharp the aiming is not adjusted and change traveling lanes in the direc- curves. properly. tion of the signal. (The LDW system will – When strong light enters the lane become operable again approximately camera unit. (For example, the 2 seconds after the lane change signal is light directly shines on the front of turned off.) the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) • When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-33 After the above conditions have finished • Do not place reflective materials, such as and the necessary operating conditions white paper or a mirror, on the instru- are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume. ment panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s SYSTEM MALFUNCTION capability of detecting the lane markers. If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can- • Do not strike or damage the areas cel automatically. The LDW indicator (or- around the camera unit. Do not touch the ange) or LDW indicator light will illuminate camera lens or remove the screw located in the instrument panel. If the LDW indicator on the camera unit. If the camera unit is (orange) or LDW indicator light illuminates damaged due to an accident, it is recom- in the instrument panel, pull off the road to mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine/motor off and restart the engine/motor. If the LDW indicator (orange) or LDW indicator light continues to illumi- LSD4123 nate, have the LDW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN SYSTEM MAINTENANCE dealer for this service. The lane camera unit OA for the LDW system is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: • Always keep the windshield clean. • Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

5-34 Starting and driving BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death. • The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system. LSD3090 SSD1030 Detection zone The BSW system helps alert the driver of The BSW system uses radar sensors O1 other vehicles in adjacent lanes when installed near the rear bumper to detect The radar sensors can detect vehicles on changing lanes. other vehicles in an adjacent lane. either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

Starting and driving 5-35 BSW SYSTEM OPERATION The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h). If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, see “BSW driving situations” (P. 5-41). LSD4013 Vehicle information display 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light 2. BSW Indicator or BSW Indicator Light

5-36 Starting and driving LSD4014 Trip computer

Starting and driving 5-37 Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Blind Spot Warning” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

LSD3507 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM

5-38 Starting and driving For vehicles with the BSW switch (if so equipped): 1. Push the BSW switch to turn the BSW system on. The BSW indicator light will illuminate in the meter. 2. Push the BSW switch again to turn the BSW system off. The BSW indicator light will turn off. NOTE: • When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted. • When the BSW system is turned on, the BSW indicator (white) in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) illuminates.

LSD4015

Starting and driving 5-39 BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – A vehicle that passes through the • Do not attach stickers (including WARNING detection zone quickly. transparent material), install acces- – When overtaking several vehicles sories or apply additional paint near Listed below are the system limitations in a row, the vehicles after the first the radar sensors. These conditions for the BSW system. Failure to operate vehicle may not be detected if may reduce the ability of the radar to the vehicle in accordance with these they are traveling close together. detect other vehicles. system limitations could result in seri- • The radar sensors’ detection zone is • Excessive noise (for example, audio ous injury or death. designed based on a standard lane system volume, open vehicle win- • The BSW system cannot detect all ve- width. When driving in a wider lane, dow) will interfere with the chime hicles under all conditions. the radar sensors may not detect ve- sound, and it may not be heard. • The radar sensors may not be able to hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv- detect and activate BSW when cer- ing in a narrow lane, the radar sen- tain objects are present such as: sors may detect vehicles driving two – Pedestrian, bicycles, animals. lanes away. – Vehicles such as motorcycles, low • The radar sensors are designed to ig- height vehicles, or high ground nore most stationary objects, how- clearance vehicles. ever objects such as guardrails, walls, – Oncoming vehicles. foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a nor- – Vehicles remaining in the detec- mal operation condition. tion zone when you accelerate from a stop. • The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other – A vehicle merging into an adjacent vehicles: lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle. – Severe weather – A vehicle approaching rapidly – Road spray from behind. – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on – A vehicle which your vehicle over- the vehicle takes rapidly.

5-40 Starting and driving Another vehicle approaching from behind Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane. NOTE: • The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

LSD2299 LSD2300 Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind Illustration 2 – Approaching from BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS behind Illustration 2: If the driver activates the Indicator on turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator Indicator off light flashes. NOTE: • The radar sensors may not detect ve- Indicator flashing hicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

Starting and driving 5-41 • If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302 LSD2303 Illustration3–Overtaking another Illustration4–Overtaking another vehicle vehicle Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 3: The side BSW/RCTA indica- detection zone, then the system chimes tor light illuminates if you overtake a ve- (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator hicle and that vehicle stays in the detection light flashes. zone for approximately 2 seconds. NOTE: • When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

5-42 Starting and driving • The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly. • If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2305 LSD2308 Illustration 5 – Entering from the side Illustration 6 – Entering from the side Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 5: The side BSW/RCTA indicator detection zone, then the system chimes light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de- (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator tection zone from either side. light flashes. NOTE: • If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-43 • The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

LSD3682 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY When radar blockage is detected, the sys- UNAVAILABLE tem will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar Obstruction” warning message

5-44 Starting and driving will appear in the vehicle information dis- Do not attach stickers (including transpar- play (if so equipped). ent material), install accessories or apply The system is not available until the condi- additional paint near the radar sensors. tions no longer exist. Do not strike or damage the area around The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- the radar sensors. It is recommended that porary ambient conditions such as splash- you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi- the radar sensors is damaged due to a tion may also be caused by objects such as collision. ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. Radio frequency statement Action to take: For USA When the above conditions no longer exist, FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B the system will resume automatically. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC LSD3090 Rules. Malfunction SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Operation is subject to the following two If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn The two radar sensors O1 for the BSW and conditions: RCTA systems are located near the rear off automatically. The system malfunction 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- warning message with the BSW indicator ference, and (orange) will appear in the vehicle informa- dar sensors clean. tion display (if so equipped). The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference Action to take: porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. that may cause undesired operation. Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- The blocked condition may also be caused gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- sage continues to appear, have the system structing the radar sensors. checked. It is recommended that you visit a Check for and remove objects obstructing NISSAN dealer for this service. the area around the radar sensors.

Starting and driving 5-45 REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)

FCC Warning 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, approved by the party responsible for même si le brouillage est susceptible Failure to follow the warnings and in- compliance could void the user’s authority d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. structions for proper use of the RCTA to operate the equipment. Bandes de fréquences: 24.05–24.25GHz could result in serious injury or death. • The RCTA system is not a replace- For Canada Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts ment for proper driving procedures Applicable law: Canada 310 and is not designed to prevent con- This device complies with industry Canada tact with vehicles or objects. When licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation backing out of a parking space, al- is subject to the following two conditions: ways use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction 1. This device may not cause interference, your vehicle will move. Never rely and solely on the RCTA system. 2. This device must accept any interfer- The RCTA system will assist you when ence, including interference that may backing out from a parking space. When cause undesired operation of the the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de- device. signed to detect other vehicles approach- Frequency bands: 24.05–24.25GHz ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you. Output power: less than 20 milliwatts Droit applicable: Canada 310 Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

5-46 Starting and driving When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational. If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD4016 Vehicle information display RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION The RCTA system can help alert the driver 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space. Starting and driving 5-47 LSD4017 Trip computer

5-48 Starting and driving LSD2216 LSD3090 The RCTA system uses radar sensors O1 installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle. The radar sensors O1 can detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

Starting and driving 5-49 Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Cross Traffic” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

LSD3510 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM

5-50 Starting and driving For vehicles with the BSW switch (if so equipped): 1. Push the BSW switch to turn the RCTA system on. The BSW indicator light will illuminate in the meter. 2. Push the BSW switch again to turn the RCTA system off. The BSW indicator light will turn off. NOTE: When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD4015

Starting and driving 5-51 • Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as: – Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles – A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) – A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) • The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations: – Illustration OA : When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor. LSD3195 – Illustration OB : When the vehicle is RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING parked in an angled parking space. Listed below are the system limitations – Illustration OC : When the vehicle is for the RCTA system. Failure to operate parked on inclined ground. the vehicle in accordance with these – Illustration OD : When an ap- system limitations could result in seri- proaching vehicle turns into your ous injury or death. vehicle's parking lot aisle. 5-52 Starting and driving – Illustration OE : When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small. • The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: – Severe weather – Road spray – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle • Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions LSD2043 LSD2044 may reduce the ability of the radar to Illustration 1 Illustration 2 detect other vehicles. NOTE: • Excessive noise (e.g., audio system In the case of several vehicles approach- volume, open vehicle window) will in- ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo- terfere with the chime sound, and it site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may may not be heard. not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Starting and driving 5-53 will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped). The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by conditions such as ice, snow, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically. Malfunction When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped). LSD3682 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY When radar blockage is detected, the sys- NOTE: UNAVAILABLE tem will be deactivated automatically. The If the BSW system stops working, the “Side Radar Obstruction” warning message RCTA system will also stop working.

5-54 Starting and driving Action to take Do not attach stickers (including transpar- Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the ent material), install accessories or apply vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- additional paint near the radar sensors. gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- Do not strike or damage the area around sage continues to appear, have the system the radar sensors. It is recommended that checked. It is recommended that you visit a you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around NISSAN dealer for this service. the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision. Radio frequency statement For USA FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC LSD3090 Rules. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Operation is subject to the following two The two radar sensors O1 for the BSW and conditions: RCTA systems are located near the rear 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- ference, and dar sensors clean. The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- 2. This device must accept any interfer- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ence received, including interference ing water, mist or fog. that may cause undesired operation. The blocked condition may also be caused FCC Warning by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- Changes or modifications not expressly structing the radar sensors. approved by the party responsible for Check for and remove objects obstructing compliance could void the user’s authority the area around the radar sensors. to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-55 CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

For Canada WARNING Applicable law: Canada 310 Do not use the cruise control when driv- This device complies with industry Canada ing under the following conditions: licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation • When it is not possible to keep the is subject to the following two conditions: vehicle at a set speed. 1. This device may not cause interference, • In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies and in speed. 2. This device must accept any interference, • On winding or hilly roads. including interference that may cause un- • On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, desired operation of the device. etc.). Frequency bands: 24.05–24.25GHz • In very windy areas. Output power: less than 20 milliwatts Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle LSD3131 control and result in an accident. Droit applicable: Canada 310 ᭺1 RES+ switch Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils ᭺2 CANCEL switch The cruise control allows driving at a speed radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est ᭺3 SET- switch between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with- autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: out keeping your foot on the accelerator ᭺4 CRUISE ON/OFF switch 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil- pedal. lage, et PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE To turn on the cruise control, push the CONTROL CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indica- 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter • If the cruise control system malfunctions, tor light or indicator in the instrument tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, it cancels automatically. panel comes on. même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. • To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures. Bandes de fréquences: 24.05–24.25GHz Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

5-56 Starting and driving To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve- The cruise control is automatically can- To reset at a slower cruising speed, use hicle to the desired speed, push the SET– celed and the CRUISE indicator light or one of the following three methods: switch and release it. The SET indicator indicator in the instrument panel goes out • Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- light or indicator in the instrument if: hicle attains the desired speed, push the panel comes on. Take your foot off the ac- • You depress the brake pedal while push- SET– switch and release it. celerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the ing the RES+ or SET– switch. The preset • Push and hold the SET– switch. Release set speed. speed is deleted from memory. the switch when the vehicle slows to the • To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- • The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph desired speed. celerator pedal. When you release the (13 km/h) below the set speed. • Push and release the SET– switch. Each pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ- • You move the shift lever to N (Neutral). time you do this, the set speed decreases ously set speed. by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). • The vehicle may not maintain the set To reset at a faster cruising speed, use speed when going up or down steep hills. one of the following three methods: To resume the preset speed, push and If this happens, drive without the cruise • Depress the accelerator pedal. When the release the RES+ switch. The vehicle re- control. vehicle attains the desired speed, push turns to the last set cruising speed when and release the SET– switch. the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods: • Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, re- • Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE indi- lease the switch. cator light or indicator in the instrument panel goes out. • Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases • Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indicator by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). light or indicator goes out. • Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light or indicator in the instrument panel goes out.

Starting and driving 5-57 INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (if so equipped)

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death. • The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. • Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them. • Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions. LSD4124 OA ICC switch

5-58 Starting and driving • In the conventional (fixed speed) Push the ICC switch OA to choose the cruise control mode, a warning cruise control mode between the vehicle- chime will not sound to warn you if to-vehicle distance control mode and the you are too close to the vehicle conventional (fixed speed) cruise control ahead. Pay special attention to the mode. distance between your vehicle and Once a control mode is activated, it cannot the vehicle ahead of you or a collision be changed to the other cruise control could occur. mode. To change the mode, push the ICC The ICC system maintains a selected dis- switch OA once to turn the system off. Then tance from the vehicle in front of you within push the ICC switch OA again to turn the the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 system back on and select the desired km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed cruise control mode. can be selected by the driver between 20 to Always confirm the setting in the ICC sys- 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). tem display. The vehicle travels at a set speed when the For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control road ahead is clear. mode, see “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance The ICC system can be set to one of two control mode” (P. 5-60). cruise control modes: For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise • Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control control mode, see “Conventional (fixed mode: For maintaining a selected dis- speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-76). tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed • Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed

Starting and driving 5-59 LSD4125 LSD2710 HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE cruise control mode: To choose the con- CONTROL MODE ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle dis- O2 , push and hold the ICC switch OA for In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control tance control mode: To choose the longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For mode, the ICC system automatically main- vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode additional information, see “Conventional tains a selected distance from the vehicle O1 , quickly push and release the ICC switch (fixed speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-76). traveling in front of you according to that OA . vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear. The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

5-60 Starting and driving If the radar sensor OA detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary. The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

LSD4126 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control CONTROL MODE OPERATION mode is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a Starting and driving 5-61 slower vehicle ahead. The system will de- The following items are controlled in the celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle • When there are no vehicles traveling decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance system can only apply up to 40% of the control mode maintains the speed set by vehicle’s total braking power. the driver. The set speed range is be- This system should only be used when traf- tween approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re- and 144 km/h). main fairly constant or when vehicle • When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, speeds change gradually. If a vehicle the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a mode adjusts the speed to maintain the vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, distance, selected by the driver, from the the distance between vehicles may be- vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes come closer because the ICC system can- to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. standstill within the limitations of the sys- SSD0254 If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a tem. The system will cancel once it judges When driving on the freeway at a set speed warning chime and blink the system dis- a standstill with a warning chime. and approaching a slower traveling vehicle play to notify the driver to take necessary • When the vehicle traveling ahead has ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed action. moved out from its lane of travel, the to maintain the distance, selected by the The system will cancel and a warning vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle chime will sound if the speed is below ap- accelerates and maintains vehicle speed ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle up to the set speed. the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay is not detected ahead. The system will also The ICC system does not control vehicle attention to the driving operation to main- disengage when the vehicle goes above speed or warn you when you approach tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates the maximum set speed. stationary and slow moving vehicles. You to the set speed. For additional information, see “Approach must pay attention to vehicle operation to warning” (P. 5-68). maintain proper distance from vehicles The vehicle may not maintain the set ahead when approaching toll gates or traf- speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc- fic congestion. curs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed. 5-62 Starting and driving Normally when controlling the distance to 3. DISTANCE switch: a vehicle ahead, this system automatically Changes the vehicle’s following accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac- distance: cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accel- • Long erate your vehicle when acceleration is re- • Middle quired for a lane change. Depress the brake • Short pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle 4. ICC Switch: ahead due to its sudden braking or if a Master switch to activate the system. vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us- 5. SET- switch: ing the ICC system. Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally. LSD3515 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE SWITCHES The system is operated by the ICC switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel. 1. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed. 2. RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

Starting and driving 5-63 • ICC system warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system. 2. Set vehicle speed indicator: Indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h. 3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator: Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you. 4. Set distance indicator: LSD4127 Displays the selected distance between LSD4128 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance vehicles set with the distance switch. Operating vehicle-to-vehicle control mode display and distance control mode indicators To turn on the cruise control, quickly push The display is located between the speed- and release the ICC switch OA . The ICC sys- ometer and tachometer. tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator OB 1. This indicator indicates the ICC system come on in a standby state for setting. status depending on a color: • ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indi- cates that the ICC is on. • ICC system SET indicator (green): Indi- cates that the cruising speed is set.

5-64 Starting and driving A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up: • When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the ICC switch again.) For additional information about the VDC system, see “Vehicle Dynamic Con- trol (VDC) system” (P. 5-134). • When VDC is operating • When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no lon- LSD4129 LSD4130 ger slipping.) To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- When the SET– switch is pushed under the hicle to the desired speed, push the SET– following conditions, the system cannot be switch OC and release it. The ICC system set and the ICC indicators will blink for ap- set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detec- proximately 2 seconds: tion indicator, set distance indicator and • When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) set vehicle speed indicator OB will come on. and a vehicle ahead is not detected Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. • When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. or Manual mode • When the parking brake is applied • When the brakes are operated by the driver When the SET– switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.

Starting and driving 5-65 Vehicle detected ahead When a vehicle is no longer detected, the When a vehicle is detected in the lane vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve- If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera- hicle by controlling the throttle and apply- tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the ing the brakes to match the speed of a ICC system is in operation, the system con- slower vehicle ahead. The system then trols the distance to that vehicle. controls the vehicle speed based on the When a vehicle is no longer detected under speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys- driver selected distance. tem will be canceled. NOTE: • The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system. LSD4131 • When the brake operates, a noise may ᭺1 System set display with vehicle ahead be heard. This is not a malfunction.

᭺2 System set display without vehicle When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve- ahead hicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set The driver sets the desired vehicle speed speed and selected distance. based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, simi- Vehicle ahead not detected lar to standard cruise control, as long as no When a vehicle is no longer detected vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler- ICC system displays the set speed. ates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.

5-66 Starting and driving How to change the set vehicle To reset at a slower cruising speed, use speed one of the following methods: • Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- To cancel the preset speed, use one of the hicle attains the desired speed, push the following methods: SET– switch and release it. • Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle • Push and hold the SET– switch. The set speed indicator will go out. vehicle speed will decrease by approxi- • Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle mately 5 mph (8 km/h for Canada). speed indicator will go out. • Push, then quickly release the SET– • Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indi- switch. Each time you do this, the set cators will go out. speed will decrease by approximately To reset at a faster cruising speed, use 1 mph (1.6 km/h for Canada). one of the following methods: To resume the preset speed, push and LSD4132 • Depress the accelerator pedal. When the release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will vehicle attains the desired speed, push resume the last set cruising speed when When passing another vehicle, the set and release the SET– switch. the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h). speed indicator will flash when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle • Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set detect indicator will turn off when the area vehicle speed will increase by approxi- ahead of the vehicle is open. When the mately 5 mph (8 km/h for Canada). pedal is released, the vehicle will return to • Push, then quickly release the RES+ the previously set speed. switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately Even though your vehicle speed is set in the 1 mph (1.6 km/h for Canada). ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

Starting and driving 5-67 Approach warning If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if: • The chime sounds. • The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks. The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance LSD3552 LSD2752 between vehicles. Some examples are: How to change the set distance Distance Approximate distance at • When the vehicles are traveling at the to the vehicle ahead 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] same speed and the distance between 1. Long 200 (60) vehicles is not changing. The distance to the vehicle ahead can be 2. Middle 150 (45) • When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster selected at any time depending on the traf- 3. Short 90 (30) and the distance between vehicles is fic conditions. • The distance to the vehicle ahead will increasing. Each time the distance switch OA is change according to the vehicle speed. • When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. pushed, the set distance will change to The higher the vehicle speed, the longer long, middle, short and back to long again, the distance. The warning chime will not sound when: in that sequence. • The distance setting will remain at the • The vehicle approaches other vehicles current setting even if the engine is that are parked or moving slowly. restarted. • The accelerator pedal is depressed, over- riding the system.

5-68 Starting and driving NOTE: • When the system judges the vehicle is at • The ICC system will not adapt auto- a standstill The approach warning chime may sound matically to road conditions. This and the system display may blink when • When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) system should be used in evenly the ICC sensor detects objects on the position, Manual mode, or L (Low) range. flowing traffic. Do not use the system side of the vehicle or on the side of the • When the parking brake system is applied on roads with sharp curves, or on icy road. This may cause the ICC system to • When the VDC system is turned off roads, in heavy rain or in fog. decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The • When VDC operates • As there is a performance limit to the ICC sensor may detect these objects distance control function, never rely • When distance measurement becomes when the vehicle is driven on winding solely on the ICC system. This system impaired due to adhesion of dirt or ob- roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when does not correct careless, inattentive struction to the sensor entering or exiting a curve. In these or absentminded driving, or over- cases you will have to manually control • When a wheel slips come poor visibility in rain, fog, or the proper distance ahead of your • When the radar signal is temporarily other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle. interrupted vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the dis- Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af- VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE tance to the vehicle ahead and the fected by vehicle operation (steering CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS surrounding circumstances in order maneuver or driving position in the lane) to maintain a safe distance between or traffic or vehicle condition (for ex- WARNING vehicles. ample, if a vehicle is being driven with • If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, some damage). Listed below are the system limitations the vehicle decelerates to a standstill for the ICC system. Failure to operate within the limitations of the system. Automatic cancellation the vehicle in accordance with these The system will cancel once it judges system limitations could result in seri- A chime sounds under the following condi- that the vehicle has come to a stand- ous injury or death. tions and the control is automatically can- still and sound a warning chime. To celed: • The ICC system is primarily intended prevent the vehicle from moving, the • When the vehicle ahead is not detected for use on straight, dry, open roads driver must depress the brake pedal. and your vehicle is traveling below the with light traffic. It is not advisable to speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.

Starting and driving 5-69 • Always pay attention to the opera- – When traffic conditions make it The sensor generally detects the signals tion of the vehicle and be ready to difficult to keep a proper distance returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, manually control the proper follow- between vehicles because of fre- if the sensor cannot detect the reflection ing distance. The ICC system may not quent acceleration or from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system be able to maintain the selected dis- deceleration may not maintain the selected distance. tance between vehicles (following – Interference by other radar The following are some conditions in which distance) or selected vehicle speed sources the sensor cannot properly detect a ve- under some circumstances. • Do not use the ICC system if you are hicle ahead and the system may not oper- • The system may not detect the ve- towing a trailer. The system may not ate properly: hicle in front of you in certain road or detect a vehicle ahead. • When snow or road spray from traveling weather conditions. To avoid acci- • In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection. dents, never use the ICC system un- vehicle or object can unexpectedly • When excessively heavy baggage is der the following conditions: come into the sensor detection zone loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of – On roads where the traffic is heavy and cause automatic braking. Al- your vehicle. or there are sharp curves ways stay alert and avoid using the The ICC system is designed to automati- – On slippery road surfaces such as ICC system where not recommended cally check the sensor’s operation within on ice or snow, etc. in this warning section. the limitations of the system. – During bad weather (rain, fog, The radar sensor will not detect the follow- When the sensor is covered with dirt or is snow, etc.) ing objects: obstructed, the system will automatically – When rain, snow or dirt adhere to • Stationary and slow moving vehicles be canceled. If the sensor is covered with the bumper around the distance • Pedestrians or objects in the roadway ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, sensor • Oncoming vehicles in the same lane etc., the ICC system may not detect them. – On steep downhill roads (the ve- In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle hicle may go beyond the set ve- • Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel distance control mode may not cancel and hicle speed and frequent braking lane may not be able to maintain the selected may result in overheating the following distance from the vehicle ahead. brakes) Be sure to check and clean the sensor – On repeated uphill and downhill regularly. roads

5-70 Starting and driving The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. SSD0252 If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-71 SSD0253 When driving on some roads, such as wind- If this occurs, the ICC system may warn ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads you by blinking the system indicator and which are under construction, the radar sounding the chime unexpectedly. You sensor may detect vehicles in a different will have to manually control the proper lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve- distance away from the vehicle traveling hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ahead. radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

5-72 Starting and driving maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Condition A Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set: • When the VDC system is turned off • When the VDC operates • When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) • When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill • When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive), Manual mode or L (Low) range. • When the parking brake is applied • When a wheel slips • When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted Action to take When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using LSD4133 the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on SYSTEM TEMPORARILY The following are conditions in which the to use the system. UNAVAILABLE ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to Starting and driving 5-73 Condition B The chime will sound and the “Forward Action to take When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front When the above driving conditions no lon- snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” ger exist, turn the system back on. warning message will appear in the vehicle the ICC system will automatically be can- Condition E celed, the chime will sound and the “For- information display. ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Action to take When the ICC system is not operating Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” properly a chime sounds and the ICC sys- If the warning message appears, stop the tem warning light (orange) will come on. warning message will appear in the vehicle vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever information display. in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine Action to take off. When the radar signal is temporarily When the conditions listed above are no interrupted, clean the sensor area of the longer present, the warning message will front bumper and restart the engine. If the no longer be available in the vehicle infor- “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled mation display and the system will operate Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” normally. If the “Forward Driving Aids Tem- warning message continues to be dis- porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See played, have the system checked. It is rec- Owner’s Manual” warning message contin- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ues to be displayed, have the system for this service. checked. It is recommended that you visit a Condition D NISSAN dealer for this service. When driving on roads with limited road Condition C structures (for example, long bridges, des- When the radar sensor area of the front erts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), bumper is covered with dirt or is ob- the system may illuminate the system structed, the ICC system will automatically warning light and display the “Forward be canceled. Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message.

5-74 Starting and driving NOTE: If the ICC system is temporarily unavailable, the conventional cruise control mode may still be used. For additional information, please see “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-76).

LSD3916 LSD2710 Action to take SYSTEM MAINTENANCE If the warning light comes on, park the ve- The sensor for the ICC system OA is located hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, on the front of the vehicle. restart the engine, resume driving and set To keep the ICC system operating properly, the ICC system again. be sure to observe the following: If it is not possible to set the system or • Always keep the sensor area of the front the indicator stays on, it may indicate bumper/emblem clean. that the system is malfunctioning. Al- • Do not strike or damage the areas though the vehicle is still drivable under around the sensor. normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you • Do not attach a sticker (including trans- visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. parent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-75 • Do not attach metallic objects near the For Canada Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information: sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could Model: ARS4–B This equipment complies with FCC radia- cause failure or malfunction. IC: 4135A-ARS4B tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- • Do not alter, remove, or paint the front trolled environment. bumper. Before customizing or restoring FCC ID: OAYARS4B the front bumper, it is recommended that This equipment should be installed and This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC you visit a NISSAN dealer. operated with minimum distance of 30 cm Rules and with Industry Canada licence- between the radiator and your body. exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- Radio frequency statement ject to the following two conditions: The transmitter must not be co-located or For USA operating in conjunction with any other an- 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- tenna or transmitter. FCC ID OAYARS4B ference, and Cet équipement est conforme aux limites This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 2. This device must accept any interfer- d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies Rules. Operation is subject to the following ence received, including interference pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet two conditions: that may cause undesired operation. équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la ference, and d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- source de rayonnement et votre corps. 2. This device must accept any interfer- eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation FCC Notice est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv- ence received, including interference Changes or modifications not expressly antes: that may cause undesired operation. approved by the party responsible for FCC Warning 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil- compliance could void the user’s authority lage, et to operate the equipment. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for 2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) compliance could void the user’s authority tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, CRUISE CONTROL MODE to operate the equipment. même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

5-76 Starting and driving WARNING • In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to- vehicle distance is detected. • Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur. • Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display. LSD3555 LSD3106 • Do not use the conventional (fixed Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Conventional (fixed speed) cruise speed) cruise control mode when control switches control mode display and driving under the following condi- indicators tions: 1. CANCEL switch: – When it is not possible to keep the Deactivates the system without erasing The display is located in the vehicle infor- vehicle at a set speed the set speed mation display. – In heavy traffic or in traffic that 2. RES+ switch: 1. Cruise indicator: varies in speed Resumes set speed or increases speed This indicator indicates the condition of – On winding or hilly roads incrementally the ICC system depending on a color. – On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, • Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indi- 3. ICC switch: cates that the ICC switch is on etc.) Master switch to activate the system – In very windy areas • Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indi- 4. SET- switch: cates that the cruising speed is set • Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle Sets desired cruise speed or reduces control and result in an accident. speed incrementally Starting and driving 5-77 • Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates the ICC switch again will turn the system that there is a malfunction in the ICC completely off. When the ignition switch is system placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. 2. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle To use the ICC system again, quickly push speed. For Canadian models, the speed and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to ve- is displayed in km/h. hicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

CAUTION To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ICC LSD3556 switch off when not using the ICC Operating conventional (fixed system. speed) cruise control mode To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC switch OA for longer than about 1.5 seconds. When pushing ICC switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators OB are displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold ICC switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing

5-78 Starting and driving To cancel the preset speed, use any of the To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one following methods: of the following three methods: 1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle 1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the speed indicator will turn off. vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it. 2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off. 2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down 3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise to the desired speed. indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off. 3. Push, then quickly release the SET- To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one switch. Each time you do this, the set of the following three methods: speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). 1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the LSD3557 vehicle attains the desired speed, push To resume the preset speed, push and and release the SET- switch. release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- resume the last set cruising speed when hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- OC 2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). switch and release it. (The color of the the vehicle attains the desired speed, cruise indicator changes to green and set release the switch. vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your 3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ vehicle will maintain the set speed. switch. Each time you do this, the set • To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- speed will increase by about 1 mph celerator pedal. When you release the (1.6 km/h). pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. • The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

Starting and driving 5-79 • When the vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed • When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode • When the parking brake is applied • When the VDC operates (including the traction control system) • When a wheel slips When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange. Action to take If the color of the cruise indicator changes to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and then perform the setting again. If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recom- LSD3558 mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. System temporarily unavailable A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:

5-80 Starting and driving REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB) (if so equipped)

• The RAB system is a supplemental NOTE: aid to the driver. It is not a replace- You can temporarily cancel the sonar ment for proper driving procedures. function in the vehicle, but the RAB sys- Always use the side and rear mirrors tem will continue to operate. For addi- and turn and look in the direction you tional information, see “Rear Sonar Sys- will move before and while backing tem (RSS)” (P. 5-140). up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. • There is a limitation to the RAB system capability. The RAB system is not effective in all situations. • Inclement weather or ultrasonic LSD3633 sources such as an automatic car WARNING wash, a truck’s compressed air brakes or a pneumatic drill may af- Failure to follow the warnings and in- fect the function of the system; this structions for proper use of the RAB may include reduced performance or system could result in serious injury or a false activation. death. The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle. The RAB system detects obstacles behind the vehicle using the parking sensors O1 located on the rear bumper.

Starting and driving 5-81 ᭺3 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

᭺4 Drive Systems OFF Switch (if so equipped) When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates. If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure. NOTE: • The brake lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the RAB system. • When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

LSD3992 Vehicle information display RAB SYSTEM OPERATION ᭺2 Center display ᭺1 RAB system warning light and RAB system warning indicator 5-82 Starting and driving LSD4134 Trip computer

Starting and driving 5-83 Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system on or off. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Rear” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

LSD3994 TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF

5-84 Starting and driving For vehicles with the Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped): 1. The RAB system is automatically enabled. 2. Push the Drive Systems OFF switch once to disable the RAB system. When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates. NOTE: The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.

LSD4135

Starting and driving 5-85 • When the vehicle approaches an ob- – Thin objects such as rope, wire, – There are bumps, protrusions, or stacle while the accelerator or brake chain, etc. manhole covers on the road pedal is depressed, the function may • The RAB system may not operate for surface. not operate or the start of operation the following obstacles: – The vehicle drives through a may be delayed. The RAB system may – Obstacles located high off the draped flag or a curtain. not operate or may not perform suffi- ground – There is an accumulation of snow ciently due to vehicle conditions, driv- or ice behind the vehicle. ing conditions, the traffic environment, – Obstacles in a position offset from the weather, road surface conditions, your vehicle – An ultrasonic wave source, such as etc. Do not wait for the system to oper- – Obstacles, such as spongy materi- another vehicle’s sonar, is near ate. Operate the brake pedal by your- als or snow, that have soft outer the vehicle. self as soon as necessary. surfaces and can easily absorb a • Once the automatic brake control • If it is necessary to override RAB op- sound wave operates, it does not operate again if eration, strongly press the accelera- • The RAB system may not operate in the vehicle approaches the same tor pedal. the following conditions: obstacle. • Always check your surroundings and – There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., • The automatic brake control can only turn to check what is behind you be- attached to the sonar sensors. operate for a short period of time. fore and while backing up. The RAB – A loud sound is heard in the area Therefore, the driver must depress system detects stationary objects around the vehicle. the brake pedal. behind the vehicle. The RAB system – The surface of the obstacle is di- • In the following situations, the RAB does not detect the following ob- agonal to the rear of the vehicle. system may not operate properly or jects: may not function sufficiently: • The RAB system may unintentionally – Moving objects operate in the following conditions: – The vehicle is driven in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). – Low objects – There is overgrown grass in the – Narrow objects area around the vehicle. – The vehicle is driven on a steep hill. – Wedge-shaped objects – There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, – The vehicle’s posture is changed – Objects close to the bumper (less (e.g., when driving over a bump). than approximately 1 ft [30 cm]) a parking lot gate) near the side of the vehicle. – The vehicle is driven on a slippery – Objects that suddenly appear road. 5-86 Starting and driving – The vehicle is turned sharply by – Suspension parts other than turning the steering wheel fully. those designated as Genuine – Snow chains are used. NISSAN parts are used. (If the ve- – Wheels or tires other than NISSAN hicle height or the vehicle body in- recommended are used. clination is changed, the system may not detect an obstacle – The brakes are cold at low ambi- correctly.) ent temperatures or immediately after driving has started. • Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will – The braking force becomes poor interfere with the chime sound, and it due to wet brakes after driving may not be heard. through a puddle or washing the vehicle. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION • Turn the RAB system off in the follow- If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be ing conditions to prevent the occur- turned off automatically, and the RAB sys- LSD3633 rence of an unexpected accident re- tem warning light will illuminate in the ve- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE sulting from sudden system hicle information display. operation: Observe the following items to ensure Action to take proper operation of the system: – The vehicle is towed. • Always keep the parking sensors 1 – The vehicle is carried on a flatbed If the warning light illuminates, park the ve- O clean. truck. hicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, and restart the engine. If the warning light • If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them – The vehicle is on the chassis continues to illuminate, have the RAB sys- off with a soft cloth while being careful to dynamometer. tem checked. It is recommended that you not damage them. – The vehicle drives on an uneven visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. road surface. – The vehicle is towing an object (if NOTE: so equipped). If the RAB system cannot be operated temporarily, the RAB system warning light blinks.

Starting and driving 5-87 AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (if so equipped)

• Do not subject the area around the park- WARNING ing sensors O1 to strong impact. Also, do not remove or disassemble the parking Failure to follow the warnings and in- sensors. If the parking sensors and pe- structions for proper use of the AEB ripheral areas are deformed in an acci- system could result in serious injury or dent, etc., have the sensors checked. It is death. recommended that you visit a NISSAN • The AEB system is a supplemental dealer for this service. aid to the driver. It is not a replace- • Do not install any stickers (including ment for the driver’s attention to transparent stickers) or accessories on traffic conditions or responsibility to the parking sensors O1 and their sur- drive safely. It cannot prevent acci- rounding areas. This may cause a mal- dents due to carelessness or danger- function or improper operation. ous driving techniques. • The AEB system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road LSD2710 conditions. The AEB system uses a radar sensor OA located on the front of the vehicle to mea- The AEB system can assist the driver when sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in there is a risk of a forward collision with the the same lane. vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

5-88 Starting and driving 3. AEB system warning light The AEB system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB system will provide an initial warning to the driver by both a visual (if so equipped) and audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the AEB system issues the second visual warning (red) (if so equipped) and audible warning and also applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB system applies harder braking automatically. NOTE: The vehicle's brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system. LSD3996 Depending on vehicle speed and distance Vehicle information display to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and AEB SYSTEM OPERATION 2. AEB emergency warning indicator (if so roadway conditions, the system may help 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so equipped) the driver avoid a forward collision or may equipped) Starting and driving 5-89 The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: • When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to avoid a collision. • When the accelerator pedal is depressed. • When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead. If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

LSD3997 Trip computer help mitigate the consequences of a colli- erating or braking, the AEB system will sion, should one be unavoidable. If the function later or will not function. driver is handling the steering wheel, accel- 5-90 Starting and driving Perform the following steps to turn the AEB system on or off. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Front” and press the OK button.

LSD3994 TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM ON/OFF

Starting and driving 5-91 For vehicles with the Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped): 1. The AEB system is automatically enabled. 2. Push the Drive Systems OFF switch once to disable the AEB system. When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates. NOTE: The AEB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

LSD4046

5-92 Starting and driving AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – Snow or road spray from traveling WARNING vehicles. – If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g., Listed below are the system limitations motorcycle). for the AEB system. Failure to operate – When driving on a steep downhill the vehicle in accordance with these slope or roads with sharp curves. system limitations could result in serious injury or death. • In some road or traffic conditions, the AEB system may unexpectedly apply • The AEB system cannot detect all ve- partial braking. When acceleration is hicles under all conditions. necessary, continue to depress the • The radar sensor does not detect the accelerator pedal to override the following objects: system. – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles • Braking distances increase on slip- in the roadway. pery surfaces. – Oncoming vehicles. • The system is designed to automati- – Crossing vehicles. cally check the sensor’s functionality, • The radar sensor has some perfor- within certain limitations. The sys- mance limitations. If a stationary ve- tem may not detect some forms of hicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB obstructions of the sensor area such system will not function when the as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these vehicle is driven at speeds over ap- cases, the system may not be able to proximately 50 mph (80 km/h). warn the driver properly. Be sure that • The radar sensor may not detect a you check, clean and clear the sensor vehicle ahead in the following area regularly. conditions: • Excessive noise will interfere with the – Dirt, ice, snow or other material warning chime sound, and the chime covering the radar sensor. may not be heard. – Interference by other radar sources. Starting and driving 5-93 Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB system will resume automatically. Condition B When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the AEB system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the “For- ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

LSD3998 Vehicle information display SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

5-94 Starting and driving Action to take When the above conditions are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display. If the “Forward Driving Aids Tempo- rarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Condition C When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the AEB system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Dis- abled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

LSD3999 Trip computer

Starting and driving 5-95 Action to take Action to take If the warning message appears, stop the If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- in the P (Park) position and turn the engine gine off and restart the engine. If the warn- off. When the radar signal is temporarily ing light continues to illuminate, have the interrupted, clean the sensor area of the AEB system checked. It is recommended front bumper and restart the engine. If the that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled service. Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message continues to be displayed have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition D LSD3916 When driving on roads with limited road SYSTEM MALFUNCTION structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be long walls), the system may illuminate the turned off automatically, a chime will system warning light and display the “For- sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled illuminate and the warning message [Mal- Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” function] will appear in the vehicle informa- warning message. tion display (if so equipped). Action to take When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on. NOTE: If the AEB system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working. 5-96 Starting and driving • Do not attach metallic objects near the This equipment has been tested and found sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could to comply with the limits for a Class A digi- cause failure or malfunction. tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC • Do not alter, remove or paint the front Rules. These limits are designed to provide bumper. Before customizing or restoring reasonable protection against harmful in- the front bumper, it is recommended that terference when the equipment is oper- you visit a NISSAN dealer. ated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radi- Radio frequency statement ate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the FCC Notice instruction manual, may cause harmful in- For USA terference to radio communications. Op- eration of this equipment in a residential This device complies with part 15 of the FCC area is likely to cause harmful interference Rules. LSD2710 in which case the user will be required to Operation is subject to the following two correct the interference at his own SYSTEM MAINTENANCE conditions: expense. The sensor OA is located on the front of the 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure vehicle. ference, and Information: To keep the system operating properly, be 2. This device must accept any interfer- This equipment complies with FCC radia- sure to observe the following: ence received, including interference tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- • Always keep the sensor area of the front that may cause undesired operation. trolled environment. This equipment bumper/emblem clean. should be installed and operated with FCC Warning • Do not strike or damage the areas minimum distance of 20 cm between the around the sensor. Changes or modifications not expressly radiator and your body. approved by the party responsible for • Do not cover or attach stickers or similar The transmitter must not be co-located or compliance could void the user’s authority objects on the front bumper near the operating in conjunction with any other an- to operate the equipment. sensor area. This could cause failure or tenna or transmitter. malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-97 AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION (if so equipped) For Canada • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection This device complies with Industry Canada system does not function in all driv- license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation ing, traffic, weather and road is subject to the following two conditions: conditions. 1. This device must not cause interference, The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of 2. This device must accept any interfer- a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in ence, including interference that may the traveling lane or with a pedestrian cause undesired operation of the ahead in the traveling lane. device. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi- uses a radar sensor located on the front of tions suivantes: the vehicle OB to measure the distance to 1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For brouillage, LSD3634 pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian De- et tection system uses a camera installed be- WARNING hind the windshield OA in addition to the 2. l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter radar sensor. tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, Failure to follow the warnings and in- même si le brouillage est susceptible structions for proper use of the AEB d’en compromettre le with Pedestrian Detection system fonctionnnement. could result in serious injury or death. • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.

5-98 Starting and driving 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so equipped) 2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator (if so equipped) 3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light The AEB system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between6–37mph (10 – 60 km/h). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.

LSD3996 Vehicle information display AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION

Starting and driving 5-99 If the driver does not take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red and white) in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) and an audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system applies harder braking automatically. While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating properly. NOTE: The vehicle’s brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the conse- LSD3997 quences if a collision should be unavoid- Trip computer able. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will function later or will not function. 5-100 Starting and driving The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: • When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a collision. • When the accelerator pedal is depressed. • When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead. If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

LSD3994 TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF

Starting and driving 5-101 Perform the following steps to enable or disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. For vehicles with the Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped): 1. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is automatically enabled. 2. Push the Drive Systems OFF switch once to disable the AEB with Pedestrian De- tection system. When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the AEB with Pedes- LSD4046 trian Detection system warning light illuminates.

5-102 Starting and driving NOTE: • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection – For pedestrian detection, the AEB • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following with Pedestrian Detection system system will be automatically turned on objects: will not function when the vehicle when the engine is restarted. – Small pedestrians (including is driven at speeds over approxi- • The I-FCW system is integrated into the small children), animals and mately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. cyclists. approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). There is not a separate selection in the – Pedestrians in wheelchairs or us- • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection vehicle information display for the ing mobile transport such as system will not function for pedestri- I-FCW system. When the AEB system is scooters, child-operated toys, or ans in darkness or in tunnels, even if turned off, the I-FCW system is also skateboards. there is street lighting in the area. turned off. – Pedestrians who are seated or • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN otherwise not in a full upright system may not function if the vehicle ahead is narrow (for example, a DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS standing or walking position. – Oncoming vehicles motorcycle). • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection WARNING – Crossing vehicles system may not function if the speed – Obstacles on the roadside Listed below are the system limitations difference between the two vehicles for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection is too small. system. Failure to operate the vehicle in system has some performance • The radar sensor AEB with Pedes- accordance with these system limita- limitations. trian Detection system may not tions could result in serious injury or – If a stationary vehicle is in the ve- function properly or detect a vehicle death. hicle’s path, the AEB with Pedes- ahead in the following conditions: • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection trian Detection system will not – Poor visibility (conditions such as system cannot detect all vehicles or function when the vehicle is rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand- pedestrians under all conditions. driven at speeds over approxi- storms, and road spray from other mately 50 mph (80 km/h). vehicles) – Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

Starting and driving 5-103 – Driving on a bumpy road surface, • The system performance may de- such as an uneven dirt road. grade in the following conditions: – If dirt, ice, snow or other material – The vehicle is driven on a slippery is covering the radar sensor area. road. – Interference by other radar – The vehicle is driven on a slope. sources. – Excessively heavy baggage is – The camera area of the windshield loaded in the rear seat or the trunk is fogged up, or covered with dirt, room of your vehicle. water drops, ice, snow, etc. • The system is designed to automati- – Strong light (for example, sunlight cally check the sensor’s (radar and or high beams from oncoming ve- camera) functionality, within certain hicles) enters the front camera. limitations. The system may not de- Strong light causes the area tect blockage of sensor areas cov- around the pedestrian to be cast ered by ice, snow or stickers, for ex- in a shadow, making it difficult to ample. In these cases, the system see. may not be able to warn the driver – A sudden change in brightness properly. Be sure that you check, occurs. (For example, when the clean and clear sensor areas vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a regularly. shaded area or lightning flashes.) • In some road and traffic conditions, – The poor contrast of a person to the AEB with Pedestrian Detection the background, such as having system may unexpectedly apply par- clothing color or pattern which is tial braking. When acceleration is similar to the background. necessary, depress the accelerator – The pedestrian’s profile is partially pedal to override the system. obscured or unidentifiable due to • Excessive noise will interfere with the the pedestrian transporting lug- warning chime sound, and the chime gage, wearing bulky or very loose- may not be heard. fitting clothing or accessories.

5-104 Starting and driving Condition A: In the following conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically: • The radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source. • The camera area of the windshield is misted or frozen. • Strong light is shining from the front. • The cabin temperature is over approximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight. • The camera area of the windshield glass is continuously covered with dirt, etc. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically. NOTE: When the inside of the windshield on the camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after LSD3998 the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a Vehicle information display NISSAN dealer. SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

Starting and driving 5-105 Condition B: When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be canceled, the chime will sound and the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Dis- abled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take: When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display. If the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3999 Trip computer

5-106 Starting and driving Condition C: Condition D When the radar sensor of the front bumper When driving on roads with limited road is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is structures or buildings (for example, long obstructed, the AEB with Pedestrian Detec- bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to tion system will automatically be canceled. long walls), the system may illuminate the The chime will sound and the “Forward system warning light and display the “For- Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle message. information display. Action to take: Action to take: When the above driving conditions no lon- If the warning message appears, stop the ger exist, turn the system back on. vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine NOTE: LSD3916 If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection off. When the radar signal is temporarily SYSTEM MALFUNCTION interrupted, clean the sensor area of the system stops working, the I-FCW sys- front bumper and restart the engine. If the tem will also stop working. If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled tem malfunctions, it will be turned off auto- Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” matically, a chime will sound, and the AEB warning message continues to be dis- with Pedestrian Detection system warning played, have the system checked. It is rec- light (orange) will illuminate in the vehicle ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer information display (if so equipped). for this service. Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Starting and driving 5-107 • Do not cover or attach stickers, or install FCC Warning any accessory near the sensors. This Changes or modifications not expressly could block sensor signals and/or cause approved by the party responsible for failure or malfunction. compliance could void the user’s authority • Do not attach metallic objects near the to operate the equipment. radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. For Canada • Do not place reflective materials, such as Model: ARS4–B white paper or a mirror, on the instru- IC: 4135A-ARS4B ment panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's FCC ID: OAYARS4B detection capability. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC • Do not alter, remove or paint the front Rules and with Industry Canada licence- bumper. Before customizing or restoring exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- LSD3634 the front bumper, it is recommended that ject to the following two conditions: SYSTEM MAINTENANCE you visit a NISSAN dealer. 1. This device may not cause interference, and The radar sensor is located on the front of Radio frequency statement the vehicle OB . The camera is located on 2. This device must accept any interfer- the upper side of the windshield OA . For USA ence received, including interference To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection FCC ID OAYARS4B that may cause undesired operation of the device. system operating properly, be sure to ob- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC serve the following: Rules. Operation is subject to the following Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR • Always keep the sensor areas of the front two conditions: d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- bumper/emblem and windshield clean. eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation 1. This device may not cause harmful interest autorisée aux deux conditions • Do not strike or damage the areas ference, and around the sensors (e.g., bumper, suivantes: windshield). 2. This device must accept any interfer- 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil- ence received, including interference lage, et that may cause undesired operation.

5-108 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter The I-FCW system can help alert the driver tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, when there is a sudden braking of a second même si le brouillage est susceptible vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. ahead in the same lane. Radio frequency radiation exposure The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor OA information: located on the front of the vehicle to mea- This equipment complies with FCC and IC sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in radiation exposure limits set forth for an the same lane. uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or LSD2710 operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies Failure to follow the warnings and in- pour un environnement non contrôlé. structions for proper use of the I-FCW system could result in serious injury or Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé death. avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance • The I-FCW system can help warn the entre la source de rayonnement et votre driver before a collision occurs but corps. will not avoid a collision. It is the driv- FCC Notice er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive Changes or modifications not expressly safely and be in control of the vehicle approved by the party responsible for at all times. compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-109 LSD4000 Vehicle information display

5-110 Starting and driving 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so equipped) 2. AEB system warning light

LSD4136 Trip computer

Starting and driving 5-111 LSD2263 I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator in the vehicle information display (if so equipped), and sounding an audible alert.

5-112 Starting and driving Perform the following steps to turn the I-FCW system ON or OFF. For vehicles equipped with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

LSD3994 TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/OFF

Starting and driving 5-113 For vehicles equipped with the Drive Sys- tems OFF switch (if so equipped): 1. The I-FCW system is automatically enabled. 2. Push the Drive Systems OFF switch once to disable the I-FCW system. When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates. NOTE: • The I-FCW system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. • The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB system (if so equipped). There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

LSD4046

5-114 Starting and driving LSD2312 Illustration A I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Starting and driving 5-115 LSD2265 Illustration B WARNING • The radar sensor does not detect the • The radar sensor may not detect a following objects: vehicle ahead in the following Listed below are the system limitations – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles conditions: for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate in the roadway – Snow or heavy rain the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- – Oncoming vehicles – Dirt, ice, snow or other material ous injury or death. – Crossing vehicles covering the radar sensor. • The I-FCW system cannot detect all • (Illustration A) The I-FCW system – Interference by other radar vehicles under all conditions. does not function when a vehicle sources. ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a – Snow or road spray from traveling motorcycle. vehicles. – Driving in a tunnel

5-116 Starting and driving – (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed. – (Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed. – (Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. • The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly. • Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-117 LSD2266 Illustration C

5-118 Starting and driving LSD2313 Illustration D

Starting and driving 5-119 Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume automatically. Condition B When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the I-FCW system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

LSD3998 Vehicle information display SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

5-120 Starting and driving Action to take: When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display. If the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Condition C When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the I-FCW system will automatically be cancelled. The chime will sound and the “Forward Driving Aids Tem- porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

LSD3999 Trip computer

Starting and driving 5-121 Action to take: Action to take If the warning message appears, stop the If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine gine off and restart the engine. If the warn- off. When the radar signal is temporarily ing light continues to illuminate, have the interrupted, clean the sensor area of the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended front bumper and restart the engine. If the that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled service. Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition D LSD3916 When driving on roads with limited road SYSTEM MALFUNCTION structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be long walls), the system may illuminate the turned off automatically, a chime will system warning light (orange) and display sound, the AEB system warning light (or- the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Dis- ange) will illuminate and the warning mes- abled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s sage [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle Manual” warning message. information display (if so equipped). Action to take When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on. NOTE: If the AEB system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working. 5-122 Starting and driving • Do not attach metallic objects near the This equipment has been tested and found sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could to comply with the limits for a Class A digi- cause failure or malfunction. tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC • Do not alter, remove or paint the front Rules. These limits are designed to provide bumper. Before customizing or restoring reasonable protection against harmful in- the front bumper, it is recommended that terference when the equipment is oper- you visit a NISSAN dealer. ated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radi- Radio frequency statement ate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the FCC Notice instruction manual, may cause harmful in- For USA terference to radio communications. Op- eration of this equipment in a residential This device complies with part 15 of the FCC area is likely to cause harmful interference Rules. LSD2710 in which case the user will be required to Operation is subject to the following two correct the interference at his own SYSTEM MAINTENANCE conditions: expense. The sensor OA is located behind the lower 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure grille of the front bumper. ference, and Information: To keep the system operating properly, be 2. This device must accept any interfer- This equipment complies with FCC radia- sure to observe the following: ence received, including interference tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- • Always keep the sensor area of the front that may cause undesired operation. trolled environment. This equipment bumper/emblem clean. should be installed and operated with FCC Warning • Do not strike or damage the areas minimum distance of 20 cm between the around the sensor. Changes or modifications not expressly radiator and your body. approved by the party responsible for • Do not cover or attach stickers or similar The transmitter must not be co-located or compliance could void the user’s authority objects on the front bumper near the operating in conjunction with any other an- to operate the equipment. sensor area. This could cause failure or tenna or transmitter. malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-123 INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) (if so equipped)

For Canada WARNING The I–DA system helps alert the driver if the This device complies with Industry Canada system detects a lack of attention or driv- license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation Failure to follow the warnings and in- ing fatigue. is subject to the following two conditions: structions for proper use of the I-DA The system monitors driving style and system could result in serious injury or 1. This device must not cause interference, steering behavior over a period of time, death. and it detects changes from the normal 2. This device must accept any interfer- • The I–DA system is only a warning to pattern. If the system detects that driver ence, including interference that may inform the driver of a potential lack attention is decreasing over a period of cause undesired operation of the of driver attention or drowsiness. It time, the system uses audible and visual device. will not steer the vehicle or prevent warnings to suggest that the driver take a L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi- loss of control. break. tions suivantes: • The I–DA system does not detect and provide an alert of the driver’s lack of 1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de attention or fatigue in every brouillage, situation. et • It is the driver’s responsibility to: 2. l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter • stay alert, tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, • drive safely, même si le brouillage est susceptible • keep the vehicle in the traveling d’en compromettre le lane, fonctionnnement. • be in control of the vehicle at all times, • avoid driving when tired, • avoid distractions (texting, etc.).

5-124 Starting and driving The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip. The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from ON to OFF and back on.

LSD3545 INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM OPERATION If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message “Take a break?” appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-125 Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I–DA system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display and press the OK button. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Driver Attention Alert” and press the OK button. NOTE: The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted. INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the I–DA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. • The I-DA system may not operate LSD3693 properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions: HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE – Poor road conditions such as an INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS uneven road surface or pot holes. (I-DA) SYSTEM – Strong side wind. 5-126 Starting and driving – If you have adopted a sporty driv- Action to take ing style with higher cornering Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the speeds or higher rates of vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine acceleration. off and restart the engine. If the system – Frequent lane changes or warning message continues to appear, changes to vehicle speed. have the system checked. It is recom- • The I–DA system will not provide an mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for alert in the following conditions: this service. – Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph (60 km/h). – Short lapses of attention. – Instantaneous distractions such as dropping an object. LSD3563 System malfunction If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, the system warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically.

Starting and driving 5-127 BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

CAUTION Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient • Recirculating the cool air in the cabin Driving Tips to help you achieve the most when the A/C is on reduces cooling During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), fuel economy from your vehicle. load. follow these recommendations to ob- 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake 4. Drive at Economical Speeds and tain maximum engine performance Pedal Application Distances and ensure the future reliability and • Avoid rapid starts and stops. economy of your new vehicle. Failure to • Observing the speed limit and not ex- follow these recommendations may • Use smooth, gentle accelerator and ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where le- result in shortened engine life and re- brake application whenever possible. gally allowed) can improve fuel effi- duced engine performance. • Maintain constant speed while com- ciency due to reduced aerodynamic muting and coast whenever possible. drag. • Avoid driving for long periods at constant • Maintaining a safe following distance speed, either fast or slow, and do not run 2. Maintain Constant Speed behind other vehicles reduces unnec- the engine over 4,000 rpm. • Look ahead to try and anticipate and essary braking. • Do not accelerate at full throttle in any minimize stops. • Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate gear. • Synchronizing your speed with traffic changes in speed permits reduced • Avoid quick starts. lights allows you to reduce your num- braking and smooth acceleration • Avoid hard braking as much as possible. ber of stops. changes. • Maintaining a steady speed can mini- • Select a gear range suitable to road mize red light stops and improve fuel conditions. efficiency. 5. Use Cruise Control 3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher • Using cruise control during highway Vehicle Speeds driving helps maintain a steady speed. • Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more • Cruise control is particularly effective efficient to open windows to cool the in providing fuel savings when driving vehicle due to reduced engine load. on flat terrains. • Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle 6. Plan for the Shortest Route due to increased aerodynamic drag. • Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time. 5-128 Starting and driving INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

7. Avoid Idling • Keep your engine tuned up. • Shutting off your engine when safe for • Follow the recommended scheduled stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves maintenance. fuel and reduces emissions. • Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres- 8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. • Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising • Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im- speed through the toll and avoid stop- proper alignment increases tire wear and ping and starting. lowers fuel economy. • Use the recommended viscosity engine 9. Winter Warm Up oil. For additional information, see “Engine • Limit idling time to minimize impact to oil and oil filter recommendations” fuel economy. (P. 10-7). • Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to ef- fectively circulate the engine oil before driving. • Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling. 10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool • Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible. • When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.

Starting and driving 5-129 PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-130 Starting and driving POWER STEERING

move the vehicle forward until the WARNING erations that could cause the power steer- curb side wheel gently touches the ing system to overheat. curb. • If the engine is not running or is You may hear a sound when the steering • HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB O2 : turned off while driving, the power wheel is operated quickly. However, this is Turn the wheels away from the curb assist for the steering will not work. not a malfunction. and move the vehicle back until the Steering will be harder to operate. • When the power steering warning If the power steering warning light illumi- curb side wheel gently touches the nates while the engine is running, it may curb. light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for indicate the power steering system is not • HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO functioning properly and may need servic- CURB 3 : the steering.You will still have control O of the vehicle but the steering will be ing. Have the power steering system Turn the wheels toward the side of the harder to operate. Have the power checked. It is recommended that you visit a road so the vehicle will move away steering system checked. It is recom- NISSAN dealer for this service. from the center of the road if it moves. mended that you visit a NISSAN When the power steering warning light illu- 4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK po- dealer for this service. minates with the engine running, there will sition and remove the key from the be no power assist for the steering but you The power steering system is designed to vehicle. will still have control of the vehicle. At this provide power assist while driving to oper- time, greater steering effort is required to ate the steering wheel with light force. operate the steering wheel, especially in When the steering wheel is operated re- sharp turns and at low speeds. peatedly or continuously while parking or For additional information, see “Power driving at a very low speed, the power as- steering warning light” (P. 2-19). sist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering wheel op- Starting and driving 5-131 BRAKE SYSTEM

The brake system has two separate hy- WARNING Parking brake break-in draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, Break in the parking brake shoes whenever you will still have braking at two wheels. • While driving on a slippery surface, the stopping effect of the parking brake is be careful when braking, accelerat- weakened or whenever the parking brake BRAKE PRECAUTIONS ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking shoes and/or drums/rotors (if so or accelerating could cause the equipped) are replaced, in order to assure Vacuum assisted brakes wheels to skid and result in an the best braking performance. The brake booster aids braking by using accident. engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you • If the engine is not running or is This procedure is described in the vehicle can stop the vehicle by depressing the turned off while driving, the power service manual. It is recommended that brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- assist for the brakes will not work. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. sure on the brake pedal will be required to Braking will be harder. ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer. Wet brakes WARNING When the vehicle is washed or driven Using the brakes through water, the brakes may get wet. As • The ABS is a sophisticated device, but Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal a result, your braking distance will be lon- it cannot prevent accidents resulting while driving. This will overheat the brakes, ger and the vehicle may pull to one side from careless or dangerous driving wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce during braking. techniques. It can help maintain ve- gas mileage. hicle control during braking on slip- To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe pery surfaces. Remember that stop- To help reduce brake wear and to prevent speed while lightly pressing the brake ping distances on slippery surfaces the brakes from overheating, reduce speed pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until will be longer than on normal sur- and downshift to a lower gear before going the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving faces even with ABS. Stopping dis- down a slope or long grade. Overheated the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes tances may also be longer on rough, brakes may reduce braking performance function correctly. gravel or snow covered roads, or if and could result in loss of vehicle control. you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.

5-132 Starting and driving • Tire type and condition may also af- Using the system instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock fect braking effectiveness. Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. assistance. – When replacing tires, install the Depress the brake pedal with firm steady specified size of tires on all four pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The If the ABS warning light illuminates during wheels. Anti-lock Braking System will operate to the self-test or while driving, have the ve- – When installing a spare tire, make prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer hicle checked. It is recommended that you sure that it is the proper size and the vehicle to avoid obstacles. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For ad- WARNING Normal operation ditional information, see “Tire and Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper- Loading Information label” ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-10 (P. 8-29). may result in increased stopping distances. km/h). The speed varies according to road – For additional information, see conditions. “Wheels and tires” (P. 8-27). Self-test feature When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in- rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres- do not lock during hard braking or when cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps, sure. This action is similar to pumping the braking on slippery surfaces. The system hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa- detects the rotation speed at each wheel computer has a built-in diagnostic feature tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- that tests the system each time you start from under the hood or feel a vibration vent each wheel from locking and sliding. the engine and move the vehicle at a low from the actuator when it is operating. This By preventing each wheel from locking, the speed in forward or reverse. When the self- is normal and indicates that the ABS is op- system helps the driver maintain steering test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise erating properly. However, the pulsation control and helps to minimize swerving and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. may indicate that road conditions are haz- and spinning on slippery surfaces. This is normal and does not indicate a mal- ardous and extra care is required while function. If the computer senses a mal- driving. function, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the

Starting and driving 5-133 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

BRAKE ASSIST The VDC system uses various sensors to When the VDC system operates, the monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. indicator light in the instrument panel When the force applied to the brake pedal Under certain driving conditions, the VDC flashes so note the following: exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is system helps to perform the following activated generating greater braking force • The road may be slippery or the system functions: than a conventional brake booster even may determine some action is required with light pedal force. • Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel to help keep the vehicle on the steered slip on one slipping drive wheel so power path. WARNING is transferred to a non-slipping drive • You may feel a pulsation in the brake wheel on the same axle. pedal and hear a noise or vibration from The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist • Controls brake pressure and engine out- under the hood. This is normal and indi- braking operation and is not a collision put to reduce drive wheel slip based on cates that the VDC system is working warning or avoidance device. It is the vehicle speed (traction control function). properly. driver’s responsibility to stay alert, • Controls brake pressure at individual • Adjust your speed and driving to the road drive safely and be in control of the ve- wheels and engine output to help the conditions. hicle at all times. driver maintain control of the vehicle in For additional information, see “Slip indica- the following conditions: tor light” (P. 2-20) and ”Vehicle Dynamic – Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” (P. 2-20). the steered path despite increased steering input) If a malfunction occurs in the system, the – Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to indicator light comes on in the instru- certain road or driving conditions) ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are on. The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it can- The VDC OFF switch, or the vehicle infor- not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv- mation display, is used to turn off the VDC ing situations. system. The indicator light and the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light illuminate to indicate the VDC system is off.

5-134 Starting and driving When the VDC OFF switch, or the vehicle WARNING • If engine control related parts are not information display, is used to turn off the NISSAN recommended or are ex- system, the VDC system still operates to • The VDC system is designed to help tremely deteriorated, the indi- prevent one drive wheel from slipping by the driver maintain stability but does cator light may illuminate. transferring power to a non-slipping drive not prevent accidents due to abrupt • When driving on extremely inclined wheel. The indicator light flashes if this steering operation at high speeds or surfaces such as higher banked cor- occurs. All other VDC functions are off and by careless or dangerous driving ners, the VDC system may not oper- the indicator light will not flash. techniques. Reduce vehicle speed ate properly and the indicator The VDC system is automatically reset to and be especially careful when driv- light may flash or illuminate. Do not on when the ignition switch is placed in the ing and cornering on slippery sur- drive on these types of roads. faces and always drive carefully. OFF position then back to the ON position. • When driving on an unstable surface • Do not modify the vehicle's suspen- The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea- such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or sion. If suspension parts such as ture that tests the system each time you ramp, the indicator light may shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- start the engine and move the vehicle for- flash or illuminate. This is not a mal- bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When function. Restart the engine after not NISSAN recommended for your the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk driving onto a stable surface. vehicle or are extremely deterio- noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake rated, the VDC system may not oper- • If wheels or tires other than the pedal. This is normal and is not an indica- ate properly. This could adversely af- NISSAN recommended ones are tion of a malfunction. fect vehicle handling performance, used, the VDC system may not oper- and the indicator light may flash ate properly and the indicator or illuminate. light may flash or illuminate. • If brake related parts such as brake • The VDC system is not a substitute pads, rotors and calipers are not for winter tires or tire chains on a NISSAN recommended or are ex- snow covered road. tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys- BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION tem may not operate properly and the indicator light may During braking while driving through turns, illuminate. the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the front and rear wheels depending on the radius of the turn. Starting and driving 5-135 WARNING • If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are ex- • The VDC system is designed to help tremely deteriorated, the indi- the driver maintain stability but does cator light may illuminate. not prevent accidents due to abrupt • When driving on extremely inclined steering operation at high speeds or surfaces such as higher banked cor- by careless or dangerous driving ners, the VDC system may not oper- techniques. Reduce vehicle speed ate properly and the indicator and be especially careful when driv- light may flash or illuminate. Do not ing and cornering on slippery sur- drive on these types of roads. faces and always drive carefully. • When driving on an unstable surface • Do not modify the vehicle's suspen- such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or sion. If suspension parts such as ramp, the indicator light may shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- flash or illuminate. This is not a mal- bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are function. Restart the engine after not NISSAN recommended for your driving onto a stable surface. vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not oper- • If wheels or tires other than the ate properly. This could adversely af- NISSAN recommended ones are fect vehicle handling performance, used, the VDC system may not oper- and the indicator light may flash ate properly and the indicator or illuminate. light may flash or illuminate. • If brake related parts such as brake • The VDC system is not a substitute pads, rotors and calipers are not for winter tires or tire chains on a NISSAN recommended or are ex- snow covered road. tremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may illuminate.

5-136 Starting and driving CHASSIS CONTROL (if so equipped)

When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is turned off, the I–TC is also turned off. If the chassis control warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the I-TC is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. For additional information, see “Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23). When the I–TC is operated and the Chassis Control mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the I–TC graphics are LSD4090 shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see “Vehicle in- The chassis control is an electric control INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL formation display” (P. 2-23). module that includes the following (I-TC) functions: This system senses driving based on the WARNING • Intelligent Trace Control driver’s steering and acceleration/braking • Intelligent Engine Brake The I–TC may not be effective depend- patterns, and controls brake pressure at ing on the driving condition. Always • Active Ride Control individual wheels to aid tracing at corners drive carefully and attentively. • Automatic brake hold function and help smooth vehicle response. When the I–TC is operating, you may feel a For additional information see, Intelligent The I–TC can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a Trace Control (I-TC) (P. 5-137), Intelligent En- (disabled) through the vehicle information noise. This is normal and indicates that the gine Brake (I-EB) (P. 5-138), Active Ride Con- display “Chassis Control” page. For addi- I–TC is operating properly. trol (ARC) (P. 5-138) and Automatic brake tional information, see “Vehicle information hold function (P. 5-25). display” (P. 2-23). You may also feel deceleration when the I-TC is operating. However, this is not a malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-137 Even if the I–TC is turned OFF, some func- When the I-EB is operated at corners and When the ARC is operated and the Chassis tions will remain on to assist the driver (for the Chassis Control mode is selected in the Control mode is selected in the vehicle in- example, avoidance scenes). vehicle information display, the I-EB graph- formation display, the ARC graphics are ics are shown in the vehicle information shown in the vehicle information display. INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE (I-EB) display. For additional information, see “Ve- For additional information, see “Vehicle in- The I-EB function adds subtle deceleration hicle information display” (P. 2-23). formation display” (P. 2-23). by controlling the Continuously Variable When the ARC is operating, you may hear Transmission gear ratio, depending on the WARNING noise and sense slight deceleration. This is cornering condition calculated from driv- The I-EB may not be effective depend- normal and indicates that the ARC is oper- er's steering input and plural sensors. This ating properly. benefit is for easier traceability and less ing on driving conditions. Always drive workload of adjusting speed with braking carefully and attentively. If the chassis control warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it at corners. When the I-EB is operating, the needle of may indicate that the ARC is not function- the tachometer will rise up and you may If the chassis control warning message ap- ing properly. Have the system checked by a hear an engine noise. This is normal and pears in the vehicle information display, it NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. For ad- indicates that the I-EB is operating may indicate that the I-EB is not function- ditional information, see “Vehicle informa- properly. ing properly. Have the system checked by a tion display” (P. 2-23). NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. For additional information, see “Vehicle informa- ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC) tion display” (P. 2-23). This system senses upper body motion (based on wheel speed information) and The I-EB also adds subtle deceleration with controls engine torque and four wheel gear ratio control according to driver’s brake pressure. This will enhance ride com- brake pedal operation. fort in effort to restrain uncomfortable up- The I-EB can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF per body movement when passing over (disabled) through the vehicle information undulated road surfaces. When the Vehicle display “Chassis Control” page. For addi- Dynamic Control (VDC) system is turned off, tional information, see “Vehicle information the ARC is also turned off. display” (P. 2-23).

5-138 Starting and driving HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

WARNING The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent • Never rely solely on the hill start as- the vehicle from rolling backwards in the sist system to prevent the vehicle time it takes the driver to release the brake from moving backward on a hill. Al- pedal and apply the accelerator when the ways drive carefully and attentively. vehicle is stopped on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the The hill start assist system will operate au- vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be tomatically under the following conditions: especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure • The transmission is shifted to a forward to prevent the vehicle from rolling or reverse gear. backwards may result in a loss of • The vehicle is stopped completely on a control of the vehicle and possible hill by applying the brake. serious injury or death. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. • The hill start assist system is not de- After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll LSD3923 signed to hold the vehicle at a stand- back and the hill start assist system will The Hill Start Assist function status can be still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal stop operating completely. checked in the Chassis Control mode in the when the vehicle is stopped on a The hill start assist system will not operate vehicle information display (if so equipped). steep hill. Failure to do so may cause when the transmission is shifted to the N For additional information, see “Vehicle in- the vehicle to roll backwards and (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and formation display” (P. 2-23). may result in a collision or serious level road. personal injury. • The hill start assist may not prevent When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) the vehicle from rolling backwards indicator light illuminates in the meter, the on a hill under all load or road condi- hill start assist system will not operate. For tions. Always be prepared to depress additional information, see “Vehicle Dy- the brake pedal to prevent the ve- namic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” hicle from rolling backwards. Failure (P. 2-20). to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-139 REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so equipped)

WARNING • The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving • The RSS is a convenience but it is not objects. Always move slowly. The a substitute for proper parking. system will not detect small objects • The driver is always responsible for below the bumper, and may not de- safety during parking and other ma- tect objects close to the bumper or neuvers. Always look around and on the ground. check that it is safe to do so before • The system may not detect the fol- parking. lowing objects: fluffy objects such as • Read and understand the limitations snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; of the RSS as contained in this sec- thin objects such as rope, wire and tion. The colors of the corner sonar chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects. indicator and the distance guide lines in the rear view indicate differ- If your vehicle sustains damage to the LSD3247 ent distances to the object. bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered The RSS sounds a tone to inform the driver • Inclement weather or ultrasonic causing inaccurate measurement of ob- of obstacles near the bumper. sources such as an automatic car stacles or false alarms. When the “DISPLAY” key is on, the sonar wash, a truck's compressed-air view will automatically appear in the brakes or a pneumatic drill may af- CAUTION touch-screen display. An additional view of fect the function of the system; this the sonar status will appear in the vehicle may include reduced performance or • Excessive noise (such as audio sys- information display (if so equipped) for a false activation. tem volume or an open vehicle win- reference. • This function is designed as an aid to dow) will interfere with the tone and the driver in detecting large station- it may not be heard. ary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

5-140 Starting and driving • Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished. SYSTEM OPERATION The system informs with a visual and audible alert of rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower LSD3246 LSD2137 speeds. When the corner of the vehicle moves The system indicators OA will appear when The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec- closer to an object, the corner sonar indi- the vehicle moves closer to an object. onds when an obstacle is detected by only cator OA appears. When the center of the the corner sensor and the distance does vehicle moves close to an object, the cen- not change. The tone will stop when the ter sonar indicator B appears. obstacle gets away from the vehicle. O When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

Starting and driving 5-141 Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system: For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Sonar” and press the OK button. • Select “Rear Sensor” and press the OK button to turn the sonar system on or off. • Select “Display” to display the parking sensor in the vehicle information display when the sonar system activates. • Select “Range” to change the sonar system distance to “Far,” “Mid” or “Near.”

LSD4001 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE The system is automatically activated SONAR SYSTEM when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

5-142 Starting and driving For vehicles with the RSS OFF switch (if so equipped): 1. The RSS is automatically enabled when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse). 2. Push the RSS OFF switch once to disable the RSS. The indicator light on the RSS switch will not illuminate. The RSS will automatically be turned on when the engine is restarted. SONAR LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. • The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

LSD4002

Starting and driving 5-143 • Inclement weather or ultrasonic SYSTEM TEMPORARILY sources such as an automatic car UNAVAILABLE wash, a truck’s compressed-air When sonar blockage is detected, the sys- brakes or a pneumatic drill may af- tem will be deactivated automatically. fect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or The system is not available until the condi- a false activation. tions no longer exist. • The system is not designed to pre- The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem- vent contact with small or moving porary ambient conditions such as splash- objects. Always move slowly. The ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi- system will not detect small objects tion may also be caused by objects such as below the bumper or on the ground. ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar • The system may not detect the fol- sensors. lowing objects: fluffy objects such as Action to take: LSD3633 snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and When the above conditions no longer exist, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects. the system will resume automatically. The sonar sensors O1 are located on the • The system may not detect objects rear bumper. Always keep the area near at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and the sonar sensors clean. may not detect certain angular or moving objects. The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.

5-144 Starting and driving COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Do not attach stickers (including transpar- FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER ent material), install accessories or apply To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply If the vehicle is to be left outside without additional paint near the sonar sensors. de-icer through the key hole. If the lock antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ- Do not strike or damage the area around becomes frozen, heat the key before in- ing the engine block. Refill before operating the sonar sensors. It is recommended that serting it into the key hole or use the re- the vehicle. For additional information, see you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around mote keyless entry function on the Intelli- “Changing engine coolant” (P. 8-5). the sonar sensors is damaged due to a gent Key. collision. TIRE EQUIPMENT ANTIFREEZE 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to In the winter when it is anticipated that the provide superior performance on dry temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), pavement. However, the performance of check the antifreeze to assure proper win- these tires will be substantially reduced ter protection. For additional information, in snowy and icy conditions. If you oper- see “Engine cooling system” (P. 8-4). ate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & BATTERY SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four If the battery is not fully charged during wheels. It is recommended that you visit extremely cold weather conditions, the a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, battery fluid may freeze and damage the speed rating and availability information. battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, 2. For additional traction on icy roads, the battery should be checked regularly. studded tires may be used. However, This vehicle is equipped with a sealed some states, provinces and territories maintenance free battery. It is recom- prohibit their use. Check local laws be- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for fore installing studded tires. service. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Starting and driving 5-145 SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT • Allow more stopping distance under ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so It is recommended that the following items these conditions. Braking should be equipped) be carried in the vehicle during winter: started sooner than on dry Engine block heaters are used to assist • A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- pavement. with cold temperature starting. move ice and snow from the windows • Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. The engine block heater should be used and wiper blades. when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) • A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the • Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). or lower. jack to give it firm support. These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch • A shovel to dig the vehicle out of WARNING snowdrifts. of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on • Do not use your engine block heater • Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield- the ice, and avoid any sudden steer- with an ungrounded electrical sys- washer fluid reservoir. ing maneuvers. tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE • Do not use the cruise control on slip- be seriously injured by an electrical pery roads. shock if you use an ungrounded WARNING • Snow can trap dangerous exhaust connection. gases under your vehicle. Keep snow • Disconnect and properly store the • Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), clear of the exhaust pipe and from engine block heater cord before very cold snow or ice can be slick and around your vehicle. starting the engine. Damage to the very hard to drive on. The vehicle will cord could result in an electrical have much less traction or “grip” un- PARKING BRAKE shock and can cause serious injury. der these conditions. Try to avoid When parking in an area where the outside • Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged driving on wet ice until the road is temperature is below 32°F (0°C), do not ap- extension cord rated for at least 10 A. salted or sanded. ply the parking brake to prevent it from Plug the extension cord into a • Whatever the condition, drive with freezing. For safe parking: Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro- caution. Accelerate and slow down • Place the shift lever in the P (Park) tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. with care. If accelerating or down- position. Failure to use the proper extension shifting too fast, the drive wheels will • Securely block the wheels. cord or a grounded outlet can result lose even more traction. in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury. 5-146 Starting and driving To use the engine block heater: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord. 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet. 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least2-4hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-147 MEMO

5-148 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 Push starting ...... 6-12 Emergency engine shut off ...... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats...... 6-12 Flat tire ...... 6-3 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-13 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Towing recommended by NISSAN ...... 6-13 (TPMS)...... 6-3 Vehicle recovery Changing a flat tire ...... 6-4 (freeing a stuck vehicle) ...... 6-14 Jump starting ...... 6-10 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

• Turn signals do not work when the To shut off the engine in an emergency hazard warning flasher lights are on. situation while driving, perform the following procedure: The flashers will operate with the ignition – Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch placed in any position. switch three consecutive times in less Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use than 1.5 seconds, or of the hazard warning flasher switch – Push and hold the push-button ignition while driving. switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING • If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. • Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

6-2 In case of emergency FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING • If the low tire pressure warning light • When using a wheel without the SYSTEM (TPMS) illuminates while driving, avoid sud- TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the TPMS. It den steering maneuvers or abrupt will not function and the low tire monitors tire pressure of all tires except the braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull pressure warning light will flash for spare. When the low tire pressure warning off the road to a safe location and approximately 1 minute. The light will light is lit and the “Tire Pressure Low — Add stop the vehicle as soon as possible. remain on after 1 minute. Have your Air” warning appears in the vehicle infor- Driving with underinflated tires may tires replaced and/or TPMS system mation display (if so equipped), one or permanently damage the tires and reset as soon as possible. It is recom- more of your tires is significantly under- increase the likelihood of tire failure. mended that you visit a NISSAN inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with Serious vehicle damage could occur dealer for these services. low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and and may lead to an accident and • Replacing tires with those not origi- warn you of it by the low tire pressure warn- could result in serious personal in- nally specified by NISSAN could af- ing light. This system will activate only jury. Check the tire pressure for all fect the proper operation of the when the vehicle is driven at speeds above four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to TPMS. 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional informa- the recommended COLD tire pres- • Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tion, see “Warning lights, indicator lights sure shown on the Tire and Loading tire sealant into the tires, as this may and audible reminders” (P. 2-10), and “Tire Information label to turn the low tire cause a malfunction of the tire pres- Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5). pressure warning light OFF. If the sure sensors. light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire • If the light still comes on while driving WARNING may be flat or the TPMS may be mal- after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be • Radio waves could adversely affect functioning. If you have a flat tire, re- malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, electric medical equipment. Those place it with a spare tire as soon as replace it with a spare tire as soon as who use a pacemaker should contact possible. If no tire is flat and all tires possible. If no tire is flat and all tires the electric medical equipment are properly inflated, have the ve- are properly inflated, it is recom- manufacturer for the possible influ- hicle checked. It is recommended mended that you visit a NISSAN ences before use. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. dealer for this service.

In case of emergency 6-3 CHANGING A FLAT TIRE WARNING If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions • Make sure the parking brake is se- below: curely applied and the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) is Stopping the vehicle shifted into P (Park). 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and • Never change tires when the vehicle away from traffic. is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. This is hazardous. • Never change tires if oncoming traf- 3. Park on a level surface and apply the fic is close to your vehicle. Wait for parking brake. Move the shift lever to P professional road assistance. (Park). 4. Turn off the engine. LCE2142 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and A. Blocks to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. B. Flat tire 6. Have all passengers get out of the ve- Blocking wheels hicle and stand in a safe place, away Place suitable blocks at both the front and from traffic and clear of the vehicle. back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency LCE2428 LCE2429 LDI3564 Getting the spare tire and tools 3. Carefully remove the wheel cover to 4. Remove the jacking rod OA , the jack OB , avoid potential damage to the side trim. and wheel nut wrench C from the stor- 1. Open the liftgate. O age cover OD . 2. Lift the flaps on the wheel cover to ac- 5. Remove the storage cover D to access cess the spare tire. O the spare tire.

In case of emergency 6-5 To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod O1 as illustrated. Apply cloth O2 between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover. Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface.

SCE0913 SCE0630 6. To loosen the bolt, turn Removing wheel cover (if so counterclockwise. equipped) 7. Once loosened remove the bolt, and remove the spare tire. CAUTION Do not use your hands to pry off wheel CAUTION caps or wheel covers. Doing so could Do not touch floor metal directly. Doing result in personal injury. so could result in any burns.

6-6 In case of emergency • Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. • Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. • Never use blocks on or under the jack. • Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials. • Do not allow passengers to stay in LPD2451 the vehicle while it is on the jack. Jacking up vehicle and removing • Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the ve- the damaged tire hicle to move. WARNING • Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. • Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

In case of emergency 6-7 LCE2059 WCE0048 Always refer to the proper illustrations for 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up Type A (if so equipped) the correct placement and jack-up points point as illustrated so the top of the jack Installing the spare tire for your specific vehicle model and jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface type. Align the jack head between the 2 between the wheel and hub. Carefully read the caution label attached notches in the front or the rear as 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and to the jack body and the following in- shown. Also fit the groove of the jack tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. structions. head between the notches as shown. 1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by The jack should be used on firm and 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten turning counterclockwise with the wheel level ground. wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated ( A , B , C , D ) until nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack O O O O they are tight. nuts until the tire is off the ground. lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

6-8 In case of emergency 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated nuts securely in the sequence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ). Lower the vehicle (OA , OB , OC , OD , OE ). Lower the vehicle completely. completely.

WARNING • Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. • Do not use oil or grease on the wheel WCE0056 studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. Type B (if so equipped) 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface • Retighten the wheel nuts when the between the wheel and hub. vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and etc.). tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten nuts to the specified torque with a wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the torque wrench. sequence illustrated ( A , B , C , D , E ) O O O O O Wheel nut tightening torque: until they are tight. 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval.

In case of emergency 6-9 JUMP STARTING

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD To start your engine with a booster battery, • Whenever working on or near a bat- pressure. the instructions and precautions below tery, always wear suitable eye pro- COLD pressure: After vehicle has been must be followed. tectors (for example, goggles or in- parked for 3 hours or more or driven less dustrial safety spectacles) and than 1 mile (1.6 km). WARNING remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the COLD tire pressures are shown on the • If done incorrectly, jump starting can battery when jump starting. Tire and Loading Information label. lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also • Do not attempt to jump start a frozen 5. Securely store the jack and the tool kit in damage your vehicle. battery. It could explode and cause its storage area. • Explosive hydrogen gas is always serious injury. 6. Place the spare tire cover and liftgate present in the vicinity of the battery. • The automatic engine cooling fan (if floor carpeting over the jack and tool kit. Keep all sparks and flames away so equipped) may come on at any from the battery. time without warning, even if the ig- 7. Securely store the damaged tire in the nition switch is in the OFF position vehicle. • Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing and the engine is not running. To 8. Close the liftgate. or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a avoid injury, keep hands and other corrosive sulfuric acid solution which objects away from it. WARNING can cause severe burns. If the fluid • Always make sure that the spare tire should come into contact with any- and jacking equipment are properly thing, immediately flush the con- secured after use. Such items can be- tacted area with water. come dangerous projectiles in an ac- • Keep battery out of the reach of cident or sudden stop. children. • The spare tire is designed for emer- • The booster battery must be rated at gency use. For additional informa- 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated tion, see “Wheels and tires” (P. 8-27). battery can damage your vehicle.

6-10 In case of emergency 4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 5. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. LCE2223 6. After starting the engine, carefully dis- WARNING 3. Connect the jumper cables in the se- connect the negative cable and then the quence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ). positive cable. Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage CAUTION to the charging system and cause per- • Always connect positive (+) to posi- sonal injury. tive (+) and negative (−) to body 1. If the booster battery is in another ve- ground (for example, strut mounting hicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring their bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to batteries near each other. the battery. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. • Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift compartment and that the cable lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces- clamps do not contact any other sary electrical systems (lights, heater, air metal. conditioner, etc.). In case of emergency 6-11 PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by a 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for (red) high temperature warning light (if steam or coolant escaping from the ra- • Do not push start this vehicle. The so equipped)), or if you feel a lack of engine diator before opening the hood. (If three-way catalyst may be power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the steam or coolant is escaping, turn off damaged. following steps. the engine.) Do not open the hood fur- • Continuously Variable Transmission ther until no steam or coolant can be (CVT) models cannot be push- WARNING seen. started or tow-started. Attempting • Do not continue to drive if your ve- 4. Open the engine hood. to do so may cause transmission hicle overheats. Doing so could cause damage. engine damage or a vehicle fire. WARNING • To avoid the danger of being scalded, If steam or water is coming from the never remove the coolant reservoir engine, stand clear to prevent getting cap while the engine is still hot. When burned. the coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or possibly causing serious injury. looseness. Also check if the cooling fan • Do not open the hood if steam is is running. The radiator hoses and radia- coming out. tor should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap- or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, ply the parking brake and move the shift stop the engine. lever to P (Park). Do not stop the engine. WARNING 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, windows, move the heater or air condi- jewelry or clothing to come into con- tioner temperature control to maximum tact with, or get caught in, engine belts hot and fan control to high speed. or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

6-12 In case of emergency TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6. After the engine cools down, check the When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin- CAUTION coolant level in the engine coolant res- cial in Canada) and local regulations for ervoir with the engine running. Add cool- towing must be followed. Incorrect towing • When towing, make sure that the ant to the engine coolant reservoir, if equipment could damage your vehicle. transmission, axles, steering system necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It Towing instructions are available from a and powertrain are in working condi- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are tion. If any of these conditions apply, dealer for this service. generally familiar with the applicable laws dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be and procedures for towing. To assure used. proper towing and to prevent accidental • Always attach safety chains before damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom- towing. mends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service For additional information about towing operator carefully read the following your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle precautions: (RV), see “Flat towing” (P. 10-19).

WARNING TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN • Never ride in a vehicle that is being NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle towed. based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi- • Never get under your vehicle after it tional information, refer to the diagrams in has been lifted by a tow truck. this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

In case of emergency 6-13 – Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism). VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

LCE2343 WARNING Two-Wheel Drive models with CAUTION To avoid vehicle damage, serious per- Continuously Variable sonal injury or death when recovering a Transmission (CVT) • Never tow CVT models with the front stuck vehicle: wheels on the ground or four wheels NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be on the ground (forward or back- • Contact a professional towing ser- towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ward), as this may cause serious and vice to recover the vehicle if you have ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed expensive damage to the transmis- any questions regarding the recov- truck as illustrated. sion. If it is necessary to tow the ve- ery procedure. hicle with the rear wheels raised al- • Tow chains or cables must be at- ways use towing dollies under the tached only to main structural mem- front wheels. bers of the vehicle. • When towing CVT models with the • Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to rear wheels on the ground or on tow- tow or free a stuck vehicle. ing dollies:

6-14 In case of emergency • Only use devices specifically de- If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, signed for vehicle recovery and fol- etc., use the following procedure: low the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control • Always pull the recovery device (VDC) system. straight out from the front of the ve- 2. Make sure the area in front and behind hicle. Never pull at an angle. the vehicle is clear of obstructions. • Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle ex- 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to cept the attachment point. clear an area around the front tires. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and etc., use a tow strap or other device de- backward. signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al- • Shift back and forth between R (Re- ways follow the manufacturer's instruc- verse) and D (Drive). tions for the recovery device. • Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion. Rocking a stuck vehicle • Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D WARNING (Drive). • Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. • Do not spin the tires above 34 mph • Do not spin your tires at high speed. (55 km/h). This could cause them to explode 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few and result in serious injury. Parts of tries, contact a professional towing ser- your vehicle could also overheat and vice to remove the vehicle. be damaged.

In case of emergency 6-15 6-16 In case of emergency 7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ...... 7-2 Air fresheners ...... 7-5 Washing ...... 7-2 Floor mats (if so equipped) ...... 7-5 Waxing ...... 7-3 Seatbelts...... 7-6 Removing spots ...... 7-3 Corrosion protection ...... 7-7 Underbody ...... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to Glass ...... 7-3 vehicle corrosion ...... 7-7 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) ...... 7-3 Environmental factors influence the Chromeparts...... 7-3 rate of corrosion ...... 7-7 Tire dressings ...... 7-4 Protect your vehicle from corrosion ...... 7-7 Cleaning interior ...... 7-4 CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of CAUTION • Do not wash the vehicle with strong your vehicle, it is important to take proper household soap, strong chemical de- care of it. • Do not concentrate water spray di- tergents, gasoline or solvents. rectly on the sonar sensors (if so To protect the paint surfaces, wash your • Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- equipped) on the bumper as this will vehicle as soon as you can: light or while the vehicle body is hot, result in damage to the sensors. Do • After a rainfall to prevent possible dam- as the surface may become not use pressure washers capable of age from acid rain. water-spotted. spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274 • After driving on coastal roads. kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of • Avoid using tight-napped or rough • When contaminants such as soot, bird high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi cloths, such as washing mitts. Care droppings, tree sap, metal particles or (8,274 kPa) can result in damage to or must be taken when removing bugs get on the paint surface. removal of paint or graphics. Avoid caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not • When dust or mud builds up on the using a high-pressure washer closer scratched or damaged. surface. than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle. Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, Whenever possible, store or park your ve- Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of keep the nozzle moving and do not clean water. hicle inside a garage or in a covered area. concentrate the water spray on any When it is necessary to park outside, park in one area. Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly a shady area or protect the vehicle with a • Do not use car washes that use acid body cover. vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There- in the detergent. Some car washes, fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Be careful not to scratch the paint sur- especially brushless ones, use some Take care that the drain holes in the lower face when putting on or removing the acid for cleaning. The acid may react edge of the door are open. Spray water body cover. with some plastic vehicle compo- under the body and in the wheel wells to nents, causing them to crack. This loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. WASHING could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to func- A damp chamois can be used to dry the Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty vehicle to avoid water spots. of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us- tion properly. Always check with your ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or car wash to confirm that acid is not general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed used. with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

7-2 Appearance and care WAXING UNDERBODY ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so Regular waxing protects the paint surface In areas where road salt is used in winter, it equipped) and helps retain new vehicle appearance. is necessary to clean the underbody regu- Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge Polishing is recommended to remove larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from dampened in a mild soap solution, espe- built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath- building up and causing the acceleration of cially during winter months in areas where ered appearance before re-applying wax. corrosion on the underbody and suspen- road salt is used. If not removed, road salt A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing sion. Before the winter period and again in can discolor the wheels. the proper product. the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated. • Wax your vehicle only after a thorough CAUTION washing. Follow the instructions supplied GLASS Follow the directions below to avoid with the wax. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and staining or discoloring the wheels: • Do not use a wax containing any abra- dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor- • Do not use a cleaner that uses strong sives, cutting compounds or cleaners mal for glass to become coated with a film acid or alkali contents to clean the that may damage the vehicle finish. after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. wheels. Machine compounding or aggressive pol- Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily • Do not apply wheel cleaners to the ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin- remove this film. wheels when they are hot. The wheel ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. temperature should be the same as CAUTION REMOVING SPOTS ambient temperature. When cleaning the inside of the win- • Rinse the wheel to completely re- Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, dows, do not use sharp-edged tools, move the cleaner within 15 minutes insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based after the cleaner is applied. from the surface of the paint to avoid last- disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- ing damage or staining. Special cleaning CHROME PARTS age the electrical conductors, radio an- products are available at a NISSAN dealer tenna elements or rear window de- Clean all chrome parts regularly with a or any automotive accessory store. It is froster elements. non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain recommended that you visit a NISSAN the finish. dealer for these products.

Appearance and care 7-3 CLEANING INTERIOR

TIRE DRESSINGS Occasionally remove loose dust from the CAUTION interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a NISSAN does not recommend the use of vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe • Never use benzine, thinner or any tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur- similar material. coating to the tires to help reduce discolor- faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap- • Small dirt particles can be abrasive mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a plied to the tires, it may react with the coat- and damaging to leather (if so dry, soft cloth. ing and form a compound. This compound equipped) surfaces and should be re- may come off the tire while driving and Regular care and cleaning is required in moved promptly. Do not use saddle stain the vehicle paint. order to maintain the appearance of the soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, clean- leather (if so equipped). ing fluids, solvents, detergents or If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the ammonia-based cleaners as they following precautions: Before using any fabric protector, read the may damage the leather’s natural • Use a water-based tire dressing. The manufacturer's recommendations. Some finish. coating on the tire dissolves more easily fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. • Never use fabric protectors unless than with an oil-based tire dressing. recommended by the manufacturer. • Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help Use a cloth dampened only with water to • Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on prevent it from entering the tire tread/ clean the meter and gauge lens. meter or gauge lens covers. It may grooves (where it would be difficult to damage the lens cover. remove). WARNING • Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com- steam cleaners) on the seat. This can pletely removed from the tire damage the seat or occupant classifi- tread/grooves. cation sensor. This can also affect the • Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- operation of the air bag system and re- mended by the tire dressing sult in serious personal injury. manufacturer.

7-4 Appearance and care AIR FRESHENERS • Properly position the mats in the Most air fresheners use a solvent that floorwell using the floor mat posi- could affect the vehicle interior. If you use tioning hook. For additional informa- an air freshener, take the following tion, see "Floor mat installation" precautions: (P. 7-6). • Hanging-type air fresheners can cause • Make sure the floor mat does not in- permanent discoloration when they con- terfere with pedal operation. tact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air • Periodically check the floor mats to freshener in a location that allows it to make sure they are properly hang free and not contact an interior installed. surface. • After cleaning the vehicle interior, • Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on check the floor mats to make sure the vents. These products can cause im- they are properly installed. mediate damage and discoloration LAI2105 The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can when spilled on interior surfaces. FLOOR MATS (if so equipped) extend the life of your vehicle carpet and Carefully read and follow the manufactur- make it easier to clean the interior. Mats er's instructions before using the air WARNING should be maintained with regular clean- fresheners. To avoid potential pedal interference ing and replaced if they become exces- that may result in a collision, injury or sively worn. death: • NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards. • Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

Appearance and care 7-5 Floor mat installation WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in floor mat positioning hooks for each seating the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or position varies depending on the vehicle. chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may se- When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, verely weaken the seat belt webbing. follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following: 1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, the shift lever in P (Park) position and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s). LAI2106 2. Secure the grommet holes into the Positioning hooks hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is The illustration shows the location of the properly positioned. floor mat positioning hooks. 3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter- SEAT BELTS fere with pedal operation. With the ignition switch still in the OFF position, the The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping shift lever in the P (Park) position and them with a sponge dampened in a mild with the parking brake applied, fully ap- soap solution. Allow the belts to dry comply and release all pedals. The floor mat pletely in the shade before using them. For must not interfere with pedal operation additional information, see “Seat belt main- or prevent the pedal from returning to tenance” (P. 1-17). its normal position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle. 7-6 Appearance and care CORROSION PROTECTION

MOST COMMON FACTORS Temperature CAUTION CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE High temperatures accelerate the rate of • NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de- CORROSION corrosion to those parts which are not well bris from the passenger compart- ventilated. Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: ment by washing it out with a hose. • The accumulation of moisture-retaining Air pollution Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner dirt and debris in body panel sections, or broom. cavities, and other areas. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in • Never allow water or other liquids to • Damage to paint and other protective the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt come in contact with electronic com- coatings caused by gravel and stone use accelerates the corrosion process. ponents inside the vehicle as this chips or minor traffic collisions. Road salt also accelerates the disintegra- may damage them. tion of paint surfaces. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS Chemicals used for road surface de-icing PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM INFLUENCE THE RATE OF are extremely corrosive. They accelerate CORROSION corrosion and deterioration of underbody CORROSION • Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep components such as the exhaust system, the vehicle clean. fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan Moisture and fenders. • Always check for minor damage to the Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on paint and repair it as soon as possible. In winter, the underbody must be the vehicle body underside can accelerate cleaned periodically. corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry • Keep drain holes at the bottom of the completely inside the vehicle and should doors open to avoid water accumulation. For additional protection against rust and be removed for drying to avoid floor panel • Check the underbody for accumulation corrosion, which may be required in some corrosion. of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with areas, it is recommended that you visit a water as soon as possible. NISSAN dealer. Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used. Appearance and care 7-7 MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care 8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-16 Engine compartment check locations...... 8-3 Cleaning ...... 8-16 Engine cooling system ...... 8-4 Replacing ...... 8-16 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 Brakes...... 8-17 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-5 Fuses ...... 8-18 Engine oil ...... 8-5 Engine compartment ...... 8-18 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-5 Passenger compartment ...... 8-20 Changing engine oil and oil filter...... 8-6 Passenger compartment Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) (with electronic parking brake) ...... 8-21 fluid ...... 8-9 Battery replacement ...... 8-22 Brake fluid ...... 8-9 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 8-22 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-10 Lights ...... 8-24 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...... 8-10 Headlights ...... 8-24 Battery...... 8-11 Fog lights (if so equipped) ...... 8-25 Jump starting ...... 8-12 Exterior and interior lights ...... 8-25 Variable voltage control system ...... 8-13 Wheels and tires ...... 8-27 Drive belt ...... 8-13 Tire pressure ...... 8-27 Tire labeling ...... 8-30 Spark plugs ...... 8-14 Types of tires ...... 8-33 Replacing spark plugs ...... 8-14 Tire chains ...... 8-34 Air cleaner ...... 8-15 Changing wheels and tires ...... 8-35 In-cabin microfilter ...... 8-15 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or main- • Your vehicle is equipped with an au- • Avoid contact with used engine oil tenance work on your vehicle, always take tomatic engine cooling fan. It may and coolant. Improperly disposed care to prevent serious accidental injury to come on at any time without warn- engine oil, engine coolant and/or yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol- ing, even if the ignition switch is in other vehicle fluids can damage the lowing are general precautions which the OFF position and the engine is environment. Always conform to lo- should be closely observed. not running. To avoid injury, always cal regulations for disposal of vehicle disconnect the negative battery fluid. WARNING cable before working near the fan. • Never leave the engine or Continu- • If you must run the engine in an en- ously Variable Transmission (CVT) re- • Park the vehicle on a level surface, closed space such as a garage, be apply the parking brake securely and lated component harnesses discon- sure there is proper ventilation for nected while the ignition switch is in block the wheels to prevent the ve- exhaust gases to escape. hicle from moving. Move the shift le- the ON position. • Never get under the vehicle while it is ver to P (Park). • Never connect or disconnect the bat- supported only by a jack. If it is nec- • Be sure the ignition switch is in the essary to work under the vehicle, tery or any transistorized compo- OFF or LOCK position when perform- support it with safety stands. nent while the ignition switch is in the ON position. ing any parts replacement or repairs. • Keep smoking materials, flame and • If you must work with the engine run- sparks away from the fuel tank and This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc- ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair battery. tions regarding only those items which are and tools away from moving fans, • Because the fuel lines on gasoline relatively easy for an owner to perform. belts and any other moving parts. engine models are under high pres- A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also • It is advisable to secure or remove sure even when the engine is off, it is available. For additional information, see any loose clothing and remove any recommended that you visit a “Owner's Manual/Service Manual order in- NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. formation” (P. 10-23). before working on your vehicle. filter or fuel lines. • Always wear eye protection when- You should be aware that incomplete or ever you work on your vehicle. improper servicing may result in operating CAUTION difficulties or excessive emissions, and • Do not work under the hood while could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt the engine is hot. Turn the engine off about any servicing, it is recommended and wait until it cools down. that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer. 8-2 Do-it-yourself ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

8. Fuse box 9. Air cleaner 10. Engine drive belt location

LDI3471 1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model) 4. Engine oil dipstick 1. Engine coolant reservoir 5. Brake fluid reservoir 2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 6. Fuse box 3. Engine oil filler cap 7. Battery Do-it-yourself 8-3 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the CAUTION • The life expectancy of the factory-fill factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ • Never use any cooling system addi- or 7 years. Mixing any other type of Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide tives such as radiator sealer. Addi- coolant other than Genuine NISSAN year-round antifreeze and coolant protec- tives may clog the cooling system Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) tion. The antifreeze solution contains rust and cause damage to the engine, (or equivalent coolant), including and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine transmission and/or cooling system. Genuine NISSAN Long Life cooling system additives are not • When adding or replacing coolant, be Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the necessary. sure to use only Genuine NISSAN use of non-distilled water may re- Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) duce the life expectancy of the WARNING or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long factory-fill coolant. For additional in- • Never remove the coolant reservoir Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre- formation, refer to the “Maintenance cap when the engine is hot. Wait until diluted to provide antifreeze protec- and schedules” section of this the engine and radiator cool down. tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional manual. Serious burns could be caused by freeze protection is needed due to high pressure fluid escaping from the weather where you operate your ve- radiator. For additional information hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life on precautions, see “If your vehicle Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen- overheats” (P. 6-12). trate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant • The coolant reservoir is equipped other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life with a pressure type coolant reser- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol- voir cap. To prevent engine damage, low the coolant manufacturer’s in- use only a Genuine NISSAN coolant structions to maintain minimum an- reservoir cap. tifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant so- lutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

8-4 Do-it-yourself ENGINE OIL

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING • To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.

LDI3221 • Never remove the coolant reservoir LDI3468 cap when the engine is hot. Serious CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT burns could be caused by high pres- CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL LEVEL sure fluid escaping from the coolant 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and reservoir. Check the coolant level in the reservoir apply the parking brake. when the engine is cold. If the coolant • Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash 2. Start the engine and warm it up until the level is below the MIN level OB , add coolant engine temperature reaches the nor- up to the MAX level OA . thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. mal operating temperature (approxi- If the cooling system frequently requires mately 5 minutes). • Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- coolant, have it checked. It is recom- dren and pets. 3. Stop the engine. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Engine coolant must be disposed of prop- 4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain back to the oil pan. For additional information on the location erly. Check your local regulations. of the engine coolant reservoir, see “Engine 5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. compartment check locations” (P. 8-3). 6. Reinsert the dipstick all the way.

Do-it-yourself 8-5 More engine oil is consumed by frequent 3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 acceleration/deceleration especially minutes. when engine rpm is high. Consumption 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a is likely to be higher when the engine is suitable floor jack and safety jack new. if the rate of oil consumption, after stands. driving for 3,000 miles (5,000 km), is more than 0.5 liter per 600 miles (1,000 • Place the safety jack stands under the km), consult a NISSAN dealer. vehicle jack-up points. • A suitable adapter should be attached to CAUTION the jack stand saddle.

Oil level should be checked regularly. CAUTION Operating the engine with an insuffi- cient amount of oil can damage the en- Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle LDI0371 gine, and such damage is not covered by warranty. damage. 7. Remove the dipstick and check the oil level. It should be within the range OB . CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER 8. If the oil level is below OA , remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil For additional information on engine oil into the opening. Do not overfill OC . and oil filter change, refer to the instructions outlined in this section. When filling the engine oil, do not remove the dipstick. Vehicle set-up 9. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and It is normal to add some oil between oil apply the parking brake. maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the sever- 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating ity of operating conditions or depending temperature. on the property of the engine oil used.

8-6 Do-it-yourself LDI3434 LDI3457 LDI3458 O1 Oil filler cap O2 Oil drain plug O3 Oil filter Engine oil and filter 1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug and oil filter. 2. Remove the oil filler cap. 3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.

Do-it-yourself 8-7 WARNING 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with 10. Start the engine and check for leakage clean engine oil. around the drain plug and the oil filter. • Prolonged and repeated contact Correct as required. Turn the engine off 7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a with used engine oil may cause skin and wait more than 15 minutes. Check slight resistance is felt, then tighten addi- cancer. the oil level with the dipstick. Add en- tionally more than 2/3 turn. • Try to avoid direct skin contact with gine oil if necessary. used oil. If skin contact is made, wash Oil filter tightening torque: thoroughly with soap or hand 11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 N·m) After the operation cleaner as soon as possible. 8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a 1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground. • Keep used engine oil out of reach of new washer. Securely tighten the drain 2. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance re- children. plug with a wrench. Do not use exces- minder (if so equipped). For additional sive force. 4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter information, see “Vehicle information wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Drain plug tightening torque: display” (P. 2-23). Remove the oil filter by turning it by 22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m) • Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. hand. 9. Refill the engine with the recommended • Check your local regulations. 5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur- oil through the oil filler opening, and in- face with a clean rag. stall the oil filler cap securely. For additional information about drain and CAUTION refill capacity, see “Recommended fluids/ lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2). The Be sure to remove any old gasket ma- drain and refill capacity depends on the oil terial remaining on the sealing surface temperature and drain time. Use these of the engine. Failure to do so could specifications for reference only. Always lead to an oil leak and engine damage. use the dipstick to determine the proper • The dipstick must be inserted in amount of oil in the engine. place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil.

8-8 Do-it-yourself CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE BRAKE FLUID TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

CAUTION • Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked con- • NISSAN recommends using Genuine tainers out of reach of children. NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. CAUTION • Do not use Automatic Transmission Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam- is spilled, immediately wash the sur- age the CVT. Damage caused by the face with water. use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited War- brake fluid is below the MIN line OB , the ranty outlined in your Warranty Infor- brake warning light will illuminate. Add mation Booklet. LDI3459 brake fluid up to the MAX line OA . For addi- • Using fluids that are not equivalent For additional information on brake fluid tional information on recommended type to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 specification, see “Recommended fluids/ of brake fluid, see “Recommended fluids/ may also damage the CVT. Damage lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2). lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2). caused by the use of fluids other than If the brake fluid must be added frequently, as recommended is not covered un- WARNING the brake system should be thoroughly der NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited checked. It is recommended that you visit a Warranty outlined in your Warranty • Use only new fluid from a sealed con- NISSAN dealer for this service. Information Booklet. tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. When checking or replacement of CVT fluid The use of improper fluids can dam- is required, it is recommended that you visit age the brake system and affect the a NISSAN dealer for this service. vehicle's stopping ability. • Clean the filler cap before removing.

Do-it-yourself 8-9 WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, • Do not fill the windshield-washer lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the reservoir with washer fluid concen- windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir trates at full strength. Some methyl opening. alcohol based washer fluid concen- Add a washer solvent to the washer for trates may permanently stain the better cleaning. In the winter season, add a grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the windshield-washer reservoir. manufacturer's instructions for the mix- • Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates ture ratio. with water to the manufacturer's Refill the reservoir more frequently when recommended levels before pouring driving conditions require an increased the fluid into the windshield-washer amount of windshield-washer fluid. reservoir. Do not use the windshield- washer reservoir to mix the washer Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN fluid concentrate and water. LDI3223 Windshield-Washer Concentrate Cleaner & WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID Antifreeze or equivalent. RESERVOIR CAUTION Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid • Do not substitute engine antifreeze when the low windshield-washer fluid coolant for windshield-washer solu- warning light (if so equipped) comes on. tion. This may result in damage to the paint.

8-10 Do-it-yourself BATTERY

Caution symbols for battery WARNING

No smoking, No exposed flames, No Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the 1 O Sparks battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or 2 Shield eyes O battery acid.

O3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your O4 Battery acid eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

O5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

O6 Explosive gas Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

Do-it-yourself 8-11 • If the battery is labeled “do not open” it is WARNING maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recom- • Do not expose the battery to flames, mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy- a qualified specialist workshop to con- drogen gas generated by the battery firm the battery’s performance. is explosive. Explosive gases can • Keep the battery surface clean and dry. cause blindness or injury. Do not al- Clean the battery with a solution of bak- low battery fluid to contact your skin, ing soda and water. eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul- • Make certain the terminal connections furic acid can cause blindness or in- are clean and securely tightened. jury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your • If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If or longer, disconnect the negative (-) bat- the acid contacts your eyes, skin or tery terminal cable to prevent discharge. clothing, immediately flush with wa- LDI3302 ter for at least 15 minutes and seek NOTE: NOTE: medical attention. Care should be taken to avoid situations • When working on or near a battery, Do not try to open the top of the battery. that can lead to potential battery dis- always wear suitable eye protection charge and potential no-start conditions This battery is not equipped with remov- and remove all jewelry. such as: able vent caps. • Battery posts, terminals and related 1. Installation or extended use of elec- accessories contain lead and lead JUMP STARTING tronic accessories that consume bat- compounds. Wash hands after If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump tery power when the engine is not handling. starting” (P. 6-10). If the engine does not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD • Keep battery out of the reach of start by jump starting, the battery may players, etc.) children. have to be replaced. It is recommended 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or • Do not tip the battery. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this only driven short distances. service. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

8-12 Do-it-yourself VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL DRIVE BELT SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system mea- sures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator. The current sensor OA is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

LDI3246 LDI3028 1. Automatic tensioner pulley CAUTION 2. Generator pulley 3. Water pump pulley • Do not ground accessories directly to 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley the battery terminal. Doing so will 5. Crankshaft pulley bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may WARNING not charge completely. Be sure the ignition switch is placed in • Use electrical accessories with the the OFF or LOCK position before servic- engine running to avoid discharging ing drive belt. The engine could rotate the vehicle battery. unexpectedly.

Do-it-yourself 8-13 SPARK PLUGS

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un- WARNING usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor condition, have it replaced or ad- Be sure the engine and ignition switch justed. It is recommended that you visit a are off and that the parking brake is NISSAN dealer for this service. engaged securely. 2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition. CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for SDI1895 this service. REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Iridium-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace iridium- tipped OA spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. • Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

8-14 Do-it-yourself AIR CLEANER

• Never pour fuel into the throttle body IN-CABIN MICROFILTER or attempt to start the engine with The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry the air cleaner removed. Doing so of airborne dust and pollen particles and could result in serious injury. reduces some objectionable outside To remove the filter from the air cleaner, odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, refer to the release the retaining clips OA , then release the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual for change intervals. unit upward OB . The viscous paper type filter element If replacement is required, it is recom- should not be cleaned and reused. Replace mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the air filter according to the maintenance this service. log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. LDI2991 When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside WARNING of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth. • Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or NOTE: others to be burned. The air cleaner After installing a new air cleaner filter, filter not only cleans the intake air, it make sure the air cleaner cover is also stops the flame if the engine seated in the housing and latch the backfires. If the air cleaner is not in- clips OA . stalled and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Never drive with the air cleaner filter off. Be cautious working on the engine when the air cleaner is off.

Do-it-yourself 8-15 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING 6. Push wiper on to windshield. If your windshield is not clear after using CAUTION the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other mate- • After wiper blade replacement, re- rial may be on the blade or windshield. turn the wiper arm to its original po- Clean the outside of the windshield with a sition; otherwise it may be damaged washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your wind- when the hood is opened. shield is clean if beads do not form when • Make sure the wiper blades contact rinsing with clear water. the glass; otherwise the arms may be Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth damaged from wind pressure. soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, LDI2584 install new windshield wiper blades. REPLACING CAUTION Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol- Worn windshield wiper blades can low the procedure below: damage the windshield and impair driver vision. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. 2. Lift the release tab OA . 3. Move the wiper blade OB down and remove. 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm. 5. Push the release tab down until it clicks. 8-16 Do-it-yourself BRAKES

Rear window wiper blade If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended If checking or replacement is required, it is that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this recommended that you visit a NISSAN service. dealer for this service. Self-adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The front and rear (if so equipped) disc- type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type brakes (if so equipped) self-adjust every time the parking brake is applied.

WARNING Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2710 If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle OD . This may cause clogging or improper windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin OC .

Do-it-yourself 8-17 FUSES

Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is nor- LDI2997 LDI3440 mal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. If any electrical equipment does not oper- ENGINE COMPARTMENT ate, check for an open fuse. Proper brake inspection intervals should WARNING be followed. For additional information re- Fuses are used in the passenger compart- Never use a fuse of higher or lower am- garding brake inspections, refer to the ap- ment and engine compartment. Spare perage rating than that specified on propriate maintenance schedule informa- fuses are provided and can be found in the the fuse box cover. This could damage tion in the "Maintenance and schedules" passenger compartment fuse box. the electrical system or electronic con- section of this manual. When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is trol units or cause a fire. installed in the fuse box securely. If any electrical equipment does not come NOTE: on, check for an open fuse. Your vehicle may not be equipped with 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head- all fuses listed on the fuse label. light switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood.

8-18 Do-it-yourself 3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing For checking and replacing the fusible links, the tab and lifting the cover up. it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

LDI3232 5. If the fuse is open OA , replace it with a new fuse OB . 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not operate and the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links in the holder. If any of the fusible links are melted, replace only with Genuine NISSAN parts.

Do-it-yourself 8-19 LDI3087 LDI2998 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT NOTE: 5. If the fuse is open OC , replace it with an equivalent good fuse D . WARNING The fuse box is located on the left wall of O the driver's side foot well, below the fuel 6. Push the fuse box cover to install. Never use a fuse of a higher or lower door and hood release levers. amperage rating than that specified on If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical the fuse box cover. This could damage 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head- system checked and repaired. It is recom- the electrical system or electronic con- light switch are OFF. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. trol units or cause a fire. 2. Remove the fuse box cover OA with a If any electrical equipment does not oper- suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam- NOTE: aging the trim. ate, check for an open fuse. Your vehicle may not be equipped with 3. Locate the fuse that needs to be all fuses listed on the fuse label. replaced. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller OB .

8-20 Do-it-yourself NOTE: The fuse box is located on the passenger’s side of the instrument panel. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Remove the fuse box cover OA with a suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim. 3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

LDI3571 LDI3572 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT (with 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller OB . electronic parking brake) 5. If the fuse is open OC , replace it with an equivalent good fuse OD . WARNING 6. Push the fuse box cover to install. Never use a fuse of a higher or lower If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical amperage rating than that specified on system checked and repaired. It is recom- the fuse box cover. This could damage mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the electrical system or electronic con- this service. trol units or cause a fire. NOTE: If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.

Do-it-yourself 8-21 BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swal- low the battery or removed parts. • An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. • When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the components. • There is danger of explosion if the lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same LDI2998 or equivalent type. Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not operate and the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links in the holder. If any of the fusible links are melted, replace only with Genuine NISSAN parts. For checking and replacing the fusible links, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2001 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

8-22 Do-it-yourself Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as 3. Replace the battery with a new one. follows: Recommended battery: CR2032 or 1. Remove the mechanical key from the equivalent. Intelligent Key. • Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could 2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver OA cause a malfunction. into the slit OB of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the • Hold the battery by the edges. Holding lower part. Place a cloth over the screw- the battery across the contact points driver to protect the casing. will seriously deplete the storage capacity. CAUTION • Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part. To prevent damage of the Intelligent Key, do not compress the screwdriver 4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with too hard when you insert the screw- OC and OD . driver into the slit. 5. Operate the buttons to check the operation. If you need assistance for replacement, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device LDI2637 may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Do-it-yourself 8-23 LIGHTS

NOTE: HEADLIGHTS • Do not leave the headlight assembly Changes or modifications not expressly For additional information on headlight open without a bulb installed for a approved by the party responsible for bulb replacement, refer to the instructions long period of time. Dust, moisture, compliance could void the user’s author- outlined in this section. smoke, etc. entering the headlight ity to operate the equipment. body may affect bulb performance. For Canada: Replacing the halogen headlight Remove the bulb from the headlight This device contains licence-exempt bulb (if so equipped) assembly just before a replacement transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply bulb is installed. with Innovation, Science and Economic The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type • Only touch the base when handling Development Canada’s licence-exempt which uses a replaceable headlight (halo- the bulb. Never touch the glass enve- RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol- gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside lope. Touching the glass could sig- lowing two conditions: (1) This device the engine compartment without remov- nificantly affect bulb life and/or may not cause interference. (2) This de- ing the headlight assembly. headlight performance. vice must accept any interference, in- If headlight bulb replacement is required, It • High pressure halogen gas is sealed cluding interference that may cause un- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN inside the halogen bulb. The bulb desired operation of the device. dealer for this service. may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. CAUTION • Use the same number and wattage • Aiming is not necessary after replac- as shown in the chart. ing the bulb. When aiming adjust- Fog may temporarily form inside the lens ment is necessary, it is recom- of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car mended that you visit a NISSAN wash. A temperature difference between dealer for this service. the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-24 Do-it-yourself Replacing the LED headlight bulb EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS (if so equipped) Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*¹ If LED headlight bulb replacement is re- Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)* quired, it is recommended that you visit a High 65 H9 NISSAN dealer for this service. Low 55 H11 Turn/Park 27/7 3457NAK FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped) Side marker — — Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)* For additional information on fog light bulb High — — replacement, refer to the instructions out- Low — — lined in this section. Daytime Running Light (DRL)/Park — — Turn — — Side marker — — Replacing the LED fog light bulb Fog light (if so equipped)* — — If LED fog light bulb replacement is re- Daytime Running Light (DRL) (if so equipped)* — — Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — — quired, it is recommended that you visit a Map light* 10 — NISSAN dealer for this service. Room light* 8 — Glove box light* 1.4 — Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* 5 — Cargo light* 5 W5W High-mounted stop light* — — Rear combination light* Stop/Tail — — Turn 21 WY21W Backup (reversing) 16 W16W Side marker — — Tail light* — — License plate light* 5 W5W * If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

Do-it-yourself 8-25 7. License plate light 8. High-mounted stop light 9. Tail light 10. Rear combination light

LDI3587 SDI1805 1. Map light Replacement procedures 2. Room light 3. Door mirror turn signal light (if so All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. equipped) When replacing a bulb, first remove the 4. Headlight assembly lens, lamp and/or cover. 5. Fog light (if so equipped) Indicates bulb removal 6. Daytime Running Light (DRL) (if so Indicates bulb installation equipped) 8-26 Do-it-yourself WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” under-inflated. If equipped, the sys- Loading Information label under the (P. 6-3). tem also displays pressure of all tires “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire TIRE PRESSURE (except the spare tire) on the display and Loading Information label is af- screen by sending a signal from a fixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor that is installed in each Tire pressures should be checked (TPMS) wheel. regularly because: WARNING The TPMS will activate only when the • Most tires naturally lose air over vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 time. Radio waves could adversely af- mph (25 km/h). Also, this system • Tires can lose air suddenly when fect electric medical equipment. may not detect a sudden drop in tire driven over potholes or other ob- Those who use a pacemaker pressure (for example a flat tire while jects or if the vehicle strikes a curb should contact the electric medi- driving). while parking. cal equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before For additional information, see “Low The tire pressures should be use. tire pressure warning light” (P. 2-17), checked when the tires are cold. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring System tires are considered COLD after the This vehicle is equipped with the Tire (TPMS)” (P. 5-5) and “Flat tire” (P. 6-3). vehicle has been parked for 3 or Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). more hours, or driven less than 1 mile It monitors tire pressure of all tires Tire inflation pressure (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. except the spare. When the low tire Check the tire pressures (including pressure warning light is lit and the The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert the spare) often and always prior to “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warning provides visual and audible signals long distance trips. The recom- (if so equipped) appears in the ve- outside the vehicle for inflating tires mended tire pressure specifications hicle information display, one or to the recommended COLD tire are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. more of your tires is significantly certification label or the Tire and

Do-it-yourself 8-27 pressure. For additional information, • The Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- • For additional information re- see “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert” ing (GVWR) is located on the garding tires, refer to “Impor- (P. 5-8). F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- tant Tire Safety Information” Incorrect tire pressure, including tion label. The vehicle weight (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- under inflation, may adversely af- capacity is indicated on the Tire tion” (Canada) in the Warranty fect tire life and vehicle handling. and Loading Information label. Information Booklet. Do not load your vehicle be- WARNING yond this capacity. Overload- ing your vehicle may result in • Improperly inflated tires can reduced tire life, unsafe operat- fail suddenly and cause an ing conditions due to prema- accident. ture tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. • Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

8-28 Do-it-yourself hicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's GVWR. ᭺5 Tire size - For additional information, see “Tire labeling” (P. 8-30). ᭺6 Spare tire size.

LDI2007 Tire and Loading Information ᭺4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires label to this pressure when the tires ᭺1 Seating capacity: The maximum are cold. Tires are considered number of occupants that can COLD after the vehicle has been be seated in the vehicle. parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at ᭺2 Vehicle load limit: For additional moderate speeds. The recom- information, see “Vehicle loading mended cold tire inflation is set information” (P. 10-15). by the manufacturer to provide ᭺3 Original tire size: The size of the the best balance of tire wear, ve- tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

Do-it-yourself 8-29 4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed. 6. Install the valve stem cap. LDI0393 WDI0394 7. Check the pressure of all other Example Checking tire pressure tires, including the spare. 1. Remove the valve stem cap from TIRE LABELING the tire. Size Cold Tire Infla- Federal law requires tire manufac- 2. Press the pressure gauge squarely tion Pressure turers to place standardized infor- onto the valve stem. Do not press Front and Rear mation on the sidewall of all tires. Original Tire: This information identifies and de- too hard or force the valve stem 32 psi, 220 kPa sideways, or air will escape. If the P205/55R17 91V scribes the fundamental character- hissing sound of air escaping from P205/60R16 92H istics of the tire and also provides the the tire is heard while checking the Spare Tire: Tire Identification Number (TIN) for (Temporary) safety standard certification. The TIN pressure, reposition the gauge to 60 psi, 420 kPa eliminate this leakage. T125/90D15 can be used to identify the tire in T125/80D16 case of a recall. 3. Remove the gauge. 8-30 Do-it-yourself 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law. 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

WDI0395 Example O1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 3. Two-digit number (65): This num- 95H) ber, known as the aspect ratio, 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- gives the tire's ratio of height to signed for passenger vehicles (not width. all tires have this information). 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. 2. Three-digit number (215): This 5. Two-digit number (15): This num- number gives the width in milli- ber is the wheel or rim diameter in meters of the tire from sidewall inches. edge to sidewall edge.

Do-it-yourself 8-31 O3 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others. O4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount LDI2786 of air pressure that should be put in Example the tire. Do not exceed the maximum O2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size. permissible inflation pressure. for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code O5 Maximum load rating XXX XXXX) (Optional). This number indicates the maxi- 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart- 5. Four numbers represent the mum load in kilograms and pounds ment Of Transportation”. The week and year the tire was built. that can be carried by the tire. When symbol can be placed above, be- For example, the numbers 3103 replacing the tires on the vehicle, allow or to the left or right of the Tire means the 31st week of 2003. If ways use a tire that has the same Identification Number. these numbers are missing then load rating as the factory installed 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's look on the other sidewall of the tire. identification mark. tire.

8-32 Do-it-yourself O6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” lar side that must always face out- • Always use tires of the same type, Indicates whether the tire requires ward when mounted on a vehicle. size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to an inner tube (“tube type”) or not TYPES OF TIRES do so may result in a circumference (“tubeless”). difference between tires on the front WARNING and rear axles which can cause the O7 The word “radial” Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- • When changing or replacing tires, be The word “radial” is shown if the tire tem to malfunction resulting in per- sure all four tires are of the same type sonal injury or death, excessive tire has radial structure. (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) wear and may damage the transmis- and construction. A NISSAN dealer sion and differential gears. O8 Manufacturer or brand name may be able to help you with infor- • For additional information regarding Manufacturer or brand name is mation about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety shown. Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- • Replacement tires may have a lower formation” (Canada) in the Warranty speed rating than the factory Information Booklet. Other Tire-related Terminology equipped tires, and may not match In addition to the many terms that the potential maximum vehicle All season tires are defined throughout this section, speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the • Replacing tires with those not origi- models to provide good performance all sidewall that contains a whitewall, nally specified by NISSAN could af- year, including snowy and icy road condi- bears white lettering or bears fect the proper operation of the low tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL manufacturer, brand, and/or model tire pressure warning system. SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than name molding that is higher or All Season tires and may be more appropri- deeper than the same molding on ate in some areas. the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

Do-it-yourself 8-33 Summer tires states, provinces and territories prohibit to the fenders or underbody. If possible, their use. Check local laws before installing avoid fully loading your vehicle when using NISSAN specifies summer tires on some studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced models to provide superior performance of studded snow tires on wet or dry sur- speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be on dry roads. Summer tire performance is faces may be poorer than that of non- damaged and/or vehicle handling and substantially reduced in snow and ice. studded snow tires. performance may be adversely affected. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall. TIRE CHAINS Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac- or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the cording to location. Check the local laws Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all before installing tire chains. When installing USE ONLY spare tire. four wheels. tire chains, make sure they are the proper Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving size for the tires on your vehicle and are with chains in such conditions can cause Snow tires installed according to the chain manufac- damage to the various mechanisms of the If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to turer's suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” vehicle due to some overstress. select tires equivalent in size and load rat- chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve- ing to the original equipment tires. If you do hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear- not, it can adversely affect the safety and ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains handling of your vehicle. are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest ve- Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat- hicle suspension or body component re- ings than factory equipped tires and may quired to accommodate the use of a not match the potential maximum vehicle winter traction device (tire chains or speed. Never exceed the maximum speed cables). The minimum clearances are de- rating of the tire. termined using the factory equipped tires. If you install snow tires, they must be the Other types may damage your vehicle. Use same size, brand, construction and tread chain tensioners when recommended by pattern on all four wheels. the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain For additional traction on icy roads, stud- must be secured or removed to prevent ded tires may be used. However, some the possibility of whipping action damage 8-34 Do-it-yourself Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

• After rotating the tires, check WDI0258 and adjust the tire pressure. WDI0259 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES • Retighten the wheel nuts when Tire wear and damage Tire rotation the vehicle has been driven for 1. Wear indicator 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in NISSAN recommends rotating the cases of a flat tire, etc.). 2. Location mark tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). • Do not include the spare tire in For additional information on the tire the tire rotation. replacing procedures, see “Flat tire” • For additional information re- (P. 6-3). garding tires, refer to “Impor- As soon as possible, tighten the tant Tire Safety Information” wheel nuts to the specified torque (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- with a torque wrench. tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-35 WARNING • Improper service of the spare WARNING tire may result in serious per- • The use of tires other than those rec- • Tires should be periodically in- sonal injury. If it is necessary to ommended or the mixed use of tires spected for wear, cracking, repair the spare tire, it is rec- of different brands, construction bulging or objects caught in ommended that you visit a (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the the tread. If excessive wear, NISSAN dealer for this service. ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dy- cracks, bulging or deep cuts • For additional information re- namic Control (VDC) system, ground are found, the tire(s) should be garding tires, refer to “Impor- clearance, body-to-tire clearance, replaced. tire chain clearance, speedometer tant Tire Safety Information” calibration, headlight aim and bum- • The original tires have built-in (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- per height. Some of these effects tread wear indicators. When tion” (Canada) in the Warranty may lead to accidents and could re- the wear indicators are visible, Information Booklet. sult in serious personal injury. the tire(s) should be replaced. • If your vehicle was originally Replacing wheels and tires equipped with four tires that were • Tires degrade with age and the same size and you are only re- use. Have tires, including the When replacing a tire, use the same size, placing two of the four tires, install tread design, speed rating and load carry- spare, over 6 years old checked the new tires on the rear axle. Placing ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad- new tires on the front axle may cause by a qualified technician be- ditional information, see “Wheels and tires” loss of vehicle control in some driving cause some tire damage may (P. 10-10). conditions and cause an accident not be obvious. Replace the and personal injury. tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

8-36 Do-it-yourself • If the wheels are changed for any • When replacing the TPMS sensor, the Wheel balance reason, always replace with wheels ID registration may be required. It is Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle which have the same off-set dimen- recommended that you visit a handling and tire life. Even with regular use, sion. Wheels of a different off-set NISSAN dealer for ID registration. wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, could cause premature tire wear, de- • Do not use a valve stem cap that is they should be balanced as required. grade vehicle handling characteris- not specified by NISSAN. The valve tics, affect the VDC system and/or in- Wheel balance service should be per- stem cap may become stuck. formed with the wheels off the vehicle. terference with the brake discs/ • Be sure that the valve stem caps are drums. Such interference can lead to Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve could lead to mechanical damage. decreased braking efficiency and/or may be clogged up with dirt and early brake pad wear. For additional cause a malfunction or loss of Care of wheels information, see “Wheels and tires” pressure. (P. 10-10). • Wash the wheels when washing the ve- • Do not install a damaged or de- hicle to maintain their appearance. • When using a wheel without the formed wheel or tire even if it has • Clean the inner side of the wheels when TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS been repaired. Such wheels or tires the wheel is changed or the underside of will not function and the low tire could have structural damage and the vehicle is washed. pressure warning light will flash for could fail without warning. approximately 1 minute. The light will • Do not use abrasive cleaners when • The use of retread tires is not remain on after 1 minute. Have your washing the wheels. recommended. tires replaced and/or TPMS system • Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or • For additional information regarding reset as soon as possible. It is recom- corrosion. Such damage may cause loss tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety mended that you visit a NISSAN of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. dealer for this service. Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- • NISSAN recommends waxing the road • Replacing tires with those not origi- formation” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. wheels to protect against road salt in ar- nally specified by NISSAN could af- eas where it is used during winter. fect the proper operation of the TPMS. • The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.

Do-it-yourself 8-37 Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY • When driving on roads covered with CAUTION spare tire) snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the • Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO- When using a wheel without the TPMS such RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function. rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle. Observe the following precautions if the • Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster • Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be rate than the standard tire. Replace spare tire is smaller than the original damaged or involved in an accident: the spare tire as soon as the tread tire, ground clearance is reduced. To wear indicators appear. avoid damage to the vehicle, do not WARNING drive over obstacles. Also, do not • Do not use the spare tire on other drive the vehicle through an auto- vehicles. • The spare tire should be used for matic car wash since it may get emergency use only. It should be re- • Do not use more than one spare tire caught. placed with the standard tire at the at the same time. first opportunity to avoid possible • Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO- tire or differential damage. RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. • Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. • Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). • With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).

8-38 Do-it-yourself 9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements ...... 9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Emission control system maintenance: ...... 9-6 Scheduled maintenance ...... 9-2 Chassis and body maintenance: ...... 9-6 Where to go for service ...... 9-2 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Additional Maintenance Items for Explanation of general maintenance severe operating conditions ...... 9-7 items ...... 9-2 1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model) ...... 9-7 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of nance is essential to maintain your vehicle the vehicle, general maintenance should The maintenance items listed in this sec- good mechanical condition, as well as its be performed regularly as prescribed in tion are required to be serviced at regular emissions and engine performance. this section. If you detect any unusual intervals. However under severe driving sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to It is the owner's responsibility to make sure conditions, additional or more frequent check for the cause or have it checked that the scheduled maintenance, as well as maintenance will be required. general maintenance, is performed. promptly. In addition, it is recommended WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think As the vehicle owner, you are the only one that repairs are required. who can ensure that your vehicle receives If maintenance service is required or your proper maintenance. You are a vital link in vehicle appears to malfunction, have the When performing any checks or mainte- the maintenance chain. systems checked and serviced. It is recom- nance work, closely observe the “Mainte- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for nance precautions” (P. 8-2). GENERAL MAINTENANCE this service. EXPLANATION OF GENERAL General maintenance includes those items NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- MAINTENANCE ITEMS which should be checked during normal cialists and are kept up-to-date with the day-to-day operation. They are essential latest service information through techni- WARNING for proper vehicle operation. It is your re- cal bulletins, service tips and training pro- sponsibility to perform these procedures grams. They are fully qualified to work on Failure to follow the procedures listed regularly as prescribed. NISSAN vehicles before work begins. within this section may result in per- Performing general maintenance checks If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is sonal injury. requires minimal mechanical skill and only recommended that you ask your NISSAN Additional information on the following a few general automotive tools. dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it- These checks or inspections can be done Collision Center is located, or go to yourself” section of this manual. by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you http://collision.nissanusa.com. prefer, a NISSAN dealer. You can be confident that a NISSAN deal- Outside the vehicle er's service department can perform the The maintenance items listed here should service needed to meet the maintenance be performed from time to time, unless requirements on your vehicle. otherwise specified.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules Doors and engine hood: Check that the Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a doors and engine hood operate properly. often and always prior to long distance NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate Also ensure that all latches lock securely. trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all a collision center in your area, refer to Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers tires, including the spare, to the pressure http://collision.nissanusa.com. and links if necessary. Make sure that the specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts Windshield wiper blades*: Check for secondary latch keeps the hood from or excessive wear. cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. opening when the primary latch is Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) released. tire pressure sensor: It is recommended Inside the vehicle When driving in areas using road salt or that you replace the tire pressure sensor The maintenance items listed here should other corrosive materials, check lubrica- assembly when the tires are replaced due be checked on a regular basis, such as tion frequently. to wear or age. when performing scheduled maintenance, Check that the gas stays or struts properly Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve- cleaning the vehicle, etc. and securely hold the hood, trunk, or rear hicle should pull to either side while driving Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for hatch fully open. If the hood, trunk, or rear on a straight and level road, or if you detect smooth operation and make sure the hatch is not held open, have the gas stays uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may pedal does not catch or require uneven or struts replaced. be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer- effort. Keep the floor mat away from the ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high- Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular pedal. basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop way speeds, wheel balancing may be Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other needed. operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes lights are all operating properly and in- For additional information regarding tires, down further than normal, the pedal feels stalled securely. Also check headlight aim. refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- to stop, have your vehicle checked imme- the Warranty Information Booklet. ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are diately. It is recommended that you visit a missing, and check for any loose wheel Windshield: Clean the windshield on a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the nuts. Tighten if necessary. regular basis. Check the windshield at least floor mat away from the pedal. every six months for cracks or other dam- Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the specified Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull age. Have a damaged windshield repaired interval shown in the maintenance the vehicle to one side when applied. schedule. by a qualified repair facility. It is recommended that you have a damaged wind-

Maintenance and schedules 9-3 Continuously Variable Transmission Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all NOTE: (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a warning lights and chimes are operating Care should be taken to avoid situa- fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held properly. tions that can lead to potential bat- securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) Windshield defroster: Check that the air tery discharge and potential no-start position without applying any brakes. comes out of the defroster outlets properly conditions such as: Parking brake: Check the parking brake and in sufficient quantity when operating 1. Installation or extended use of elec- operation regularly. The vehicle should be the heater or air conditioner. tronic accessories that consume bat- securely held on a fairly steep hill with only Windshield wiper and washer*: Check tery power when the engine is not the parking brake applied. If the parking that the wipers and washer operate prop- running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD brake needs adjustment, it is recom- erly and that the wipers do not streak. players, etc.). mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or Under the hood and vehicle only driven short distances. Seats: Check seat position controls such The maintenance items listed here should as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to In these cases, the battery may need to be checked periodically (for example, each ensure they operate smoothly and all be charged to maintain battery health. time you check the engine oil or refuel). latches lock securely in every position. Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake Check that the head restraints/headrests Battery*:This vehicle is equipped with a fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines move up and down smoothly and the locks sealed maintenance free battery. It is rec- on the reservoir. (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer positions. for service. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt adjusters and retractors) operate properly is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. and smoothly, and are installed securely. Engine oil level*: Check the level after Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, parking the vehicle on a level surface with wear or damage. the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes Steering wheel: Check for changes in the for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. steering system, such as excessive free Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if play, hard steering or strange noises. valve noise increases.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no Underbody: The underbody is frequently The following descriptions are provided to loose supports, cracks or holes. If the exposed to corrosive substances such as give you a better understanding of the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or those used on icy roads or to control dust. It scheduled maintenance items that should there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi- is very important to remove these sub- be regularly checked or replaced. The ately have the exhaust system inspected. It stances from the underbody, otherwise maintenance schedule indicates at which is recommended that you visit a NISSAN rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel mileage/time intervals each item requires dealer for this service. For additional infor- lines and exhaust system. At the end of service. mation, see “Exhaust gas (carbon monox- winter, the underbody should be thor- In addition to scheduled maintenance, ide)” (P. 5-4). oughly flushed with plain water, in those your vehicle requires that some items be Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for areas where mud and dirt may have accu- checked during normal day-to-day opera- fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the mulated. For additional information, see tion. For additional information, see “Gen- vehicle has been parked for a while. Water “Cleaning exterior” (P. 7-2). eral maintenance” (P. 9-2). dripping from the air conditioner after use Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that Items marked with “*” are recommended is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause You are not required to perform mainte- and have it corrected immediately. nance on these items in order to maintain Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the the warranties which come with your radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in- leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. tervals are required. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor- When applicable, additional information mation, rot or loose connections. can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5 NOTE: additional information on the proper mix- Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings: ture for your area, see “Engine cooling sys- Check for wear, deterioration and fluid NISSAN does not advocate the use of tem” (P. 8-4). leaks. Replace any deteriorated or dam- non-OEM approved aftermarket flush- aged parts immediately. ing systems and strongly advises NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant against performing these services on a or the use of non-distilled water may re- Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex- NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- duce the recommended service interval haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- of the coolant. cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten proved chemicals or solvents, the use of Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil connections or replace parts as necessary. which has not been validated by NISSAN. and oil filter at the specified intervals. For Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus- For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, recommended oil grade and viscosity see pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check grease, and refrigerant, see “Recom- “Recommended fluids/lubricants and ca- for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- pacities” (P. 10-2). or grease. Under severe driving conditions, ties” (P. 10-2). Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping inspect more frequently. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM and connections for leaks, looseness, or Tire rotation: Rotate tires at the specified deterioration. Tighten connections or re- interval shown in the maintenance sched- MAINTENANCE: place parts as necessary. ule. When rotating tires, check for damage Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. and uneven wear. Replace if necessary. wear, fraying or cracking and for proper Install new plugs of the type as originally Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for tension. Replace any damaged drive belt. equipped. signs of leakage at specified intervals. Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter- CHASSIS AND BODY If using a car-top carrier, or driving on vals. When driving for prolonged periods in rough or muddy roads, replace the CVT dusty conditions, check/replace the filter MAINTENANCE: fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or re- more frequently. Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for quest the dealer to inspect the fluid dete- Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the proper installation. Check for chafing, rioration data using a CONSULT. If the dete- specified interval. When adding or replac- cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. rioration data is more than 210000, replace ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine Replace any deteriorated or damaged the CVT fluid. NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) parts immediately. or equivalent with the proper mixture. For

9-6 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi- • Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte- (16 km) with outside temperatures re- nance schedules that may be used, de- maining below freezing. pending upon the conditions in which you • Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go usually drive. These schedules contain “rush hour” traffic. both distance and time intervals, up to • Extensive idling and/or low speed driving 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. For for long distances, such as police, taxi or most people, the odometer reading will indoor-to-door delivery use. dicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be • Driving in dusty conditions. serviced at the regular time intervals • Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread shown in the schedule. roads. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 • Using a car-top carrier. months, continue maintenance at the If your vehicle is mostly operated under the same mileage/time intervals. severe conditions, follow the severe maintenance intervals shown in the mainte- ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS nance schedule. FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Addi- tional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions: • Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).

Maintenance and schedules 9-7 1.6L 4 CYLINDER (HR16DE engine 5,000 miles/(8,000 km)/6 months 7,500 miles/(12,000 km)/6 months model) Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or The following shows the maintenance months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. schedule. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Choose the maintenance schedule Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: needed based on your vehicle driving Severe maintenance: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ conditions. hood lift supports Inspections: After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, months, continue maintenance at the • Brake pads & rotors power steering, coolant) same mileage/time interval. • Drums & linings • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter • Axle & suspension parts • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Exhaust system frame, tie rods) • Drive shaft boots • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth hood lift supports Essentials: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Replace engine oil & filter power steering, coolant) • Tire rotation • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Engine air filter Severe maintenance: • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth Essentials: • Replace engine oil & filter

9-8 Maintenance and schedules 10,000 miles/(16,000 km)/ Essentials: 15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/ 12 months • Replace engine oil & filter 12 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Brake lines & cables • Brake pads & rotors Inspections: • Drums & linings • Brake pads & rotors • Drive shaft boots • Drums & linings • CVT fluid • Steering gear & linkage • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Axle & suspension parts hood lift supports • Exhaust system • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Drive shaft boots power steering, coolant) • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Engine drive belt and hose inspections hood lift supports • Engine air filter • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Suspension components (shocks, sub- power steering, coolant) frame, tie rods) • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Engine air filter • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) Essentials: • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Replace engine oil & filter • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Replace in-cabin microfilter • Tire rotation

Maintenance and schedules 9-9 Severe maintenance: 15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/ Essentials: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval 18 months • Replace engine oil & filter Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Severe maintenance: Inspections: • Brake pads & rotors • Drums & linings • Steering gear & linkage • Axle & suspension parts • Exhaust system • Drive shaft boots • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Engine air filter • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-10 Maintenance and schedules 20,000 miles/(32,000 km)/ Essentials: 22,500 miles/(36,000 km)/ 24 months • Replace engine oil & filter 18 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Intelligent key battery • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ Inspections: hood lift supports • Brake pads & rotors • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Drums & linings power steering, coolant) • Steering gear & linkage • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Axle & suspension parts • Engine air filter • Exhaust system • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Drive shaft boots frame, tie rods) • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Battery terminals and cables, battery test hood lift supports • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, Essentials: power steering, coolant) • Replace engine oil & filter • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Tire rotation • Engine air filter • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Severe maintenance: frame, tie rods) Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-11 25,000 miles/(40,000 km)/ Essentials: 30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/ 30 months • Replace engine oil & filter 24 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Brake lines & cables • Brake pads & rotors Inspections: • Drums & linings • Brake pads & rotors • Fuel tank vapor vent system* • Drums & linings • Fuel lines/connections* • Steering gear & linkage • Exhaust system • Axle & suspension parts • Steering gear and linkage • Exhaust system • Axle and suspension parts • Drive shaft boots • Drive shaft boots • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports • CVT fluid • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ power steering, coolant) hood lift supports • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Engine air filter • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Engine air filter • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth 9-12 Maintenance and schedules Essentials: 30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/ Essentials: • Replace engine oil & filter 36 months • Replace engine oil & filter • Replace engine air filter (1) Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid • Replace brake fluid months, whichever comes first. • Replace in-cabin microfilter Standard maintenance: • Tire rotation Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Severe maintenance: Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, • Brake pads & rotors more frequent maintenance may be • Drums & linings required. • Steering gear & linkage * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” • Axle & suspension parts are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not per- • Exhaust system form such maintenance in order to main- • Drive shaft boots tain the emission warranty or manufac- • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ turer recall liability. Other maintenance hood lift supports items and intervals are required. • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Engine air filter • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-13 35,000 miles/(56,000 km)/ Essentials: 37,500 miles/(60,000 km)/ 42 months • Replace engine oil & filter 30 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports Inspections: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Brake pads & rotors power steering, coolant) • Drums & linings • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter • Axle & suspension parts • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Exhaust system frame, tie rods) • Drive shaft boots • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth hood lift supports Essentials: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Replace engine oil & filter power steering, coolant) • Tire rotation • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Engine air filter Severe maintenance: • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-14 Maintenance and schedules 40,000 miles/(64,000 km)/ Essentials: 45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/ 48 months • Replace engine oil & filter 36 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Brake lines & cables • Brake pads & rotors Inspections: • Drums & linings • Brake pads & rotors • Drive shaft boots • Drums & linings • CVT fluid • Steering gear & linkage • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Axle & suspension parts hood lift supports • Exhaust system • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Drive shaft boots power steering, coolant) • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Engine drive belt and hose inspections hood lift supports • Engine air filter • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Suspension components (shocks, sub- power steering, coolant) frame, tie rods) • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Engine air filter • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) Essentials: • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Replace engine oil & filter • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Replace in-cabin microfilter • Replace intelligent key battery • Tire rotation Maintenance and schedules 9-15 Severe maintenance: 45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/ Essentials: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval 54 months • Replace engine oil & filter Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Severe maintenance: Inspections: • Brake pads & rotors • Drums & linings • Steering gear & linkage • Axle & suspension parts • Exhaust system • Drive shaft boots • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Engine air filter • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-16 Maintenance and schedules 50,000 miles/(80,000 km)/ Essentials: 52,500 miles/(84,000 km)/ 60 months • Replace engine oil & filter 42 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports Inspections: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Brake pads & rotors power steering, coolant) • Drums & linings • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter • Axle & suspension parts • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Exhaust system frame, tie rods) • Drive shaft boots • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth hood lift supports Essentials: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Replace engine oil & filter power steering, coolant) • Tire rotation • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Engine air filter Severe maintenance: • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-17 55,000 miles/(88,000 km)/ Essentials: 60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/ 66 months • Replace engine oil & filter 48 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Brake lines & cables • Brake pads & rotors Inspections: • Drums & linings • Brake pads & rotors • Engine drive belt* • Drums & linings • Fuel tank vapor vent system hoses* • Steering gear & linkage • Fuel lines/connections* • Axle & suspension parts • Exhaust system • Exhaust system • Axle and suspension parts • Drive shaft boots • Steering gear and linkage • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports • Drive shaft boots • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • CVT fluid power steering, coolant) • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Engine drive belt and hose inspections hood lift supports • Engine air filter • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Hose inspections • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Engine air filter • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods)

9-18 Maintenance and schedules • Battery terminals and cables, battery test 60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/ Essential: • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth 72 months • Replace engine oil & filter Essentials: Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid • Replace engine air filter (1) months, whichever comes first. • Replace CVT fluid • Replace brake fluid Standard maintenance: • Replace engine oil & filter Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval • Replace in-cabin microfilter Severe maintenance: • Tire rotation Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Brake pads & rotors Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval • Drums & linings (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, • Steering gear & linkage more frequent maintenance may be • Axle & suspension parts required. • Exhaust system * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” • Drive shaft boots are recommended by NISSAN for reliable • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ vehicle operation. The owner need not per- hood lift supports form such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufac- • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, turer recall liability. Other maintenance power steering, coolant) items and intervals are required. • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Engine air filter • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-19 65,000 miles/(104,000 km)/ Essentials: 67,500 miles/(108,000 km)/ 78 months • Replace engine oil & filter 54 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports Inspections: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Brake pads & rotors power steering, coolant) • Drums & linings • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter • Axle & suspension parts • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Exhaust system frame, tie rods) • Drive shaft boots • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth hood lift supports Essentials: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Replace engine oil & filter power steering, coolant) • Replace intelligent key battery • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Tire rotation • Engine air filter • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Severe maintenance: frame, tie rods) Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-20 Maintenance and schedules 70,000 miles/(112,000 km)/ Essentials: 75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/ 84 months • Replace engine oil & filter 60 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Brake lines & cables • Brake pads & rotors Inspections: • Drums & linings • Brake pads & rotors • Engine drive belt* • Drums & linings • Drive shaft boots • Steering gear & linkage • CVT fluid • Axle & suspension parts • Drive shaft boots • Exhaust system • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Drive shaft boots hood lift supports • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, hood lift supports power steering, coolant) • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Hose inspections power steering, coolant) • Engine air filter • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Engine air filter frame, tie rods) • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Battery terminals and cables, battery test frame, tie rods) • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-21 Essentials: 75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/ Essentials: • Replace engine oil & filter 90 months • Replace engine oil & filter • Replace in-cabin microfilter Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Tire rotation months, whichever comes first. Severe maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” Severe maintenance: are recommended by NISSAN for reliable Inspections: vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to main- • Brake pads & rotors tain the emission warranty or manufac- • Drums & linings turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Steering gear & linkage items and intervals are required. • Axle & suspension parts • Exhaust system • Drive shaft boots • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Engine air filter • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-22 Maintenance and schedules 80,000 miles/(128,000 km)/ Essentials: 82,500 miles/(132,000 km)/ 96 months • Replace engine oil & filter 66 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports Inspections: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Brake pads & rotors power steering, coolant) • Drums & linings • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter • Axle & suspension parts • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Exhaust system frame, tie rods) • Drive shaft boots • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth hood lift supports Essentials: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Replace engine oil & filter power steering, coolant) • Tire rotation • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Engine air filter Severe maintenance: • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-23 85,000 miles/(136,000 km)/ Essentials: 90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/ 102 months • Replace engine oil & filter 72 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Brake lines & cables • Brake pads & rotors Inspections: • Drums & linings • Brake pads & rotors • Engine drive belt* • Drums & linings • Fuel tank vapor vent system* • Steering gear & linkage • Fuel lines/connections* • Axle & suspension parts • Exhaust system • Exhaust system • Steering gear and linkage • Drive shaft boots • Axle and suspension parts • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports • Drive shaft boots • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • CVT fluid power steering, coolant) • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Engine drive belt and hose inspections hood lift supports • Engine air filter • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Hose inspections • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Engine air filter • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods)

9-24 Maintenance and schedules • Battery terminals and cables, battery test 90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/ Essentials: • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth 108 months • Replace engine oil & filter Essentials: Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid • Replace engine air filter (1) months, whichever comes first. • Replace brake fluid Standard maintenance: • Replace engine oil & filter Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval • Replace in-cabin microfilter Severe maintenance: • Replace intelligent key battery • Tire rotation Inspections: • Brake pads & rotors Severe maintenance: • Drums & linings Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval • Steering gear & linkage (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, • Axle & suspension parts more frequent maintenance may be • Exhaust system required. • Drive shaft boots * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ are recommended by NISSAN for reliable hood lift supports vehicle operation. The owner need not per- • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, form such maintenance in order to main- power steering, coolant) tain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance • Engine drive belt and hose inspections items and intervals are required. • Engine air filter • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-25 95,000 miles/(152,000 km)/ Essentials: 97,500 miles/(156,000 km)/ 114 months • Replace engine oil & filter 78 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports Inspections: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Brake pads & rotors power steering, coolant) • Drums & linings • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter • Axle & suspension parts • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Exhaust system frame, tie rods) • Drive shaft boots • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth hood lift supports Essentials: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Replace engine oil & filter power steering, coolant) • Tire rotation • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Engine air filter Severe maintenance: • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-26 Maintenance and schedules 100,000 miles/(160,000 km)/ Essentials: 105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/ 120 months • Replace engine oil & filter 84 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Brake lines & cables • Brake pads & rotors Inspections: • Drums & linings • Brake pads & rotors • Engine drive belt* • Drums & linings • Drive shaft boots • Steering gear & linkage • CVT fluid • Axle & suspension parts • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Exhaust system hood lift supports • Drive shaft boots • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ power steering, coolant) hood lift supports • Hose inspections • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Engine air filter power steering, coolant) • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Engine drive belt and hose inspections frame, tie rods) • Engine air filter • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-27 Essentials: 105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/ Essentials: • Replace engine oil & filter 126 months • Replace engine oil & filter • Replace in-cabin microfilter Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace spark plugs (1) (2) months, whichever comes first. • Replace engine coolant * (3) Standard maintenance: • Tire rotation Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Severe maintenance: Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: (1) Replace spark plug when the plug gap • Brake pads & rotors exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within • Drums & linings specified replacement mileage. • Steering gear & linkage (2) Performed based on mileage only. • Axle & suspension parts (3) First replacement interval is 105,000 • Exhaust system miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first • Drive shaft boots replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, are recommended by NISSAN for reliable power steering, coolant) vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to main- • Engine drive belt and hose inspections tain the emission warranty or manufac- • Engine air filter turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Suspension components (shocks, sub- items and intervals are required. frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-28 Maintenance and schedules 110,000 miles/(176,000 km)/ Essentials: 112,500 miles/(180,000 km)/ 132 months • Replace engine oil & filter 90 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports Inspections: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Brake pads & rotors power steering, coolant) • Drums & linings • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter • Axle & suspension parts • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Exhaust system frame, tie rods) • Drive shaft boots • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth hood lift supports Essentials: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Replace engine oil & filter power steering, coolant) • Replace intelligent key battery • Engine drive belt and hose inspections • Tire rotation • Engine air filter • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Severe maintenance: frame, tie rods) Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-29 115,000 miles/(184,000 km)/ Essentials: 120,000 miles/(192,000 km)/ 138 months • Replace engine oil & filter 96 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections: Severe maintenance: • Brake lines & cables • Brake pads & rotors Inspections: • Drums & linings • Brake pads & rotors • Engine drive belt* • Drums & linings • Fuel tank vapor vent system* • Steering gear & linkage • Fuel lines/connections* • Axle & suspension parts • Exhaust system • Exhaust system • Steering gear and linkage • Drive shaft boots • Axle and suspension parts • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports • Drive shaft boots • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • CVT fluid power steering, coolant) • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Engine drive belt and hose inspections hood lift supports • Engine air filter • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Hose inspections • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Engine air filter • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods)

9-30 Maintenance and schedules • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth Essentials: • Replace engine air filter (1) • Replace brake fluid • Replace engine oil & filter • Replace in-cabin microfilter • Tire rotation Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-31 MEMO

9-32 Maintenance and schedules 10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and Tire and Loading Information label ...... 10-13 capacities ...... 10-2 Air conditioner specification label ...... 10-13 Fuel recommendation ...... 10-4 Installing front license plate ...... 10-14 Engine oil and oil filter Vehicle loading information ...... 10-15 recommendations ...... 10-7 Terms ...... 10-15 Air conditioner system refrigerant and Vehicle load capacity ...... 10-16 oil recommendations ...... 10-8 Securing the load ...... 10-17 Specifications ...... 10-9 Loading tips ...... 10-18 Engine ...... 10-9 Measurement of weights ...... 10-19 Wheels and tires ...... 10-10 Towing a trailer ...... 10-19 Dimensions and weights ...... 10-10 Flat towing ...... 10-19 When traveling or registering in another Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-20 country ...... 10-11 Emission control system warranty ...... 10-21 Vehicle identification ...... 10-11 Reporting safety defects ...... 10-21 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) plate ...... 10-11 test ...... 10-22 Vehicle identification number Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...... 10-23 (chassis number) ...... 10-11 Engine serial number ...... 10-12 Owner's Manual/Service Manual order F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 information ...... 10-23 Emission control information label ...... 10-12 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (approximate) Fluid type Metric US Imperial Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Measure Measure Measure Fuel 41 L 10-7/8 gal 9 gal • For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” (P. 10-4). • Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is recom- With oil filter 4.1 L 4-3/8 qt 3-5/8 qt mended. Engine oil*1 change • If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic Drain and refill 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage 1*: For additional information, caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as rec- see “Engine oil” (P. 8-5). Without oil filter ommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited 3.8 L 4 qt 3-3/8 qt change Warranty. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” (P. 10-7). Engine coolant • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) 6.95 L 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal with reservoir or equivalent • Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. For additional information, see “Continu- Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid” NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids (P. 8-9). other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet. Refill to the proper level according to the • Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in Brake fluid instructions, see "Brake fluid” (P. 8-9). mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3.

10-2 Technical and consumer information Capacity (approximate) Fluid type Metric US Imperial Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Measure Measure Measure Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) • HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — • For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8). • Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent Air conditioning system oil — — — • For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8). • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An- Windshield-washer fluid 4.2 L 1 1/8 gal 7/8 gal tifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3 FUEL RECOMMENDATION • Do not use a fuel containing more • U.S. government regulations require Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your ethanol dispensing pumps to be tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock vehicle is not designed to run on a identified by a small, square, orange Index) number (Research octane number fuel containing more than 15% etha- and black label with the common ab- 91). nol. Using a fuel containing more breviation or the appropriate per- than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not spe- centage for that region. CAUTION cifically designed for a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol can ad- Gasoline specifications • Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door versely affect the emission control label can operate on E-85. Fuel sys- devices and systems of the vehicle. NISSAN recommends using gasoline that tem or other damage can occur if Damage caused by such fuel is not meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) E-85 is used in vehicles that are not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle specifications where it is available. Many of designed to run on E-85. Limited Warranty. the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission con- • Using a fuel other than that specified • Do not use fuel that contains the oc- trol system and vehicle performance. Ask could adversely affect the emission tane booster methylcyclopentadi- your service station manager if the gaso- control system, and may also affect enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). line meets the WWFC specifications. the warranty coverage. Using fuel containing MMT may ad- • Under no circumstances should a versely affect vehicle performance Reformulated gasoline leaded gasoline be used, because and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel this will damage the three-way dispensers are labeled to indicate Some fuel suppliers are now producing re- catalyst. MMT content, so you may have to formulated gasolines. These gasolines are consult your gasoline retailer for specially designed to reduce vehicle emis- more details. Note that Federal and sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards California laws prohibit the use of cleaner air and suggests that you use re- MMT in reformulated gasoline. formulated gasoline when available.

10-4 Technical and consumer information Gasoline containing oxygenates • If a methanol blend is used, it should E–15 fuel contain no more than 5% methanol Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. should also contain a suitable amount Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed of appropriate cosolvents and corro- or without advertising their presence. to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula- sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- NISSAN does not recommend the use of tions require fuel ethanol dispensing lated with appropriate cosolvents and fuels of which the oxygenate content and pumps to be identified with small, square, corrosion inhibitors, such methanol the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- orange and black label with the common blends may cause fuel system damage not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask abbreviation or the appropriate percent- and/or vehicle performance problems. your service station manager. age for that region. At this time, sufficient data is not avail- If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, able to ensure that all methanol blends please take the following precautions as are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. E–85 fuel the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle If any driveability problems such as engine E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% performance problems and/or fuel system stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe- fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. damage. rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel • The fuel should be unleaded and have immediately change to a non-oxygenate Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve- an octane rating no lower than that fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. hicle. U.S. government regulations require recommended for unleaded gasoline. fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- Take care not to spill gasoline during re- • If an oxygenate-blend other than tified by a small, square, orange and black fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates methanol blend is used, it should con- label with the common abbreviation or the can cause paint damage. tain no more than 15% oxygenate. appropriate percentage for that region.

Technical and consumer information 10-5 Fuel containing MMT Octane rating tips Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga- Using unleaded gasoline with an octane which may cause excessive fuel consump- nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad- rating lower than recommended can tion or engine damage. If any of the above ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” symptoms are encountered, have your ve- use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping hicle checked. It is recommended that you adversely affect vehicle performance, in- noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. cluding the emissions control system. Note damage. If you detect a persistent heavy that while some fuel pumps label MMT spark knock even when using gasoline However, now and then you may notice content, not all do, so you may have to of the stated octane rating, or if you hear light spark knock for a short time while consult your gasoline retailer for more steady spark knock while holding a accelerating or driving up hills. This is not details. steady speed on level roads, it is recom- a cause for concern, because you get the mended that you have a NISSAN dealer greatest fuel benefit when there is light Aftermarket fuel additives correct the condition. Failure to correct spark knock for a short time under heavy the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for engine load. NISSAN does not recommend the use of which NISSAN is not responsible. any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

10-6 Technical and consumer information Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil LTI2051 viscosity based on the temperatures at ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER Select only engine oils that meet the which the vehicle will be operated before RECOMMENDATIONS American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi- the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos- cation or International Lubricant Standard- ity other than that recommended could Selecting the correct oil ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) cause serious engine damage. certification and SAE viscosity standard. It is essential to choose the correct grade, These oils have the API certification mark Selecting the correct oil filter quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure on the front of the container. Oils which do Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a satisfactory engine life and performance. not have the specified quality label should high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When For additional information, see “Recom- not be used as they could cause engine replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” damage. its equivalent for the reason described in (P.10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an “Change intervals.” energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

Technical and consumer information 10-7 Change intervals AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner The oil and oil filter change intervals for REFRIGERANT AND OIL system. your engine are based on the use of the RECOMMENDATIONS specified quality oils and filters. Using en- The air conditioner system in your gine oil and filters that are not of the speci- NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and and filter change intervals could reduce NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG or the engine life. Damage to the engine caused exact equivalents. by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is CAUTION not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The use of any other refrigerant or oil Your engine was filled with a high-quality will cause severe damage to the air engine oil when it was built.You do not have conditioning system and will require to change the oil before the first recom- the replacement of all air conditioner mended change interval. Oil and filter system components. change intervals depend upon how you The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in use your vehicle. your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the Operation under the following conditions earth's ozone layer. Although this refriger- may require more frequent oil and filter ant does not affect the earth's atmo- changes: sphere, certain government regulations re- • repeated short distance driving at cold quire the recovery and recycling of any outside temperatures refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has • driving in dusty conditions the trained technicians and equipment • extensive idling needed to recover and recycle your air con- • stop and go commuting ditioner system refrigerant. For additional information, see “Mainte- nance and schedules” (P. 9-2).

10-8 Technical and consumer information SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE Model 1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model) Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6) Displacement cu in (cm 3) 97.51 (1,598) Firing order 1–3–4–2 Idle speed CVT in N (Neutral) position No adjustment is necessary. Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO%atidle Spark plug DILKAR6K-11 Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Technical and consumer information 10-9 WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm) Units: in (mm) Aluminum 17 x 6.5J 1.77 (45) Overall length 169.6 (4,309) Steel 16 x 6J 1.77 (45) Overall width 69.3 (1,760) T-type (Steel spare) 15 x 4T 1.18 (30) Overall height 63.4 (1,610) 16 x 4T 1.18 (30) Track Tire size Front 59.8 (1,520) P205/60R16 Rear 60.4 (1,535) P205/55R17 Wheelbase 103.1 (2,620) Spare tire Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) For additional infor- T125/90D15 mation, refer to the Temporary “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. T125/80D16 Gross axle weight rating certification label” Front lbs. (kg) on the center pillar between the driv- lbs. (kg) Rear er's side front and rear doors.

10-10 Technical and consumer information WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws LTI2050 LTI2258 and regulations. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards (VIN) PLATE (chassis number) vary according to the country, state, prov- The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The vehicle identification number is lo- ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica- plate is attached as shown. This number is cated as shown. tions may differ. the identification for your vehicle and is When any vehicle is to be taken into an- used in the vehicle registration. other country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

Technical and consumer information 10-11 LTI2469 WTI0172 LTI2268 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION EMISSION CONTROL The number is stamped on the engine as LABEL INFORMATION LABEL shown. The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle The emission control information label is Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi- attached to the underside of the hood as cation label is affixed as shown. This label shown. contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identifi- cation Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

10-12 Technical and consumer information LTI2251 LTI2233 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire The air conditioner specification label is af- and Loading Information label. The label is fixed to the underside of the hood as located as shown. shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-13 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Symbol Name Reference Graphic

Caution ISO 7000 0434

Air Conditioning System ISO 2575 D01 (MAC)

MAC System Lubricant Type (PAG–POE)

Requires Registered Technician to Service MAC System LTI2540 For alignment purposes, there are two Flammable Refrigerant marks on the radiator grille to indicate the correct position for each screw. Air Conditioner Specification Label Symbols To install the front license plate: Use two 6 mm self-tapping screws to attach front license plate to radiator grille. NOTE: Self-tapping screws are not supplied with vehicle.

10-14 Technical and consumer information VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING • Curb Weight (actual weight of your • GCWR (Gross Combined Weight vehicle) - vehicle weight including: Rating) - The maximum total • It is extremely dangerous to standard and optional equipment, weight rating of the vehicle, pas- ride in a cargo area inside a ve- fluids, emergency tools, and spare sengers, cargo, and trailer. hicle. In a collision, people rid- tire assembly. This weight does • Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, ing in these areas are more not include passengers and cargo. Total load capacity - maximum to- likely to be seriously injured or • GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb tal weight limit specified of the load killed. weight plus the combined weight (passengers and cargo) for the ve- • Do not allow people to ride in of passengers and cargo. hicle. This is the maximum com- any area of your vehicle that is • GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- bined weight of occupants and not equipped with seats and ing) - maximum total combined cargo that can be loaded into the seat belts. weight of the unloaded vehicle, vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow • Be sure everyone in your ve- passengers, cargo, hitch, trailer a trailer, the trailer tongue weight hicle is in a seat and using a tongue load and any other op- must be included as part of the seat belt properly. tional equipment. This information cargo load. This information is lo- is located on the F.M.V.S.S. certifica- cated on the Tire and Loading In- TERMS tion label. formation label. It is important to familiarize yourself • GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - • Cargo capacity - permissible with the following terms before maximum weight (load) limit weight of cargo, the subtracted loading your vehicle: specified for the front or rear axle. weight of occupants from the load This information is located on the limit. F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Technical and consumer information 10-15 VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. For additional information, see “Mea- surement of weights” (P. 10-19). Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as “Seating Ca- pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc- LTI2335 cupants and cargo”, add the weight Example of all occupants, then add the total Steps For Determining Correct 1. Locate the statement “The com- cargo weight. Examples are shown Load Limit bined weight of occupants and in the following illustration. cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. 10-16 Technical and consumer information 2. Determine the combined weight 6. If your vehicle will be towing a of the driver and passengers that trailer, load from your trailer will be will be riding in your vehicle. transferred to your vehicle. Con- 3. Subtract the combined weight of sult this manual to determine the driver and passengers from how this reduces the available XXX kg or XXX lbs. cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. 4. The resulting figure equals the Towing a trailer with a vehicle that is available amount of cargo and not intended for towing may result in luggage load capacity. For ex- an accident involving injury or death. ample, if the “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 WARNING LIC4300 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the Cargo area luggage hooks amount of available cargo and Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Towing a trailer may result in an acci- SECURING THE LOAD luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. dent involving injury or death. There are luggage hooks located in the (1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) Before driving a loaded vehicle, con- cargo area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other 5. Determine the combined weight firm that you do not exceed the types of straps. of luggage and cargo being (GVWR) or the (GAWR) for your ve- When securing items using luggage loaded on the vehicle. That weight hicle. For additional information, see hooks, do not apply a load over more may not safely exceed the avail- “Measurement of weights” (P. 10-19). than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook. able cargo and luggage load ca- Also check tires for proper inflation pacity calculated in step 4. pressures. For additional information, see “Tire and Loading Informa- tion label” (P. 8-29). Technical and consumer information 10-17 WARNING LOADING TIPS • Do not load your vehicle any • The GVW must not exceed GVWR or • Properly secure all cargo with ropes heavier than the GVWR or the or straps to help prevent it from slid- GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./ maximum front and rear ing or shifting. Do not place cargo C.M.V.S.S. certification label. GAWRs. If you do, parts of your higher than the seatbacks. In a sud- • Do not load the front and rear axle vehicle can break, tire damage den stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed could occur, or it can change • The child restraint top tether strap the GVWR. the way your vehicle handles. may be damaged by contact with This could result in loss of con- items in the cargo area. Secure any WARNING trol and cause personal injury. items in the cargo area. Your child • Overloading and improper could be seriously injured or killed in • Properly secure all cargo with a collision if the top tether strap is loading not only can shorten ropes or straps to help prevent damaged. the life of your vehicle and the it from sliding or shifting. Do • Do not load your vehicle any heavier tire, but can also cause unsafe not place cargo higher than the than the GVWR or the maximum front vehicle handling and longer and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of seatbacks. In a sudden stop or braking distances. This may your vehicle can break, tire damage collision, unsecured cargo could occur, or it can change the way cause a premature tire failure could cause personal injury. your vehicle handles. This could re- which could result in a serious sult in loss of control and cause personal injury. accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

10-18 Technical and consumer information TOWING A TRAILER

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Continuously Variable Secure loose items to prevent FLAT TOWING Transmission weight shifts that could affect the Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu- balance of your vehicle. When the ve- the ground is sometimes called flat towing. ously variable transmission, an appropriate hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and This method is sometimes used when vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the weigh the front and the rear wheels towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve- towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow hicle, such as a motor home. the dolly manufacturer's recommenda- separately to determine axle loads. tions when using their product. Individual axle loads should not ex- CAUTION ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight • Failure to follow these guidelines can Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle result in severe transmission loads should not exceed the Gross damage. Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These • Whenever flat towing your vehicle, ratings are given on the vehicle cer- always tow forward, never backward. tification label. If weight ratings are • Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the exceeded, move or remove items to ground. Doing so may cause serious bring all weights below the ratings. and expensive damage to the powertrain. • DO NOT tow any continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication. • For emergency towing procedures see “Towing recommended by NISSAN” (P. 6-13).

Technical and consumer information 10-19 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual- conditions on specified government test WARNING ity Grades: All passenger car tires must surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire conform to federal safety requirements in marked C may have poor traction The temperature grade for this tire is addition to these grades. performance. established for a tire that is properly Quality grades can be found where appli- inflated and not overloaded. Excessive cable on the tire sidewall between tread WARNING speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combi- shoulder and maximum section width. For The traction grade assigned to this tire example: nation, can cause heat build-up and is based on straight-ahead braking possible tire failure. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A traction tests, and does not include ac- Treadwear celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when Temperature A, B and C tested under controlled conditions on a The temperature grades are A (the high- specified government test course. For ex- est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one tance to the generation of heat, and its and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the ability to dissipate heat when tested under government course as a tire graded 100. controlled conditions on a specified indoor The relative performance of tires depends laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- upon the actual conditions of their use, perature can cause the material of the tire however, and may depart significantly from to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- the norm due to variations in driving habits, cessive temperature can lead to sudden service practices and differences in road tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a characteristics and climate. level of performance which all passenger Traction AA, A, B and C car tires must meet under the Federal Mo- tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A The traction grades, from highest to low- represent higher levels of performance on est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre- the laboratory test wheel than the mini- sent the tire's ability to stop on wet pave- mum required by law. ment as measured under controlled

10-20 Technical and consumer information EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS WARRANTY

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol- For USA formation about motor vehicle safety lowing emission warranties: If you believe that your vehicle has a from http://www.safercar.gov. For USA defect which could cause a crash or You may notify NISSAN by contact- 1. Emission Defects Warranty could cause injury or death, you ing our Consumer Affairs Depart- 2. Emissions Performance Warranty should immediately inform the Na- ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. Details of this warranty may be found with tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- For Canada other vehicle warranties in your Warranty istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- Information Booklet which comes with fying NISSAN. If you believe that your vehicle has a your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a defect which could cause a crash or Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, If NHTSA receives similar complaints, you may obtain a replacement by writing could cause injury or death, you to: it may open an investigation, and if it should immediately inform Trans- • Nissan North America, Inc. finds that a safety defect exists in a port Canada in addition to notifying Consumer Affairs Department group of vehicles, it may order a re- NISSAN. P.O. Box 685003 call and remedy campaign. However, Franklin, TN 37068-5003 NHTSA cannot become involved in If Transport Canada receives com- For Canada individual problems between you, plaints, it may open an investigation, Emission Control System Warranty your dealer, or NISSAN. and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may Details of this warranty may be found with To contact NHTSA, you may call the other vehicle warranties in your Warranty request that NISSAN conduct a recall Information Booklet which comes with Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at campaign. However, Transport your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); Canada cannot become involved in Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, go to http://www.safercar.gov; or individual problems between you, you may obtain a replacement by writing write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 to: your dealer, or NISSAN. Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. • Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive 20590. You can also obtain other in- Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 Technical and consumer information 10-21 READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

You may contact Transport Cana- To notify NISSAN of any safety con- Due to legal requirements in some states da's Defect Investigations and Re- cerns please contact our Consumer and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the calls Division toll free at 1-800-333- Information Centre toll free at “ready condition” for an Inspection/ 0510. You may also report safety 1-800-387-0122. Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission defects online at: http:// control system. www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can (English speakers) or http:// be obtained by ordinary usage of the www.tc.gc.ca/fra/ vehicle. securiteautomobile/menu.htm If a powertrain system component is re- (French speakers) paired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi- Or contact Transport Canada by tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the mail at: vehicle's inspection/maintenance test Transport Canada Motor Vehicle readiness condition. Place the ignition Safety Investigations Laboratory switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z0A1 Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds Additional information concerning and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not motor vehicle safety may be ob- blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi- tained from Transport Canada's tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you Road Safety Information Centre at visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con- 1-800-333-0371 or online at dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing. www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/ securiteroutiere (French speakers). 10-22 Technical and consumer information EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data law enforcement, could combine the EDR Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an data with the type of personally identifying model year and prior can be purchased. A EDR is to record, in certain crash or near data routinely acquired during a crash Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best crash-like situations, such as an air bag investigation. source of service and repair information for deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data To read data recorded by an EDR, special your vehicle. This manual is the same one that will assist in understanding how a ve- equipment is required, and access to the used by the factory-trained technicians hicle's systems performed. The EDR is de- vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine signed to record data related to vehicle dy- the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be namics and safety systems for a short dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- purchased. period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. ment, that have the special equipment, can For USA The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- read the information if they have access to cord such data as: For current pricing and availability of Genu- the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: • How various systems in your vehicle were accessed with the consent of the vehicle operating; owner or lessee or as otherwise required or www.nissan-techinfo.com • Whether or not the driver and passenger permitted by law. For current pricing and availability of Genu- safety belts were buckled/fastened; ine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact: • How far (if at all) the driver was depress- 1-800-247-5321 ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, For Canada • How fast the vehicle was traveling. To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN • Sounds are not recorded. Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your These data can help provide a better un- nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num- derstanding of the circumstances in which ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data area, call the NISSAN Information Center at are recorded by your vehicle only if a non- 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep- trivial crash situation occurs; no data are resentative will assist you. recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as Technical and consumer information 10-23 MEMO

10-24 Technical and consumer information 11 Index

AM radio operation...... 4-50 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 8-22 A AM radio reception ...... 4-44 Before starting the engine ...... 5-15 Active Ride Control (ARC) ...... 5-138 AM/FM radio ...... 4-48, 4-50 Belt (See drive belt)...... 8-13 Air bag (See supplemental restraint Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-52 Blind Spot Warning (BSW)...... 5-35 system) ...... 1-42 Bluetooth® audio ...... 4-59 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch .....2-52 Air bag system FM radio operation ...... 4-51 Bluetooth® audio ...... 4-59 Front (See supplemental front impact FM radio reception ...... 4-44 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system. .4-67 air bag system) ...... 1-50 iPod® Player ...... 4-56 Bluetooth® connections...... 4-81 Air bag warning labels...... 1-63 iPod® player operation ...... 4-56 Connecting procedure...... 4-72 Air bag warning light ...... 1-64, 2-15 Radio ...... 4-43 Phone indicators ...... 4-71 Air bag warning light, Steering wheel audio control Text messaging ...... 4-77 supplemental...... 1-64, 2-15 switch...... 4-62 Voice commands ...... 4-73 Air cleaner housing filter ...... 8-15 USB Connections ...... 4-54 Booster seats ...... 1-38 Air conditioner USB interface ...... 4-53 Brake Air conditioner operation.....4-35, 4-41 Autolight switch ...... 2-44 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-132 Air conditioner specification label . .10-13 Automatic Brake fluid ...... 8-9 Air conditioner system refrigerant Automatic power window switch . . .2-72 Brake light (See stop light) ...... 8-25 recommendations ...... 10-8 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-29 Brake system...... 5-132 Air conditioner system refrigerant Automatic brake hold ...... 5-25 Brake warning light ...... 2-12 and oil recommendations ...... 10-8 Automatic door locks...... 3-6 Brake wear indicators...... 2-22,8-18 Heater and air conditioner ...... 4-40 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . .5-88 Parking brake operation...... 5-22 Heater and air conditioner controls. .4-41 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Self-adjusting brakes...... 8-17 Servicing air conditioner ...... 4-43 with Pedestrian Detection ...... 5-98 Brake Assist ...... 5-134 Air flow charts ...... 4-36 Brake fluid...... 8-9 Brake system ...... 5-132 Alarm system (See vehicle security B system)...... 2-37 Brakes ...... 8-17 Anchor point locations ...... 1-25 Break-in schedule ...... 5-128 Battery ...... 5-145, 8-11 Brightness control Antenna ...... 4-63 Charge warning light ...... 2-13 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .....5-132 Instrument panel ...... 2-49 Battery replacement ...... 8-22 Brightness/contrast button ...... 4-7 Antifreeze...... 5-145 Key fob ...... 8-22 Audio system ...... 4-43 Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-12 Bulb replacement ...... 8-25 Control panel buttons ...... 4-3 Drive belt ...... 8-13 Brightness/contrast button...... 4-7 Drive Systems OFF switch...... 2-53 Controls Driving C Audio controls (steering wheel).....4-62 Cold weather driving...... 5-145 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-41 Driving with Continuously Variable Capacities and recommended Heater and air conditioner controls Transmission (CVT)...... 5-17 fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 (automatic) ...... 4-40 Precautions when starting and Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-67 Heater and air conditioner controls driving ...... 5-4 Cargo (manual) ...... 4-32 Driving the vehicle ...... 5-17 (See vehicle loading information) .....10-15 Coolant Cargo cover ...... 2-66 Capacities and recommended Chassis control ...... 5-137 fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 E Check tire pressure ...... 2-35 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-5 Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-25 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 E-call (SOS) Button ...... 2-56 Child restraints...... 1-18,1-19,1-21,1-23 Corrosion protection ...... 7-7 Economy - fuel ...... 5-129 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Cruise control ...... 5-56 Emergency engine shutoff ...... 5-13,6-2 CHildren) System ...... 1-23 Cup holders ...... 2-63 Emission control information label . . . .10-12 Precautions on child Emission control system warranty . . . .10-21 restraints ...... 1-21,1-27,1-33, 1-38 Engine Top tether strap anchor point D Before starting the engine ...... 5-15 locations ...... 1-25 Capacities and recommended Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-6 Daytime Running Light System ...... 2-48 fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 Cleaning exterior and interior ...... 7-2,7-4 Defroster switch Changing engine coolant ...... 8-5 Clock set ...... 4-5 Rear window and outside mirror Changing engine oil ...... 8-6 Cold weather driving ...... 5-145 defroster switch ...... 2-42, 4-34, 4-42 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-6 Console box ...... 2-62 Rear window defroster switch .....2-42 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 Continuously Variable Transmission Dimensions and weights ...... 10-10 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-5 (CVT) ...... 5-17 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-49 Engine compartment check Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Display locations ...... 8-3 fluid ...... 8-9 Information display ...... 2-23 Engine cooling system...... 8-4 Driving with Continuously Variable Display controls (see control panel Engine oil ...... 8-5 Transmission (CVT)...... 5-17 buttons) ...... 4-3 Engine oil and oil filter Transmission shift selector lock Door locks ...... 3-4, 3-5 recommendation ...... 10-7 release ...... 5-20 Door open warning light ...... 2-13 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-14

11-2 Engine oil viscosity ...... 10-7 Front air bag system Head restraints ...... 1-5 Engine serial number ...... 10-12 (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-50 Headlight and turn signal switch .....2-43 Engine specifications ...... 10-9 Front seats ...... 1-2 Headlight control switch...... 2-43 Starting the engine ...... 5-15 Front-door pocket ...... 2-60 Headlights ...... 8-24 Engine Block Heater...... 5-146 Fuel Heated seat switches ...... 2-51 Event Data recorders ...... 10-23 Capacities and recommended Heated steering wheel switch ...... 2-52 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...... 5-4 fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 Heater Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2 Fuel economy ...... 5-129 Heater and air conditioner...... 4-40 Explanation of scheduled maintenance Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-41 items ...... 9-5 Fuel octane rating ...... 10-6 Heater operation ...... 4-34, 4-41 Extended storage switch ...... 2-59 Fuel recommendation ...... 10-4 Hill start assist system ...... 5-139 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-25 Hood ...... 3-21 Fuel efficient driving tips ...... 5-128 Hook F Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 Luggage hook ...... 2-65 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-25 Horn ...... 2-50 F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 Fuses...... 8-18 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher Fusible links ...... 8-19,8-22 switch) ...... 6-2 I Flat tire ...... 6-3, 6-4 Floor mat positioning aid ...... 7-6 G Ignition switch Fluid Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-11 Brake fluid ...... 8-9 Gauge Immobilizer system ...... 2-39, 5-14 Capacities and recommended Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 Important vehicle information label . . .10-12 fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 Speedometer...... 2-5, 2-6 In-cabin microfilter ...... 8-15 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Tachometer...... 2-7 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-129 fluid ...... 8-9 Trip odometer ...... 2-5, 2-6 Indicator Engine coolant...... 8-4 General maintenance ...... 9-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery Engine oil ...... 8-5 Glove box ...... 2-62 discharge indicator ...... 5-13 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-10 Grocery hooks ...... 2-65 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . .3-29 Fog light switch ...... 2-50 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-49 Forward Driving Aids Instrument panel ...... 0-6, 2-2 System Temporarily H Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-49 Unavailable . .2-36, 5-73, 5-94, 5-105, 5-120 Intelligent Around View Monitor ...... 4-16 Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-67 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ...... 5-58 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 6-2 11-3 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) .....5-124 Low windshield-washer fluid L Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) ...... 5-138 warning light ...... 2-19 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning Labels Personal lights ...... 2-75 (I-FCW) ...... 5-109 Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13 Security indicator light ...... 2-15 Intelligent Key system Emission control information label . .10-12 Trunk light ...... 2-75 Key operating range ...... 3-8 Engine serial number ...... 10-12 Lights ...... 8-24 Key operation ...... 3-9 F.M.V.S.S. certification label...... 10-12 Map lights ...... 2-74 Mechanical key...... 3-3 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Lock Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-13 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Child safety rear door lock...... 3-6 Troubleshooting guide ...... 3-16 plate ...... 10-11 Door locks ...... 3-4, 3-5 Warning signals...... 3-16 Warning labels (for SRS) ...... 1-63 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-25 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) ...... 5-137 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)...... 5-28 Power door locks ...... 3-5, 3-6 Interior light...... 2-73 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch . .2-53 Low fuel warning light . .2-14, 2-17, 2-19, 2-32 iPod® Player ...... 4-56 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Low tire pressure warning light ...... 2-17 ISOFIX child restraints...... 1-23 CHildren) System ...... 1-23 Low windshield-washer fluid Launch bar menu...... 4-7 warning light ...... 2-19 Luggage (See vehicle loading J License plate Installing the license plate...... 10-14 information) ...... 10-15 Luggage hook ...... 2-65 Jump starting ...... 6-10,8-12 Liftgate ...... 3-22 Light Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . .2-67, 2-68 Air bag warning light ...... 1-64, 2-15 K Brake light (See stop light) ...... 8-25 M Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-12 Key ...... 3-2 Bulb replacement ...... 8-25 Maintenance Key fob battery replacement ...... 8-22 Charge warning light ...... 2-13 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Keyless entry Exterior and Interior lights ...... 8-25 Inside the vehicle ...... 9-3 With Intelligent Key system Fog light switch ...... 2-50 Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 (See Intelligent Key system) ...... 3-13 Fog lights ...... 8-25 Outside the vehicle ...... 9-2 Keys Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-43 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-17 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-7 Headlight control switch ...... 2-43 Under the hood and vehicle ...... 9-4 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Headlights...... 8-24 Maintenance requirements...... 9-2 keys ...... 3-3 Interior light ...... 2-73 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7 Light bulbs ...... 8-24 Malfunction indicator light...... 2-19 Low tire pressure warning light .....2-17 11-4 Manual front seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-5 Precautions on booster Map lights ...... 2-74 Engine oil ...... 8-5 seats ...... 1-21,1-27,1-33, 1-38 Map pocket ...... 2-60 Engine oil and oil filter Precautions on child Menu button...... 4-5 recommendation ...... 10-7 restraints ...... 1-21,1-27,1-33, 1-38 Meters and gauges ...... 2-4 Engine oil viscosity ...... 10-7 Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-10 Instrument brightness control .....2-49 Outside mirrors ...... 3-29 Precautions on supplemental restraint Mirror Overheat system ...... 1-42 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-29 If your vehicle overheats ...... 6-12 Precautions when starting and Outside mirrors ...... 3-29 Owner's manual order form ...... 10-23 driving ...... 5-4 Rearview...... 3-28 Owner's manual/service manual order Push starting ...... 6-12 Vanity mirror ...... 3-28 information ...... 10-23 Mirrors ...... 3-28 Moving Object Detection (MOD) ...... 4-27 R P Radio N Parking Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-67 Parking brake operation ...... 5-22 FM/AM radio ...... 4-48 NISSAN Anti-Theft System ...... 2-38, 5-14 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-130 Steering wheel audio control NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-7 Parking brake ...... 2-13,2-16,2-21 switch ...... 4-62 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery Personal lights ...... 2-75 Readiness for inspection maintenance discharge indicator ...... 5-13 Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-67 (I/M) test ...... 10-22 NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ...... 3-2 Power Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) ...... 5-81 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Power door locks ...... 3-5, 3-6 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ...... 5-46 System ...... 2-39, 5-14 Power outlet ...... 2-58 Rear Door Alert...... 2-31, 2-32, 2-56 NissanConnect® Owner's Manual ...... 4-2 Powerrearwindows...... 2-72 Rear power windows ...... 2-72 Power steering system ...... 5-131 Rear seat ...... 1-4 Power windows ...... 2-70 Rear Sonar System (RSS) ...... 5-140 O Rear power windows ...... 2-72 Rear sonar system OFF switch...... 2-54 Power outlet ...... 2-58 Rear window and outside mirror defroster Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6 Power steering ...... 5-131 switch ...... 2-42, 4-34, 4-42 Oil Precautions Rear window defroster switch ...... 2-42 Capacities and recommended Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 Rear window wiper and washer fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 On-pavement and off-road driving switches...... 2-41 Changing engine oil ...... 8-6 precautions...... 5-9 Rearview mirror ...... 3-28 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-6 11-5 RearView Monitor...... 4-8 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-17 Jump starting ...... 6-10,8-12 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-24 Seat belt warning light...... 1-13,2-14,2-15 Precautions when starting and Recommended Fluids ...... 10-2 Seatback pockets...... 2-60 driving ...... 5-4 Recorders Seats Push starting ...... 6-12 Event Data ...... 10-23 Adjustment ...... 1-2 Starting the engine ...... 5-15 Refrigerant recommendation ...... 10-8 Front seats ...... 1-2 Starting the engine ...... 5-15 Registering a vehicle in another Manual front seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Steering country ...... 10-11 Rear seat ...... 1-4 Power steering system ...... 5-131 Remote Engine Start...... 3-18,5-16 Security indicator light ...... 2-15 Steering wheel ...... 3-26 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-21 Security system (NISSAN Anti-Theft System), Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-62 Roof rack...... 2-67, 2-68 engine start ...... 2-38, 5-14 Stop light ...... 8-25 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Storage ...... 2-60 System), engine start ...... 2-39, 5-14 Storage tray ...... 2-61 S Security systems Sun visors ...... 3-27 Vehicle security system...... 2-37 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-63 Safety Self-adjusting brakes ...... 8-17 Supplemental air bag warning Child safety rear door lock...... 3-6 Service manual order form ...... 10-23 light ...... 1-64, 2-15 Child seat belts .....1-21,1-27,1-33, 1-38 Servicing air conditioner...... 4-43 Supplemental front impact air bag Reporting safety defects (US only). . .10-21 Shifting system...... 1-50 Seat adjustment Continuously Variable Transmission Supplemental restraint system Front manual seat adjustment ...... 1-3 (CVT) ...... 5-18 Information and warning labels.....1-63 Rear seat adjustment...... 1-4 Shoulder belt height adjustment ...... 1-16 Precautions on supplemental restraint Seat belt Siri® Eyes-Free ...... 4-64 system ...... 1-42 Child safety ...... 1-18 Sonar Supplemental restraint system Infants and small children ...... 1-19 Rear system ...... 5-140 (Supplemental air bag system) ...... 1-42 Injured person...... 1-14 Spark plug replacement ...... 8-14 Switch Larger children ...... 1-19 Spark plugs ...... 8-14 Autolight switch ...... 2-44 Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-10 Specifications ...... 10-9 Automatic power window switch. . . .2-72 Pregnant women ...... 1-13 Speedometer ...... 2-5, 2-6 Fog light switch ...... 2-50 Seat belt extenders...... 1-17 SRS warning label ...... 1-63 Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-17 Stability control...... 5-134 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-43 Seat belts ...... 1-10,7-6 Standard maintenance ...... 9-8 Headlight control switch ...... 2-43 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-16 Starting Instrument brightness control .....2-49 Three-point type with retractor .....1-14 Before starting the engine ...... 5-15 Power door lock switch...... 3-5, 3-6 11-6 Rear sonar system OFF switch .....2-54 Towing Vehicle identification ...... 10-11 Rear window and outside mirror 4-wheel drive models ...... 6-14 Vehicle identification number (VIN) defroster switch ...... 2-42, 4-34, 4-42 Flat towing ...... 10-19 (Chassis number) ...... 10-11 Rear window defroster switch .....2-42 Trailer towing ...... 10-19 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Rear window wiper and washer Towing a trailer ...... 10-19 plate ...... 10-11 switches ...... 2-41 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-13 Vehicle immobilizer system .....2-39, 5-14 Turn signal switch ...... 2-49 Transmission Vehicle information display ...... 2-23 Continuously Variable Transmission Vehicle loading information ...... 10-15 (CVT) fluid ...... 8-9 Vehicle recovery ...... 6-14 T Driving with Continuously Variable Vehicle security system ...... 2-37 Transmission (CVT)...... 5-17 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Anti-Theft Tachometer ...... 2-7 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another System), engine start ...... 2-38, 5-14 Theft (NISSAN Anti-Theft System), country) ...... 10-11 Vehicle security system engine start ...... 2-38, 5-14 Trip odometer ...... 2-5, 2-6 (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Trunk light...... 2-75 engine start ...... 2-39, 5-14 engine start ...... 2-39, 5-14 Turn signal switch...... 2-49 Vents ...... 4-31 Three-way catalyst...... 5-4 Visors ...... 3-27 Tire Voice Prompt Interrupt...... 4-70 Flat tire ...... 6-3, 6-4 U Spare tire ...... 6-5, 8-38 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-20 W Tire chains ...... 8-34 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port Tire pressure ...... 8-27 (models without Navigation System) . . .4-53 Warning Tire rotation...... 8-35 USB/iPod® Charging Ports ...... 4-63 Air bag warning light ...... 1-64, 2-15 Types of tires ...... 8-33 Battery charge warning light ...... 2-13 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-20 Brake warning light ...... 2-12 Wheel/tire size ...... 10-10 V Door open warning light ...... 2-13 Wheels and tires ...... 8-27,10-10 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-14 Tire pressure Vanity mirror ...... 3-28 Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 Low tire pressure warning light .....2-17 Variable voltage control system ...... 8-13 Low fuel warning Tire Pressure Monitoring System Vehicle dimensions and weights .....10-10 light ...... 2-14,2-17,2-19,2-32 (TPMS)...... 5-5 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF Low tire pressure warning light .....2-17 Top tether strap child restraint ...... 1-25 switch ...... 2-55 Low windshield-washer fluid Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light ...... 2-19 system ...... 5-134 11-7 Seat belt warning light . . . .1-13, 2-14, 2-15 Supplemental air bag warning light...... 1-64, 2-15 Vehicle security system...... 2-37 Warning labels (for SRS) ...... 1-63 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders ...... 0-9, 2-10 Washer switch Rear window wiper and washer switches ...... 2-41 Weights (See dimensions and weights) ...... 10-10 Wheel/tire size ...... 10-10 Wheels and tires ...... 8-27,10-10 When traveling or registering in another country...... 10-11 Windows ...... 2-70 Locking passengers' windows .....2-72 Powerrearwindows...... 2-72 Power windows ...... 2-70 Rear power windows ...... 2-72 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-16 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-10 Wiper Rear window wiper and washer switches ...... 2-41 Wiper blades ...... 8-16 Wiper and washer switch ...... 2-40

11-8 GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION: • Do not use a fuel containing more • U.S. government regulations require Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle.Your ethanol dispensing pumps to be tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock vehicle is not designed to run on a identified by a small, square, orange Index) number (Research octane number fuel containing more than 15% etha- and black label with the common ab- 91). nol. Using a fuel containing more breviation or the appropriate per- than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not spe- centage for that region. cifically designed for a fuel contain- CAUTION For additional information, see “Recom- ing more than 15% ethanol can ad- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” • Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door versely affect the emission control (P. 10-2). label can operate on E-85. Fuel sys- devices and systems of the vehicle. tem or other damage can occur if Damage caused by such fuel is not ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: E-85 is used in vehicles that are not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle designed to run on E-85. Limited Warranty. For additional information, see “Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” • Using a fuel other than that specified • Do not use fuel that contains the oc- (P. 10-2). could adversely affect the emission tane booster methylcyclopentadi- control system, and may also affect enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). COLD TIRE PRESSURE: the warranty coverage. Using fuel containing MMT may ad- Refer to the Tire and Loading Information • Under no circumstances should a versely affect vehicle performance label. leaded gasoline be used, because and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel this will damage the three-way dispensers are labeled to indicate The label is typically located on the driver catalyst. MMT content, so you may have to side center pillar or on the driver's door. For consult your gasoline retailer for additional information, see “Wheels and more details. Note that Federal and tires” (P. 8-27). California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline. RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, see “Break-in schedule” (P.5-128). Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Printing : November 2020 Publication No.: OM21EM 0P15U0 Printed in the U.S.A. ‘21 P15-D